CA2192077C - Recording medium, apparatus and method for recording data on the recording medium, apparatus and method for reproducing data from the recording medium - Google Patents
Recording medium, apparatus and method for recording data on the recording medium, apparatus and method for reproducing data from the recording medium Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- CA2192077C CA2192077C CA002192077A CA2192077A CA2192077C CA 2192077 C CA2192077 C CA 2192077C CA 002192077 A CA002192077 A CA 002192077A CA 2192077 A CA2192077 A CA 2192077A CA 2192077 C CA2192077 C CA 2192077C
- Authority
- CA
- Canada
- Prior art keywords
- data
- information
- video
- pack
- sub
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Expired - Lifetime
Links
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 title claims description 50
- 230000009471 action Effects 0.000 claims abstract description 41
- 230000002194 synthesizing effect Effects 0.000 claims description 13
- 238000003491 array Methods 0.000 claims description 9
- 238000007906 compression Methods 0.000 claims description 7
- 230000006835 compression Effects 0.000 claims description 7
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 description 93
- 230000000875 corresponding effect Effects 0.000 description 89
- 230000033458 reproduction Effects 0.000 description 34
- 238000007726 management method Methods 0.000 description 27
- 230000015654 memory Effects 0.000 description 25
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 description 19
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 description 18
- 239000010410 layer Substances 0.000 description 16
- KRXMYBAZKJBJAB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-(4-methylphenyl)-1,2-benzothiazol-3-one Chemical compound C1=CC(C)=CC=C1N1C(=O)C2=CC=CC=C2S1 KRXMYBAZKJBJAB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 15
- 238000010586 diagram Methods 0.000 description 14
- 230000004044 response Effects 0.000 description 10
- 238000012546 transfer Methods 0.000 description 9
- 230000005236 sound signal Effects 0.000 description 8
- 238000004364 calculation method Methods 0.000 description 7
- 238000012545 processing Methods 0.000 description 7
- AGGKEGLBGGJEBZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N tetramethylenedisulfotetramine Chemical compound C1N(S2(=O)=O)CN3S(=O)(=O)N1CN2C3 AGGKEGLBGGJEBZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- 238000004891 communication Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000001276 controlling effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 238000002360 preparation method Methods 0.000 description 4
- 239000000758 substrate Substances 0.000 description 4
- 201000008271 Atypical teratoid rhabdoid tumor Diseases 0.000 description 3
- 239000002131 composite material Substances 0.000 description 3
- 238000012937 correction Methods 0.000 description 3
- 102100037812 Medium-wave-sensitive opsin 1 Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 230000004913 activation Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000012790 adhesive layer Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000001174 ascending effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000006243 chemical reaction Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000000284 extract Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000012986 modification Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000004048 modification Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000012795 verification Methods 0.000 description 2
- 101100281682 Danio rerio fsta gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 239000000872 buffer Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000003086 colorant Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000013144 data compression Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000003111 delayed effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000008020 evaporation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000001704 evaporation Methods 0.000 description 1
- JEIPFZHSYJVQDO-UHFFFAOYSA-N ferric oxide Chemical compound O=[Fe]O[Fe]=O JEIPFZHSYJVQDO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000002401 inhibitory effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000007246 mechanism Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000006996 mental state Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000013139 quantization Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000005070 sampling Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000013519 translation Methods 0.000 description 1
Classifications
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G11—INFORMATION STORAGE
- G11B—INFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
- G11B27/00—Editing; Indexing; Addressing; Timing or synchronising; Monitoring; Measuring tape travel
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G11—INFORMATION STORAGE
- G11B—INFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
- G11B27/00—Editing; Indexing; Addressing; Timing or synchronising; Monitoring; Measuring tape travel
- G11B27/10—Indexing; Addressing; Timing or synchronising; Measuring tape travel
- G11B27/34—Indicating arrangements
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G11—INFORMATION STORAGE
- G11B—INFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
- G11B27/00—Editing; Indexing; Addressing; Timing or synchronising; Monitoring; Measuring tape travel
- G11B27/02—Editing, e.g. varying the order of information signals recorded on, or reproduced from, record carriers
- G11B27/031—Electronic editing of digitised analogue information signals, e.g. audio or video signals
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G11—INFORMATION STORAGE
- G11B—INFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
- G11B27/00—Editing; Indexing; Addressing; Timing or synchronising; Monitoring; Measuring tape travel
- G11B27/02—Editing, e.g. varying the order of information signals recorded on, or reproduced from, record carriers
- G11B27/031—Electronic editing of digitised analogue information signals, e.g. audio or video signals
- G11B27/034—Electronic editing of digitised analogue information signals, e.g. audio or video signals on discs
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G11—INFORMATION STORAGE
- G11B—INFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
- G11B27/00—Editing; Indexing; Addressing; Timing or synchronising; Monitoring; Measuring tape travel
- G11B27/10—Indexing; Addressing; Timing or synchronising; Measuring tape travel
- G11B27/102—Programmed access in sequence to addressed parts of tracks of operating record carriers
- G11B27/105—Programmed access in sequence to addressed parts of tracks of operating record carriers of operating discs
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G11—INFORMATION STORAGE
- G11B—INFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
- G11B27/00—Editing; Indexing; Addressing; Timing or synchronising; Monitoring; Measuring tape travel
- G11B27/10—Indexing; Addressing; Timing or synchronising; Measuring tape travel
- G11B27/19—Indexing; Addressing; Timing or synchronising; Measuring tape travel by using information detectable on the record carrier
- G11B27/28—Indexing; Addressing; Timing or synchronising; Measuring tape travel by using information detectable on the record carrier by using information signals recorded by the same method as the main recording
- G11B27/30—Indexing; Addressing; Timing or synchronising; Measuring tape travel by using information detectable on the record carrier by using information signals recorded by the same method as the main recording on the same track as the main recording
- G11B27/3027—Indexing; Addressing; Timing or synchronising; Measuring tape travel by using information detectable on the record carrier by using information signals recorded by the same method as the main recording on the same track as the main recording used signal is digitally coded
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G11—INFORMATION STORAGE
- G11B—INFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
- G11B27/00—Editing; Indexing; Addressing; Timing or synchronising; Monitoring; Measuring tape travel
- G11B27/10—Indexing; Addressing; Timing or synchronising; Measuring tape travel
- G11B27/19—Indexing; Addressing; Timing or synchronising; Measuring tape travel by using information detectable on the record carrier
- G11B27/28—Indexing; Addressing; Timing or synchronising; Measuring tape travel by using information detectable on the record carrier by using information signals recorded by the same method as the main recording
- G11B27/32—Indexing; Addressing; Timing or synchronising; Measuring tape travel by using information detectable on the record carrier by using information signals recorded by the same method as the main recording on separate auxiliary tracks of the same or an auxiliary record carrier
- G11B27/327—Table of contents
- G11B27/329—Table of contents on a disc [VTOC]
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/40—Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
- H04N21/41—Structure of client; Structure of client peripherals
- H04N21/422—Input-only peripherals, i.e. input devices connected to specially adapted client devices, e.g. global positioning system [GPS]
- H04N21/42204—User interfaces specially adapted for controlling a client device through a remote control device; Remote control devices therefor
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/40—Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
- H04N21/41—Structure of client; Structure of client peripherals
- H04N21/426—Internal components of the client ; Characteristics thereof
- H04N21/42646—Internal components of the client ; Characteristics thereof for reading from or writing on a non-volatile solid state storage medium, e.g. DVD, CD-ROM
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/40—Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
- H04N21/41—Structure of client; Structure of client peripherals
- H04N21/426—Internal components of the client ; Characteristics thereof
- H04N21/42653—Internal components of the client ; Characteristics thereof for processing graphics
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/40—Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
- H04N21/47—End-user applications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/40—Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
- H04N21/47—End-user applications
- H04N21/482—End-user interface for program selection
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/40—Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
- H04N21/47—End-user applications
- H04N21/485—End-user interface for client configuration
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/40—Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
- H04N21/47—End-user applications
- H04N21/485—End-user interface for client configuration
- H04N21/4856—End-user interface for client configuration for language selection, e.g. for the menu or subtitles
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/80—Generation or processing of content or additional data by content creator independently of the distribution process; Content per se
- H04N21/83—Generation or processing of protective or descriptive data associated with content; Content structuring
- H04N21/845—Structuring of content, e.g. decomposing content into time segments
- H04N21/8455—Structuring of content, e.g. decomposing content into time segments involving pointers to the content, e.g. pointers to the I-frames of the video stream
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N9/00—Details of colour television systems
- H04N9/79—Processing of colour television signals in connection with recording
- H04N9/80—Transformation of the television signal for recording, e.g. modulation, frequency changing; Inverse transformation for playback
- H04N9/82—Transformation of the television signal for recording, e.g. modulation, frequency changing; Inverse transformation for playback the individual colour picture signal components being recorded simultaneously only
- H04N9/8205—Transformation of the television signal for recording, e.g. modulation, frequency changing; Inverse transformation for playback the individual colour picture signal components being recorded simultaneously only involving the multiplexing of an additional signal and the colour video signal
- H04N9/8227—Transformation of the television signal for recording, e.g. modulation, frequency changing; Inverse transformation for playback the individual colour picture signal components being recorded simultaneously only involving the multiplexing of an additional signal and the colour video signal the additional signal being at least another television signal
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G11—INFORMATION STORAGE
- G11B—INFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
- G11B2220/00—Record carriers by type
- G11B2220/20—Disc-shaped record carriers
- G11B2220/25—Disc-shaped record carriers characterised in that the disc is based on a specific recording technology
- G11B2220/2537—Optical discs
- G11B2220/2562—DVDs [digital versatile discs]; Digital video discs; MMCDs; HDCDs
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G11—INFORMATION STORAGE
- G11B—INFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
- G11B7/00—Recording or reproducing by optical means, e.g. recording using a thermal beam of optical radiation by modifying optical properties or the physical structure, reproducing using an optical beam at lower power by sensing optical properties; Record carriers therefor
- G11B7/002—Recording, reproducing or erasing systems characterised by the shape or form of the carrier
- G11B7/0037—Recording, reproducing or erasing systems characterised by the shape or form of the carrier with discs
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G11—INFORMATION STORAGE
- G11B—INFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
- G11B7/00—Recording or reproducing by optical means, e.g. recording using a thermal beam of optical radiation by modifying optical properties or the physical structure, reproducing using an optical beam at lower power by sensing optical properties; Record carriers therefor
- G11B7/007—Arrangement of the information on the record carrier, e.g. form of tracks, actual track shape, e.g. wobbled, or cross-section, e.g. v-shaped; Sequential information structures, e.g. sectoring or header formats within a track
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G11—INFORMATION STORAGE
- G11B—INFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
- G11B7/00—Recording or reproducing by optical means, e.g. recording using a thermal beam of optical radiation by modifying optical properties or the physical structure, reproducing using an optical beam at lower power by sensing optical properties; Record carriers therefor
- G11B7/007—Arrangement of the information on the record carrier, e.g. form of tracks, actual track shape, e.g. wobbled, or cross-section, e.g. v-shaped; Sequential information structures, e.g. sectoring or header formats within a track
- G11B7/013—Arrangement of the information on the record carrier, e.g. form of tracks, actual track shape, e.g. wobbled, or cross-section, e.g. v-shaped; Sequential information structures, e.g. sectoring or header formats within a track for discrete information, i.e. where each information unit is stored in a distinct discrete location, e.g. digital information formats within a data block or sector
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N5/00—Details of television systems
- H04N5/44—Receiver circuitry for the reception of television signals according to analogue transmission standards
- H04N5/445—Receiver circuitry for the reception of television signals according to analogue transmission standards for displaying additional information
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N5/00—Details of television systems
- H04N5/76—Television signal recording
- H04N5/78—Television signal recording using magnetic recording
- H04N5/782—Television signal recording using magnetic recording on tape
- H04N5/783—Adaptations for reproducing at a rate different from the recording rate
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N5/00—Details of television systems
- H04N5/76—Television signal recording
- H04N5/84—Television signal recording using optical recording
- H04N5/85—Television signal recording using optical recording on discs or drums
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N9/00—Details of colour television systems
- H04N9/79—Processing of colour television signals in connection with recording
- H04N9/80—Transformation of the television signal for recording, e.g. modulation, frequency changing; Inverse transformation for playback
- H04N9/804—Transformation of the television signal for recording, e.g. modulation, frequency changing; Inverse transformation for playback involving pulse code modulation of the colour picture signal components
- H04N9/8042—Transformation of the television signal for recording, e.g. modulation, frequency changing; Inverse transformation for playback involving pulse code modulation of the colour picture signal components involving data reduction
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N9/00—Details of colour television systems
- H04N9/79—Processing of colour television signals in connection with recording
- H04N9/80—Transformation of the television signal for recording, e.g. modulation, frequency changing; Inverse transformation for playback
- H04N9/82—Transformation of the television signal for recording, e.g. modulation, frequency changing; Inverse transformation for playback the individual colour picture signal components being recorded simultaneously only
- H04N9/8205—Transformation of the television signal for recording, e.g. modulation, frequency changing; Inverse transformation for playback the individual colour picture signal components being recorded simultaneously only involving the multiplexing of an additional signal and the colour video signal
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N9/00—Details of colour television systems
- H04N9/79—Processing of colour television signals in connection with recording
- H04N9/80—Transformation of the television signal for recording, e.g. modulation, frequency changing; Inverse transformation for playback
- H04N9/82—Transformation of the television signal for recording, e.g. modulation, frequency changing; Inverse transformation for playback the individual colour picture signal components being recorded simultaneously only
- H04N9/8205—Transformation of the television signal for recording, e.g. modulation, frequency changing; Inverse transformation for playback the individual colour picture signal components being recorded simultaneously only involving the multiplexing of an additional signal and the colour video signal
- H04N9/8211—Transformation of the television signal for recording, e.g. modulation, frequency changing; Inverse transformation for playback the individual colour picture signal components being recorded simultaneously only involving the multiplexing of an additional signal and the colour video signal the additional signal being a sound signal
- H04N9/8216—Transformation of the television signal for recording, e.g. modulation, frequency changing; Inverse transformation for playback the individual colour picture signal components being recorded simultaneously only involving the multiplexing of an additional signal and the colour video signal the additional signal being a sound signal using time division multiplex
Abstract
This invention forms a menu of video data as the background image of the menu and sub-picture data made of an selection item of the menu, alters highlight information for the selection item of the sub-picture data, thereby easily forming various menu. Specifically, a button area for surrounding the selection item and the action item represented by the sub-picture data is provided, and the color and contract of the pattern pixel, background pixel and highlighted pixel as pixel data in the button area are variously altered.
Description
TRANSLATION
D E S C R I P T I O N
RECORDING MEDIUM, APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR
RECORDING DATA ON THE RECORDING MEDIUM, APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR REPRODUCING DATA
FROM THE RECORDING MEDIUM
Technical Field This invention relates to a recording medium such as an optical disk for recording data of different object and type of compressed dynamic image, voice data, an apparatus for recording the data on the recording medium, a method of recording the data on the recording medium, an apparatus for reproducing the data from the recording medium and a method of reproducing the data from the recording medium.
Background Art Hereinafter, when a menu is provided in image data of video, an LD (laser disk), an selection item is superimposed on the displayed image by using a character generator of a reproducing apparatus irrespective of the image or image data including the selection item is prepared.
In the former case, when the number of character codes corresponding to an selection (or action item) item is contained in the video data, the reproducing apparatus can determined and display a position by using the character generator, and the display color of the character generator corresponding to the selection item corresponding to the selected~umber can be altered in the case of use's sel-ection, and hence the selected result can be recognized by the user.
However, according to the video data, the former case has disadvantages that the content and the language for displaying the selection item cannot are not known and the preparation of the character generator corresponding to the all in the reproducing apparatus is actually impossible.
In the latter case, since menu data is formed as the video-image, no burden is loaded on the reproducing apparatus, but to recognize the selection item corre-sponding to the user's selected-result, it is necessary to call and display new image data corresponding to the selectionnumber, and hence it has disadvantages that takes a time to display the new image for the recognition and user's erroneous operation will result.
Specifically, when the image data including the selection result is prepared, it is necessary to prepare the following three video data (a) video data of the state that any of the selection items "1. ABCDC" and "2. XYZ" is selected.
(b) video data of the state that selection item "2. XYZ" is selected, and (c) video data of the state selection item "2.
XYZ" is selected. The reproducing apparatus selects necessary image data and reproduces in response to the _.... _, 2~9~~~7 user's selected result, and hence a menu screen that the user's selected result is reflected can be displayed.
However, in this case, new-reproducing process is executed, it takes a time of several seconds until the menu screen reflected by the user's selected result, and it has disadvantages that it is anxious that the user is not selected for a queue time of the period and the possibility of executing the erroneous operation is increased.
When the selection item of the menu is displayed on the reproducing apparatus, as the image data for forming the menu, only the videodata of the state having no selection item may be prepared, and the selection item to be displayed on the video data for simply forming the menu is simultaneously recorded on the corresponding character code, and hence the state that the selection item is selected in response to the selecting state by the determination at the reproducing apparatus side.
However, the size, the shape and the language of the character to be represented as the selection item are all determined according to-the capacity of the reproducing apparatus. Thus, a tile manufacturer side for foraning the menu can form only menu screen having a limit, and it has a disadvantage that the load is increased in the reproducing apparatus.
D E S C R I P T I O N
RECORDING MEDIUM, APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR
RECORDING DATA ON THE RECORDING MEDIUM, APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR REPRODUCING DATA
FROM THE RECORDING MEDIUM
Technical Field This invention relates to a recording medium such as an optical disk for recording data of different object and type of compressed dynamic image, voice data, an apparatus for recording the data on the recording medium, a method of recording the data on the recording medium, an apparatus for reproducing the data from the recording medium and a method of reproducing the data from the recording medium.
Background Art Hereinafter, when a menu is provided in image data of video, an LD (laser disk), an selection item is superimposed on the displayed image by using a character generator of a reproducing apparatus irrespective of the image or image data including the selection item is prepared.
In the former case, when the number of character codes corresponding to an selection (or action item) item is contained in the video data, the reproducing apparatus can determined and display a position by using the character generator, and the display color of the character generator corresponding to the selection item corresponding to the selected~umber can be altered in the case of use's sel-ection, and hence the selected result can be recognized by the user.
However, according to the video data, the former case has disadvantages that the content and the language for displaying the selection item cannot are not known and the preparation of the character generator corresponding to the all in the reproducing apparatus is actually impossible.
In the latter case, since menu data is formed as the video-image, no burden is loaded on the reproducing apparatus, but to recognize the selection item corre-sponding to the user's selected-result, it is necessary to call and display new image data corresponding to the selectionnumber, and hence it has disadvantages that takes a time to display the new image for the recognition and user's erroneous operation will result.
Specifically, when the image data including the selection result is prepared, it is necessary to prepare the following three video data (a) video data of the state that any of the selection items "1. ABCDC" and "2. XYZ" is selected.
(b) video data of the state that selection item "2. XYZ" is selected, and (c) video data of the state selection item "2.
XYZ" is selected. The reproducing apparatus selects necessary image data and reproduces in response to the _.... _, 2~9~~~7 user's selected result, and hence a menu screen that the user's selected result is reflected can be displayed.
However, in this case, new-reproducing process is executed, it takes a time of several seconds until the menu screen reflected by the user's selected result, and it has disadvantages that it is anxious that the user is not selected for a queue time of the period and the possibility of executing the erroneous operation is increased.
When the selection item of the menu is displayed on the reproducing apparatus, as the image data for forming the menu, only the videodata of the state having no selection item may be prepared, and the selection item to be displayed on the video data for simply forming the menu is simultaneously recorded on the corresponding character code, and hence the state that the selection item is selected in response to the selecting state by the determination at the reproducing apparatus side.
However, the size, the shape and the language of the character to be represented as the selection item are all determined according to-the capacity of the reproducing apparatus. Thus, a tile manufacturer side for foraning the menu can form only menu screen having a limit, and it has a disadvantage that the load is increased in the reproducing apparatus.
Disclosure of the Invention The present invention provides a reproducing apparatus which can respond with small burden on the apparatus real time responsive to the user's selected result by utilizing video data having video data and sub-picture data.
The present invention also provides a reproducing apparatus in which various menus can be easily' formed by altering highlight information corresponding to the selection item or action item of sub-picture image, namely the color and the contrast of the character according to the video data as the background image of the menu and the sub-picture data of the selection item or action item of the menu.
Accordingly, the present invention provides an encoding method for encoding data to be recorded in an information recording medium, said recording medium having a data recording area for recording a video manager and at least one video title set, said video manager having data for controlling said video title set and said video title set containing video data, audio data, and sub-picture data, said encoding method comprising:
receiving said video data, said audio data, and said sub-picture data;
encoding said video data, said audio data, and said sub-picture data;
dividing contents of said encoded video, audio, and sub-picture data into corresponding one or more video packs, one or more audio packs, and one or more sub-picture packs;
arranging said video packs, audio packs, and sub-picture packs and appending a navigation pack to define a video object unit, wherein said navigation pack includes playback control data and is disposed at a beginning position within said video object unit;
arranging a plurality of said video object units to define each of a plurality of video object sets;
arranging a plurality of said video object sets to define said video title set;
wherein at least one of said video manager and said video title set contains menu information, said menu information including a menu background image, at least one 5 menu selection item image for indicating a selection of a menu item, and at least one menu status button for indicating a status of a selection;
wherein said playback control data includes highlight information for highlighting said menu status button;
wherein said highlight information contains highlight general information describing attributes of said highlight information including a highlight start time during a presentation period of said video object unit, number of numerical selection button information, forcedly selected button number information at said highlight start time, and forcedly activated button number information at an end time of a button selection, said highlight information also containing a menu status button color information table describing color attributes of said menu status button and a menu status button information table having menu status button information; and wherein said menu status button information includes, status button position information for indicating a position corresponding to said menu status button adjacent status button information for describing a direction of a next selection for said menu status button, and status button command for describing a status command to be executed when said menu status button is activated to reproduce a title which is designated according to said status button command.
The present invention also provides a reproducing apparatus for reproducing menu information from a recording medium, where the recording medium includes plural data units which are reproduced in sequence, the data units each being reproduced within a predetermined period of time, each data unit including a data pack array and a control pack, each of the data pack arrays including multiple data 5a packs, the data packs comprising reproduction data including at least one of video data and sub-picture data, at least one menu information formed from the reproduction data being used for confirming contents of the video data and for selecting from among the video data, the menu information including a background image recorded as the video data and either a selection item or an action item represented by the sub-picture data, the control pack being positioned before the data pack array within each data unit so as to control reproduction of the reproduction data, the control pack recording control data for controlling the selection item or the action item, the reproducing apparatus comprising:
a reader for reading reproduction data from a data pack array and control data from a control pack;
a first extractor for extracting video data from the reproduction data read by the reader;
a second extractor for extracting sub-picture data from the reproduction data read by the reader;
a third extractor for extracting a status button color information table from the control data, said status button color information table having entries corresponding to one or more status buttons in said sub-picture;
a fourth extractor for extracting a status button information table from the control data, said status button information table having entries corresponding to said status button in said sub-picture, wherein said status button information table includes status button information, and said status button information includes (a) status button position information for indicating a position of the corresponding status button in a menu, (b) adjacent status button information for describing a direction of a next selection for a status button which is in the user selection status, and (c) a status button command for describing a status command to be executed when the status button in the user selection is activated;
a fifth extractor for extracting from the control data the status button position information;
5b a sixth extractor for extracting from the control data the adjacent status button information;
a seventh extractor for extracting from the control data a status button command;
a decoding circuit for decoding the sub-picture data extracted by the second extractor based on the control data read by the reader from the control pack; and a synthesizing device for generating reproduced menu information by synthesizing the sub-picture data decoded by the decoding circuit with the video data extracted by the first extractor.
The present invention also provides a reproducing method for reproducing menu information from a recording medium, where the recording medium includes plural data units which are reproduced in sequence, the data units each being reproduced within a predetermined period of time, each data unit including a data pack array and a control pack, each of the data pack arrays including multiple data packs, the data packs comprising reproduction data including at least one of video data and sub-picture data, at least one menu information formed from the video data and the sub-picture data being used for confirming contents of the video data and for selecting from among the video data, the menu information including a background image recorded as the video data and either a selection item or an action item represented by the sub-picture data, the control pack being positioned before the data pack array within each data unit so as to control data for controlling the selection item or the action item, the reproducing method comprising:
reading reproduction data from a data pack array and control data from a control pack;
extracting video data from the reproduction data read from the data pack array;
extracting sub-picture data from the reproduction data read from the data pack array;
extracting a status button color information table from the control data, said status button color information 5c table having entries corresponding to one or more status buttons in said sub-picture;
extracting a status button information table from the control data, said status button information table having entries corresponding to said status buttons in said sub picture, wherein said status button information table includes status button information, and said status button information includes (a) status button position information for indicating a position of the corresponding status button in a menu, (b) adjacent status button information for describing a direction of a next selection for a status button which is in the user selection status, and (c) a status button command for describing a status command to be executed when the status button in the user selection status is activated;
extracting from the control data the status button position information;
extracting from the control data the adjacent status button information;
extracting from the control data a status button command;
updating the sub-picture data extracted based on the control data read from the control pack; and generating reproduced menu information by synthesizing the sub-picture data updated with the video data extracted.
In a still further aspect, the present invention provides a reproducing method for reproducing menu information from a recording medium, where the recording medium includes plural data units which are reproduced in sequence, the data units each being reproduced within a predetermined period of time, each data unit including a data pack array and a control pack, each of the data pack arrays including multiple data packs, the data packs comprising reproduction data including at least one of compressed video data and sub-picture data, at least one menu information formed from the video data and the sub-picture data being used for confirming contents of the video data and for selecting from among the video data, the 5d menu information including a background image recorded as the video data and either a selection item or an action item represented by the sub-picture data, the control pack being positioned before the data pack array within each data unit so as to control data for controlling the selection item or the action item, the reproducing method comprising:
reading reproduction data from a data pack array and control data from a control pack;
extracting video data from the reproduction data read from the data pack array;
extracting sub-picture data from the reproduction data read from the data pack array;
extracting a status button color information table from the control data, said status button color information table having entries corresponding to one or more status buttons in said sub-picture;
extracting a status button information table from the control data, said status button information table having entries corresponding to said status buttons in said sub picture, wherein said status button information table includes status button information, and said status button information includes (a) status button position information for indicating a position of the corresponding status button in a menu, (b) adjacent status button information for describing a direction of a next selection for a status button which is in the user selection status, and (c) a status button command for describing a status command to be executed when the status button in the user selection status is activated;
extracting from the control data the status button position information;
extracting from the control data the adjacent status button information;
extracting from the control data a status button command;
updating the sub-picture data extracted based on the control data read from the control pack; and 5e generating reproduced menu information by synthesizing the sub-picture data updated with the video data extracted.
The present invention also provides an information medium for recording data units each of which has to be played back within a given period of time, said data unit including a navigation data pack at a leading position of the data unit, and a video data pack as well as sub-picture pack arranged after said navigation data pack;
wherein each of said video data pack and sub-picture data pack includes a pack header and data packet, said video data packet includes data of a video stream according to MPEG specification, and said sub-picture data pack includes pixel data being subjected to a run-length compression;
wherein said navigation data pack includes a pack header, a first data packet, and a second data packet, said first data packet includes highlight information for highlighting a rectangular area within a sub-picture display area, and said second data packet includes data search information for searching data of said data unit;
wherein said data unit includes menu information including a background image and selection item, said background image being contained in video data of the video data packets, and said selection item being contained in sub-picture data of the sub-picture packets, and wherein said highlight information int he navigation data pack comprises:
a number of button groups each said button group representing a particular rectangular area in which a user selection item is displayed by the sub-picture data of said menu information;
a display type of the sub-picture data of each said button group;
button color information including a mixing rate of the video data with respect to the sub-picture data when the button of each said button group is selected, and including another mixing rate of the video data with respect to the sub-picture data within the button when the 5f button is selected; and button position information representing a position of each button of said button groups.
In a still further aspect, the present invention provides an apparatus for reproducing recorded contents of an information medium for recording data units each of which has to be played back within a given period of time, said data unit including a navigation data pack at a leading position of the data unit, and a video data pack as well as sub-picture pack arranged after said navigation data pack;
wherein each of said video data pack and sub-picture data pack includes a pack header and data packet, said video data packet includes data of a video stream according to MPEG specification, and said sub-picture data pack includes pixel data being subjected to a run-length compression;
wherein said navigation data pack includes a pack header, a first data packet, and a second data packet, said first data packet includes highlight information for highlighting a rectangular area within a sub-picture display area, and said second data packet includes data search information for searching data of said data unit;
wherein said data unit includes menu information including a background image and selection item, said background image being contained in video data of the video data packets, and said selection item being contained in sub-picture data of the sub-picture packets, and wherein said highlight information in the navigation data pack comprises:
a number of button groups, each said button group representing a particular rectangular area in which a user selection item is displayed by the sub-picture data of said menu information;
a display type of the sub-picture data of each said button group;
button color information including a mixing rate of the video data with respect to the sub-picture data when 5g the button of each said button group is selected, and including another mixing rate of the video data with respect to the sub-picture data within the button when the button is selected; and button position information representing a position of each button of said button groups;
said reproducing apparatus comprising:
means for reading packs from the information medium in unit of a series of the data packs;
discriminating means, which receives the pack read by said reading means, for discriminating data next to the pack header contained in the received pack to determine whether the received pack includes the navigation data pack, video data pack, or sub-picture data pack;
detecting means, when said discriminating means determines that the received pack includes the navigation data pack, for detecting highlight information of playback control information contained in the data packet of the navigation pack;
means for decoding data of the video data pack and sub-picture data pack respectively determined by said discriminating means; and means, responsive to the button position information and button color information of the highlight information detected by said detecting means, for changing a color or contrast of the button in the rectangular display area of pixel data contained in the data packet of the sub-picture data pack determined by said discriminating means.
Brief Description of the Drawings Fig. 1 is a schematic block diagram of an optical disk apparatus according to an embodiment of the present invention;
Fig. 2 is a detailed block diagram of the mechanical section of the disk drive unit of Fig. 1;
Fig. 3 is a schematic perspective view of the structure of an optical disk loaded in the disk drive unit of Fig. 1;
Fig. 4 is a schematic diagram of a key/display section 5h in Fig. 1;
Fig. 5 is a schematic diagram of a remote controller in Fig. 1;
Fig. 6 shows the structure of the logic format of the optical disk of Fig. 5;
Fig. 7 shows the structure of the video manager of Fig. 6;
Fig. 8 shows an example of the structure of the video object set (VOBS) shown in Fig. 7;
Fig. 9 is a diagram to help explain the structure of the video object unit of Fig. 8;
Fig. 10 shows the parameters and contents of the volume manger information management table (VMGI-MAT) in the video manager (AMGI) of FIG. 7;
FIG. 11 shows the structure of the title search pointer table (TT SRPT) in the video manager (VMGI) of FIG. 7;
FIG. 12 shows the parameters and contents of the title search pointer table information (TT SRPTI) in the title search pointer table (TT SRPT) of FIG. 11;
FIG. 13 shows the parameters and contents of the title search pointer (TT SRP) corresponding to the input number in the title search pointer table (TT-SRPT) of FIG. 11;
FIG. 14 depicts the structure of a video manager menu PGCI unit table (VMGM PGCI UT) shown in FIG. 7;
FIG. 15 illustrates the parameters and contents of video manager menu PGCI unit table information (VMGM PGCI UTI) in FIG. 14;
FIG. 16 illustrates the parameters and contents of a video manager menu PGCI unit search pointer (VMGM LU SRP) in FIG. 14;
FIG. 17 shows the structure of video manager menu language unit (VMGM LU) in FIG. 14;
FIG. 18 depicts the parameters and contents of video-manager menu language unit information (VMGM LUI);
FIG. 19 illustrates the parameters and contents of video manager menu PGC information search pointer (VMGM PGCI SRP);
2~92~77 FIG. 20 illustrates the structure of the video title.set of FIG. 6;
FIG. 21- shows the parameters and contents of the video title set information management table (VTSI MAT) of the video- title set information (VTSI) of FIG. 20;
FIG. 22 illustrates the contents of the attribute (VTS ATS_ATR) of an audio stream of a video title set (VTS) in FIG. 6;
FIG. 23 illustrates the contents of the sub-picture stream attribute (VTS SPST ATR) of the video title set (VTS) in FIG. 6;
FIG. 24 illustrates the structure of the video title set program chain information table (VTS PGCIT) of the video title set (VTS) of FIG. 20;
FIG. 25 shows the parameters and contents of the information (VTS PGCIT I) in the video title set program chain information table (VTS PGCIT) of FIG. 24;
FIG. 26 shows the parameters and contents of the search pointer (VTS PGCIT SRP) corresponding to the program chain in the video title set program chain information table (VTS PGCIT) of FIG. 24;
FIG. 27 illustrates the structure of the program chain information (VTS PGCI) in-the video set corresponding to the program chain in the video title set program chain information table (VTS PGCIT) of FIG. 24;
FIG. 28 shows the parameters and contents of the 21.92077 program chain general information (PGC GI)in the program chain information (VTS PGCI) of FIG. 27;
FIG. 29 shows the structure of a category (PGC CAT) of a program chain (PGC) of general information (PGC GI) of the program chain in FIG. 28;
FIG. 30 shows the structure of the contents (PGC CNT) of the general information (PGC GI) of the program chain in FIG. 28;
FIG. 31 illustrates the structure of a program chain map (PGC PGMAP) of the program chain information (VTS PGCI) of FIG.27;
FIG. 32 shows the parameters and contents of the entry cell numbers (ECELLN) corresponding to the programs written in the program chain map (PGC PGMAP) of FIG. 31;
FIG. 33 illustrate the structure of the cell playback information table (C PBIT)of the program chain information (VTS PGCI) of FIG. 27;
FIG. 34 shows the parameters and contents of the cell playback information (C PBI) of FIG. 33;
FIG. 35 illustrates the structure of the cell position information (C POSI) in the program chain information (VTS PGCI) of FIG. 28;
FIG. 36 shows the parameters and contents of the cell position information (C POSI)- of FIG. 35;
FIG. 37 shows the structure of a video title set menu PGCI unit table (VTSM PGCI-UT) in FIG. 20;
~1924~ 7 FIG. 38 depicts the structure of video title set menu PGCI unit table information (VTSM PGCI UTI) in FIG. 37;
FIG. 39 shows the structure of a video title set menu PGCI unit search pointer (VTSM LU SRP) in FIG. 37;
FIG. 40 illustrates the structure of a video title set menu language unit (VTSM LU)in FIG.-37;
FIG. 41 illustrates the structure of video title set menu language unit information (VTSM LUI) in FIG. 37;
FIG. 42 illustrates the parameters and contents of a video title set menu PGC info~tation search pointer (VTSM PGCI SRP);
FIG. 43 illustrates the structure of the navigation pack of FIG. 8;
FIG. 44 illustrates the structure of the video pack, audio pack, sub-picture pack, or VBI pack of FIG. 8;
FIG. 45 shows the parameters and contents of the playback control information (PCI) in the navigation pack of FIG. 43;
FIG. 46 shows the parameters and contents of the general information (PCI GI) inthe playback control information (PCI) of FIG. 45;
FIG. 47 shows the parameters and contents of the angle information (NSML AGLI) in the playback control information (PCI) of FIG. 45;
FIG. 48 is a diagram to help explain how to change 2I ~2fl17 the angle using the angle information (NSML AGLI) in the playback control information (PCI) of FIG. 47;
FIG. 49 is a view showing a valid period of high-light information of each sub-picture stream for a 5 reproducing period of one sub-picture image unit;
FIG. SO is a view for explaining a video image, a sub-picture and highlight information and mixing image mixed with them;
FIG. 51 illustrates parameter and content of the 10 highlight information (HLI) in reproduction control information (PCI) shown in FIG. 45;
FIG. 52 is a view for explaining content of high-light information (HLI) shown in FIG. 51;
FIG. 53 illustrates parameter and content of high-light generating information (HL GI) in highlight information (HLI) shown in FIG. 51;
FIG. 54 is a view showing a configuration of a button color information table (BTN COLIT) in highlight information (HLI) shown in FIG. 51;
FIG. 55 is a view showing the detail of descrip-tion content of selection color information (SL COLI) shown in FIG. 54;
FIG. 56 is a view showing the detail of description content of definite color information (AC COLI) shown in FIG. 54;
FIG. 57 is a view showing the detail of description content of button information table (BTNIT) .a __ in highlight information (HLI) shown in FIG. 51;
FIG. 58 is a view showing the detail of description content of button position information (BTN POSI) in button information (BGNI) shown in FIG. 57;
FIG. 59. shows the parameters and-contents of the disk search information (DSI) in the navigation pack of FIG. 45;
FIG. 60 shows the parameters and contents of the DSI general information (DSI GI)in the disk search informationof FIG. 59;
FIG. 61-shows the parameters and contents of the angle information (SML AGLI) in_the disk search information of FIG. 59;
FIG. 62 is a diagram to help explain how to change r the angle using the angle information (SML AGLI) in the disk search information (DSI) of FIG. 61;
FIG. 63 shows the parameters and contents of the search information (VOBU SRI) for the video object unit (VOBU) of FIG. 59;
FIG. 64 illustrates bit maps describing the forward addresses (FWDA) of the search information (VOBU SRI)-on the video object unit (VOBU) of FIG. 59;
FIG. 65 illustrates bit maps describing the backward addresses (BWDA) of the search information (VOBU SRI) on the video object unit (VOBU) of FIG. 59;
FIG. 66 shows the parameters and contents of the synchronizing playback information (SYNCI) on the video a~~~a~~
object unit (VOBU) of FIG. 59;
FIG. 67 illustrates the configuration of sub-picture unit;
FIG. 68 illustrates parameter and content of sub-picture unit header (SPUH) of sub-picture unit shown in FIG. 67;
FIG. 69 illustrates parameter and content of display control sequence table of sub-picture unit shown in FIG. 67;
FIG. 70 illustrate parameter and content of display control sequence (DCSQ) shown in FIG. 69;
FIG. 71 illustrates a packet transmit dispose section;
FIG. 72 illustrates the configuration of a highlight processor section;
FIGS. 73 and 74 present flowcharts for detecting the total number of titles on an optical disk, the number of chapters (programs) for each title, the number and languages of audio streams for each title, and the number and languages of sub-picture streams for each title;
FIG. 75 is a diagram exemplifying what is stored in a memory table;
FIG.-76 is a diagram showing an example of the reproduced image of a main menu;
FIGS. 77A through 77E show examples of the reproduced images of a title menu, a chapter menu, 2192~.7~
an audio menu, a sub-picture menu and an angle menu;
FIG. 78 shows a flowchart showing the processing sequence when the menu is reproduced;
FIGS. 79A, 79B, 79C and 79D are views for ~ explaining video, sub-picture, highlight information and combined image of them;
FIGS. 80A, 80B, 80C, 80D and 80E are views for explaining video, sub-picture, highlight information and combined image of them;
FIGS. 81A and 81B are views showing a pattern pixel and highlight pixel in sub-picture data;
FIGS. 82, 83 and 84 are flowcharts of the procedure for reproducing the video data in the normal mode from an optical disk having logic formats shown in FIGS. 6 to66;
FIG. 85 is a flowchart of the procedure for changing the angle during playback of the video data from an optical disk having logic formats shown in FIGS. 6 to 66;
FIG. 86 is a block diagram of an encoder system that encodes the video data and generates a video file;
FIG. 87 is a flowchart for an encoding process of FIG. 86;
FIG. 88 is a flowchart for combining the video data, audio data, and sup-picture data all encoded according to the flow of FIG. 87 to create a video data file;
FIG. 89 is a block diagram of a disk formatter system that recordsthe formatted video files on an optical disk;
FIG. 90 is a flowchart for creating logic data to be recordedpn a disk in the disk formatter of FIG. 89;
FIG. 91 is a flowchart for creating from the logic data the physical data to be recorded on a disk; and FIG. 92 is a schematic diagram of a system that transfers the video title set of FIG. 6 via a communication route.
Best Mode of Carrying Out the Invention Hereinafter, referring to the accompanying drawings, an optical disk reproducing apparatus according to an embodiment of the present invention will be explained.
FIG. l is a block diagram of an optical disk reproducing apparatus that reproduces the data from an optical disk associated with an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a block diagram of the disk drive section that drives the optical disk shown in FIG. 1. -FIG. 3 shows the structure of the optical disk shown in FIGS. 1 and 2.
As shown in FIG. 1, the optical disk reproducing apparatus comprises a key/display section 4, a monitor section 6, and a speaker section 8. When the user operates the key/display section 4, this causes the recorded data to be reproduced from an optical disk 10.
The recorded-data contains video data (main-picture data), sub-picture data, and audio data, which are converted into video signals and audio signals. The monitor section 6 displays images according to the 5 audio signals and the speaker section 8 generates sound according to the audio signals.
It is known that the optical disk 10 is available with various structures. For instance, one type of the optical disk 10 is a read-only disk on which data is 10 recorded with a high density~as shown in FIG. 3. The optical disk 10, as,shown in FIG. 3, is made up of a pair of composite layers 18 and an adhesive layer 20 sandwiched between the composite disk layers 18. Each of the composite disk layers 18 is composed of 15 a transparent substrate 14 and a recording layer or a light-reflecting layer 16. The disk layer 18 is arranged so that the light-reflecting layer 16 may be in contact with the surface o~ the adhesive layer 20.
A center hole 22 is made in the optical disk 10. On the periphery of the center hole 22 on both sides, clamping areas 24 are provided which are'used to clamp the optical disk 10 during its rotation. When the disk 10 is loaded in the optical disk apparatus, the spindle of a spindle motor 12 shown in FIG. 2 is inserted into the center hole 22. As long as the disk is being rotated, it continues clamped at the clamping areas 24.
As shown in FIG. 3, the optical disk 10 has an information zone 25 around the clamping zone 24 on each side, the information zones allowing the information to be recorded on the optical disk 10.
In each information area 25, its outer circumference area is determined to be a lead-out_,area 26 in which no information is normally recorded, its inner circumference area adjoining the clamping area 24 is determined to be a lead-in area27 in which no information is normally recorded, and the area between the lead-out area 26 and the lead-in area 27 is determined to be a data recording area 28.
At the recording layer 16 in the information area 25, a continuous spiral track is normally formed as an area in which data is to be recorded. The continuous track is divided into a plurality of physical sectors, which are assigned serial numbers.
On the basis of the sectors, data is recorded. The data recording area 28 in the information recording area 25 is an actual data recording area, in which management data, video data, sub-picture data, and audio data are recorded in the form of pits (that is, in the form of changes in the physical state) as explained later. With the read-only optical disk 10, a train of pits is previously formed in the transparent substrate 14 by a stamper, a reflecting layer is formed by evaporation on the surface of the transparent substrate 14 in which the pit train is formed, and the ~~~2077 reflecting layer serves as the recording layer 16. In the read-only optical disk 10, a groove is normally not provided as a track and the pit train in the surface of the transparent substrate 14 serves as a track.
a The optical disk apparatus 12, as shown in FIG. l, further comprises a disk drive section 30, a system CPU
section S0, a system ROM/RAM section 52, a system processor section 54, a data RAM section 60, a video decoder 58, an audio decoder section 60, a sub-picture decoder section 62, and a D/A and data reproducing section 64, and the menu generator 66. The system processor section 54 is provided with a system time clock (STC) 54A and a register 54B. The video decorder section 58, audio decorder section 60, and sub-picture decorder section 62 are also provided with system time clocks (STC) 58A, 60A, 62A, respectively.
As shown in FIG. 2, the disk drive section 30 contains a motor driving circuit 11, a spindle motor 12, an optical head 32 (i.e., an optical pickup), a feed motor 33, a focus circuit 36, a feed motor driving circuit 37, a tracking circuit 38, a head amplifier 40, and a servo processing circuit 44. The optical disk 10 is placed on the spindle motor 12 driven by the motor driving circuit 11 and is rotated by the spindle motor 12. The optical head 32 that projects a laser beam on the optical disk 10 is located under the optical disk 10. The optical head 32 is placed on a guide mechanism 2 ~ 92711 (not shown). The feed motor driving circuit 37 is provided to supply a driving signal to the feed motor 33. The motor 33 is driven by the driving signal and moves in and out the optical head 32 across the radius of the optical disk 10. The optical head 32 is provided with an object lens 34 positioned so as to face the optical disk 10. The object lens 34 is moved according to the driving signal_supplied from the focus circuit 36 so as to move along its optical axis.
To reproduce the data from the above optical disk 10, the optical head 32 projects a laser beam on the optical disk 10 via the object lens 34. The object lens 34 is moved little by little across the radius of the optical disk 10 according to the driving signal supplied from the tracking circuit 38. Furthermore, the object lens 34 is moved along its optical axis according to the driving signal supplied from the focusing circuit 36 so that its focal point may be positioned on the recording layer 16 of the optical disk 10. This causes the laser beam to form the smallest beam spot on the spiral track (i.e., the pit train), enabling the beam spot to trace the track. The laser beam is reflected from the recording layer 16 and returned to the optical head 32. The optical head 32 converts the beam reflected from the.optical disk 10 into an electric signal, which is supplied from the optical head 32 to the servo processing circuit 44 via 2192fl77 r the head amplifier 40. From the electric signal, the servo processing circuit 44 produces a focus signal, a tracking signal-, and a motor control signal and supplies these signals to the focus circuit 36, tracking circuit 38, and motor driving circuit 11, respectively.
Therefore, the object lens 34 is moved along its optical axis and across the radius of the optical disk 10, its focal point is positioned on the recording layer 16 of the optical disk 10, and the laser beam forms the smallest beam spot on the spiral track.
Furthermore, the spindle motor 12 is rotated by the motor driving circuit 11 at a specific rotating speed.
This allows the beam to track at, for example, a constant linear speed.
The system CPU section 50 of FIG. 1 supplies to the servo processing circuit 44 a control signal serving as an access signal. In response to the control signal, the servo processing circuit 44 supplies a head-moving signal to the feed motor driving circuit 37, which supplies a driving signal to the feed motor 33. Then, the feed motor 33 is driven, causing the optical head 32 to move across the radius of the optical disk 10. Then, the optical head 32 accesses a specific sector formed at the recording layer 16 of the optical disk 10. The data is reproduced from the specific sector by the optical head 32, which then ?~77 supplies it to the head amplifier 40. The head amplifier 4D amplifies the reproduced data, which is outputted at the disk drive section 30.
The reproduced data is transferred and stored in 5 a data RAM section 56 by the system processor section 54 which is controlled by the system CPU section 50 which is operated in accordance with the programs stored in the system ROM/RAM section 52. The stored reproduced data is processed at-the system processor 10 section 54, which sorts the data into video data, audio data, and sub-picture data, which are supplied to the video decoder section 58, audio decoder section 60, and sub-picture decoder section 62, respectively, and are decoded at the respective decoders. The D/A and data-15 reproducing section 64 converts the decoded video data, audio data, and sub-picture data into an analog video signal, an analog audio signal, and an analog sub-picture signal, subjects these signal to a mixing process, and supplies the resulting video signal and 20 sub-picture signal to the monitor 6 and the resulting audio signal to the speaker 8. Then, on the basis of the video signal and sup-picture signal, an image is displayed on the monitor section 6 and according to the audio signal, sound is simultaneously reproduced at the speaker section 8.
In the optical disk reproducing apparatus shown in FIG. 1, as a user manipulates the key/display section 4 on the front panel of the main body or manipulates the remote controller 5 as a remote terminal connected to the remote control receive section 4A via optical communications using infrared rays, recorded data, i.e., video data, sub-picture data and audio data, is reproduced from the optical disk 10 and is converted to an audio signal and video signal in the apparatus.
The video signal is reproduced as a video image on the external monitor section 6 and the audio signal is reproduced as a voice from the speaker section 8.
As shown in FIG. 4, the key/display section 4 comprises a power key 4a, microphone input terminals 4b, a playback key 4c, a pause key 4d, a stop key 4e, fast forward and rewind keys 4f, an open/close key 4g for instructing the loading or ejecting of the optical disk 10, indicators 4h, and a load/eject slot 4i for the optical disk 10.
As shown in FIG. 5, the remote controller 5 comprises a power key 5a, numeral keys 5b, a stop key 5c, a playback key 5d, a pause key 5e, a memory key 5f, an open/close key 5g for instructing the loading or ejecting of the optical disk 10, fast forward and rewind keys 5h and 5i, repeat keys 5j for instructing repeating and the repeat range, a menu key 5k for instructing the display of a menu screen, a title key 51 for instructing the display of a title menu screen, and up and down and right and left select keys 5m which 2192u17 are used to select an item on the displayed menu screen.
The detailed operation of the optical disk apparatus of FIG. 1 will be described later with reference to the logic format of the. optical disk explained below.
The data recording area 28 between the lead-in area 27 and the lead-out area 26 on the optical disk of FIG. 1 has a volume and file structure as shown in FIG. 6. The structure has been determined in conformity to specific logic format standards, such as Micro UDF or ISO 9660. The data recording area 28 is physically divided into a plurality of sectors as described earlier. These physical sectors are assigned 15. serial numbers. In the following explanation, a logical address means a logical sector number (LSN) as determined in Micro UDF or ISO 9660. Like a physical sector, a logical sector contains 2048 bytes.
The numbers (LSN) of logical sectors are assigned consecutively in ascending orderas the physical sector number increments.
As shown in FIG. 6, the volume and file structure is a hierarchic structure and contains a volume and file structure area 70, a video manager 71, at least one video title set #i 72, and another recorded area 73. These areas 70, 71, 72, 73 are aligned with the boundaries between logical sectors. As with ., ,...» . ,.. ....,, ,. : ~ :. ,. _--p., . . . ..:..._ . _ a conventional CD, a logical sector is defined as a set of 2048 bytes. Accordingly, one logical sector corresponds to one logical block.
The volume and file structure area 70 corresponds to a management area determined in Micro UDF or ISO
9660. According to the description in the management area, the video manager 71 is stored in the system ROM/RAM section 52. As explained with reference to FIG. 7, the information used to manage video title sets 72 is written in the video manager 71, which is composed of a plurality of files, starting with file #0. In each video title set 72, compressed video data, compressed-audio data, compressed sub-picture data, and the reproducing information about these data items are stored as explained later. Each video title set is composed of a plurality of files 74. The number of video title sets 72 is limited to a maximum of 99.
Furthermore, the number of files- 74 (from file #j to file #j+9) constituting each video title set 72 is determined to be a maximum of 10. These files 72 are also aligned with the boundaries between logical sectors.
In the other recorded area 73, the information capable of- utilizing the aforementioned video title sets 72 is recorded. The other recorded areas 73 are not necessarily provided.
As shown in FIG. 7, the video manager 71 contains at least three items each corresponding to individual files 74. Specifically, the video manager 71 is made up of video manager information (VMGI) 75, a video object set-for video manager menu (VMGM VOBS) 76, and backup of video manager information (VMGI BUP) 77.
Here, the video manager information (VMGI) 75 and the backup of video manager information (VMGI BUP) 77 are determined to be indispensable items, and the video object set for video manager menu (VMGM VOB$) 76 is determined to be an selection item. In the video object set 76 for VMGM, the video data, audio data, and sup-picture data about a menu of the volumes of the optical disk managed by the video manager 71 are stored.
By the video object set 76 for VMGM (VMGM VOBS), the volume name of the optical disk 10, the sound accompanying the volume name representation, and the description of the sub-picture are displayed and at the same time, selectable items are provided in the form of sub-pictures as in video reproduction explained later.
For example, the video object set 76 for VMGM
(VMGM VOBS) indicates that the optical disk 10 contains the video data representing the matches a boxer played until he won a world championship. Specifically, a fighting pose of boxer X, together with a volume name, such as the glorious history of boxer X, is reproduced in the form of video data and at the same ~ ~~~~I~
time, his theme song is reproduced in sound, and his chronological table is provided in a sup-picture.
Furthermore, the user is asked which language option to select, English or Japanese, in doing the narration of 5 the matches. At the same time, the user is asked whether a caption in another language should be provided in a sub-picture or which language option should be selected for a caption. Thus, for example, the VMGM video object set 76 (VMGM VOBS) provides the 10 user with preparations to watch a video of a match of boxer X in English speech with a sub-picture using Japanese captions.
Here, the structure of a video object set (VOBS) 82 will be described with reference to FIG. 8. FIG. 8 15 shows an example of a video object set (VOBS) 82.
The video object set (VOBS) 82 comes in three types for two menus and a title. Specifically, the video object set (VOBS) 82 contains the video title set for video manager menu (VMGM VOBSj76, a video-object set 20 (VTSM YOBS) 95 for a menu in the video title sets 72 and a video object set (VTSTT VOBS) 82 for the titles of at least one video title set 72 in a video title set (VTS) 72 as explained later. Each video object set 82 has the same structure except that their uses differ.
25 As shown in FIG. 8, a video object set (VOBS) 82 is defined as a set of one or more video objects (VOB) 83. The video objects 83 in a video object set (YOBS) 82 is used for the same application. A video object set (VOBS) 82 for menus is usually made up of one video object (VOB) 83 and stores the data used to display a plurality of menu screens. In contrast, a video object set (VTSTT VOBS) 82 for title sets is usually composed of a plurality of video objects (VOB) 83.
When the aforesaid video-of a boxing match is taken as example, a video object (VOB) 83 corresponds to the video data of each match played by boxer X.
Specifying a particular video object (VOB) 83 enables, for example, boxer X's eleventh match for a world championship to be reproduced on a video. The video object set (VTSN! VOBS) 95 fora,menuof the video title sets 72 contains the menu data for-the matches played by boxer X. According to the presentation of the menu, a particular match, for example, boxer X's eleventh match for a world championship, can be specified.
In the case of a usual single story movie, one video object (VOB) 83 corresponds to one video object set (VOBS) 82. One video stream is completed with one video object set (VOBS) 82. In the case of a collection of animated cartoons or an omnibus movie, a plurality of video streams each corresponding to individual stories are provided in a single video object set (VOBS) 82. Each video stream is stored in the corresponding video object 83. Accordingly, the ,.: ~_/ .- g. '. . . ' ./~w, a...:i.
audio stream and sub-picture stream related to the video stream are also completed with each video object (VOB) 83.
An identification number (IDN#j) is assigned to a video object (VOB) 83. By the identification number (ID#j), the video object (VOB) 83 can be identified.
A video-object (VOB) 83 further comprises one or more such cells 84. Although a usual video stream is made up of a plurality of cells 84, a menu video stream, or a video object (VOB) 83 may be composed of one cell 84.
A cell 84 is likewise assigned an identification number (C IDN#j). -By the identificationnumber(C IDN#j), the cell 84 is identified. At the time of the change of the angle explained later, the angle is changed by specifying the cell number.
Here, angle means to change an angle at which an object is viewed in the field of the films.
In an example of a boxing match, angle means that the same knockout scene can be seen from different angles:
e.g., a scene viewed from-the~champion, a scene viewed from the challenger, or a scene viewed from the judge.
An angle may be selected by the user as he or she wishes, or the same scene may be repeated while the angle is being changed automatically as the story advances. Furthermore, the angle may be changed after the beginning of the same scene has been reached: e.g., the scene is changed the moment that the boxer dealt __...~ ?~
2192tJ77 the opponent a counter and thena scene where the counter is dealt again is played. The angle may also be changed at the scene following the current scene:
e.g., the angle is changed the moment that the boxer has dealt the opponent a counter. To achieve any angle change, a navigation pack explained in detail later is provided in a video object unit (VOBU) 85.
As shown in FIG. 8, each cell 84 is composed of one or more video object units (VOBU) 85, normally a plurality of video object units (VOBU) 85. Here, a video object unit (VOBU) 85 is defined as a pack train having a navigation pack (NV pack) 86 at its head. Specifically, a video object unit (VOBU) 85 is defined as a set of all the packs recorded, starting at a navigation pack (NV pack) 86 to immediately in front of the next navigation pack. The reproducing time of the video object unit (VOBU) 85 corresponds to the reproducing time of the video data made up of one or more GOP (Group of Pictures) contained in the video object unit (VOBU) 85 as shown in FIG. 9. The maximum reproducing time is determined to be 0.4 or more second and less than one second. In MPEG, one GOP is defined as compressed image data which corresponds to about 15 frames to be played back for, usually, 0.5 seconds.
In the case where the video data includes a video object unit as illustrated in FIG. 6, GOPs each composed of a video pack (V pack) 88, a sub-picture pack (SP pack) 90 and an audio pack (A pack) 91, all complying to the MPEG standards, are arranged, producing a vide data stream. Regardless of the number of GOPs, a video object (VOBU) 83 is determined based on the time-required for producing a GOP. In the video object (VOBU) 83 has a navigation pack (NV) pack 86 arranged at its head. Any reproduced data, whether audio data, sub-picture data, or audioJsub-picture data, consists of one more video object units. Thus, even if a video object unit is composed of only audio packs only, these audio packs will be reproduced within the time for reproducing the video object unit.
The procedure of reproducing these packs will be explained later in detail, along with the procedure of reproducing the navigation pack (NV pack) 86.
The procedure for reproducing these packs, together with the navigation pack, will be explained in detail later.
The video manager 71 will be explained with reference to FIG. 7. The video-management information 75 placed at the head of the video manager 71 contains the information used to search for titles and the information used to manage the video title sets (VTS) 72 such as the information used for.-reproduction of a video manager menu. The volume management information 75 contains at least four tables 78, 79, 80, 81 in the order shown in FIG. 7. Each of these tables 78, 79, 80, 81 is aligned with the boundaries between logical sectors. A first table 78, a video manger information management table (VMGI MAT)78 is a mandatory table, in which the size of the video manager 71, the starting 5 address of each piece of the information in the video manger 71, and the attribute information about the video object set (VMGM VOBS) 76 for a video manager menu are written.
Written in a second table of the video manager 71, 10 a title search pointer table 79 (TT SRPT), is an entry program chain (EPGC) of the video titles (VTS) 72 contained in the optical disk 10 that are selectable -according to the entry of a title number from the key/display section 4 on the apparatus or the selection 15 of a title_number via the remote controller 5.
Here, a program chain 87 is a set of programs 89 that reproduce the story of a title as shown in FIG. 9.
Continuous reproduction of a program chain 87 completes the movie of a title. Therefore, the user can start to 20 see the movie from a particular scene of the movie by specifying the program 89.
In a third table of the video manager 71, a video title set attribution table (VTS ATRT) 80, the attribute information determined in the video title set 25 72 in the volume of the optical disk 10 is written.
Specifically, in this table 72, the following items are written as attribute information: the number of video title sets, video title set numbers, video attributes, such as a video data compression scheme, audio stream attributes, such as an audio coding mode, and sub-picture attributes, such as the type of sup-picture display.
Described in a video manager menu PGCI unit table (VMGM PGCI UT) 81, the fourth table of the video manager 71, is information about the video-object set (VMGM VOBS) 76 for the video manager menu.
The video manager menu PGCIunit table (VMGM PGCI UT) 81 is essential when the video manager menu (VMGM) is present in the video object set (VMGM VOBS) 76 for the video manager menu.
The contents of the video manager information management table (VMGI MAT)78 and the title search pointer table (TT $RPT) 79 will-be explained indetail with reference to FIGS. 10, 11, 12, and 13.
As shown in FIG. 10, written in the video manager information management table (VMGI MAT) 78 are a video manager identifier (VMG ID), the size of video manager information (VMGI SZ) in logical- blocks (one logical block contains 2048 bytes as mentioned above), the version number (VERN) of the optical disk 10 complying with the digital versatile disk video specification, and the category of video manager 71 (VMG CAT).
In the category of video manager 71 (VMG CAT), a flag indicating whether or not the DVD video s2 directory prohibits copying is written. Further written in the table (VMGI MAT) area volume set identifier (VI~MS ID), the number of video title sets (VTS Ns), the identifier for-a person supplying the data to be recorded on the disk (Provider Unique ID:
PVR ID),--a video-manager menu video-objectset-start -address (VNGM VOBS SA), the end-address- (VMGI MAT EA) of a volume manager information management table (VMGI-MAT) 78, and the start address (TT SRPT SA) of a title search pointer table (TT SRPT) 79. The start address (VMGM PGCI UT SA) of the video manager--menu PGCI unit table (VMGM PGCI UT) 81 is described in this table 78.
When there is no video-manager menu PGCI unit table (VMGM PGCI UT) 81, "OOOOOOOOh~~ is described at the start address. The end address of VMG MAT 78 (VMGI MAT EA) and the start address of TT SRPT
(TT SRPT SA) 79 are represented by the number of logical blocks, relative to the first logical block.
Furthermore, in the table 78, the start address (VTS ATRT SA) of the attribute table (VTS ATRT) 80 of video title sets (VTS) 72 is represented by the number of bytes, relative to the first byte in the VMGI
manager table (VMGI MAT)-71, and the video attribute (VMGM V AST) of-the video manager menu (VMGM) is written. Further written in the table 78 are the number of audio streams (VMGM AST Ns) in the video manager menu (VMGM), the attributes of audio streams (VMGM AST_ATR) in the video manager menu (VMGM), the number of sub-picture streams (VMGM SPST Ns) in the video manager menu (VMGM), and the attributes of sub-picture streams (VMGM SPST ATR)in the video manager menu (VMGM).
In the title search pointertable (TT SRPT) 79, as shown in FIG. 11, the title search pointer table information (TT-SRPTI) is first written and then as many title search pointers for input numbers 1 to n (n < 99) as are needed are written consecutively.
When only the reproducing data for one title, for example, only the video data for one title, is stored in the volume of the optical disk, only one title search pointer (TT SRP) 93 is written in the table (TT SRPT)-79.
As shown in FIG. 12, the title search pointer table information (TSPTI) 92 contains the number of title search pointers (TT Ns) and the end address (TT SRPT EA) of the title search pointer table (TT SRPT) 79. The address(TT SRPT EA) is represented by the number of bytes, relative to the first byte in the title search pointer table (TT SRPT) 79.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 13, each title search pointer (TT SRP) 93 contains the number of port-of-titles (PTT Ns) as the number of chapters (programs), the video title set number (VTSN), the title number (VTS TTN) of the video title set 72, and the start _ :...__.
address (VTS SA)of the video title set 72.
The contents of the title search pointer (TT SRP) 93 specifies a video title set 72 to be reproduced and a location in which the video title set 72 is to be stored. The start address (VTS SA) of the video title set 72 is represented by the number of logical blocks in connection with the title set 72 specified by the video title set number (VTSN).
The details of what is described in the video manager menu PGCI unit table (VMGM PGCI UT) 81 will now be discussed with reference to FIGS. 14 through 19.
The video manager menu PGCI unit table (VMGM PGCI UT) 81 shown in FIG. 14 is, essential when the video object set (VMGM VOBS) 76 for the video manager menu is provided, and information about a program chain for reproducing the video manager menu (VMGM) provided for each language. is described in this table 81. By referring to the video manager menu PGCI
unit table (VMGM PGCI UT) 81, the program chain of the specified language in the video. object set (VMGM VOBS) 76 can be acquired to be reproduced as a menu.
The video manager menu PGCI unit table (VMGM PGCI UT) 81 contains video manager menu PGCI unit table information (VMGM PGCI UTI) 8_lA, n video manager menu language unit search pointers (VMGM LU SRP) 81B, and n video manager menu language units (VMGM LU) 81C
in the named order as shown in FIG. 14.
The video manager menu PGCI unit table information (VMGM PGCI UTI) 81A contains information about the table 81. The video manager menu language unit search pointers (VMGM LU-SRP),81B are descrxbe~l in the order associated with the video manager menus #1 to #n and contain language codes and descriptions about the pointers to search for the video manager menu language units (VMGM LU) 81C, described in the order associated with the video manager menus #1 to #n. Described in each video manager menu language unit (VMGM LU) 81C are the category and start address of the program chain of the associated video manager menu.
More specifically, as shown in FIG. 15, the video manager menu PGCI unit table information , (vMGM PGCI UTI) 81A contains the number of the video manager menu language units (VMGM LU) 81C as a parameter (VMGM LU Ns). and the -end-.address of the video manager menu language units (VMGM LU) 81C as a parameter (VMGM PGCI UT EA).- As_-shown in FIG. 16, each video manager menu language unit search pointer (vMGM LU SRP) 81B contains a video manager menu language code as a parameter (VMGM LCD) and the start address of the associated video manager menu language unit (VMGM LU) 81C as a parameter (UMGM LU SA). Each video manager menu language unit (VMGM LU) 81C consists of video manager menu language unit information (VMGM LUI) 81D,-video manager menu PGC information >~ ...: .
search pointers (VMGM PGCI SRP) 8lE and video manager menu PGC information (VMGM PGCI) 81F in the named order as shown in FIG. 17. The video manager menu language unit information (VMGM LUI)-81D containsinformation about this table 81C. The video manager menu PGC
information search pointers (VMGM PGCI SRP) 81E are described in the order associated with the video manager menus #1 to #n and contain the categories of the program chains of the video manager menus and descriptions about the pointers to search for the video manager menu PGC information (VMGM PGCI) 81F, described in the order associated with the video manager menus #1 to #n.
The video manager menu PGC information (VMGM PGCI) 81P-~ ontains information about the program chain of the video manager menu or VMGM program chain information (VMGM PGCI).
More specifically, as shown in FIG. 18, the video manager menu language unit information (VMGM LUI) 81D
contains the number of pieces of the VMGM program chain information (VMGM PGCI) 81f as aparameter (VMGM PGCI Ns) and the end address of the video manager menu language unit information (VMGM LUI) 81Das aparameter (VMGM LUI EA). As shown in FIG.19, each video manager menu PGC information search pointer (VMGM PGCI SRP) 81E
contains the category of the program chain of the associated video manager menu as a parameter 2192fl77 (VMGM PGC CAT) and the start address of the associated VMGM program chain information (VMGM PGCI) 81F as a parameter (VMGM PGCI-SA).
Described in the category (VMGM PGC CAT) of the program chain of the video manager menu are a flag indicating whether or not there is an entry of this PGC
and a menu ID indicating if it is a menu. The menu ID
indicates a title menu when it is "0010"
The structure of the logic format of the video title set 72 shown in FIG. 6 will be described with reference to FIG. 20. In each video title set (VTS) 72, four items are~written in the order shown in FIG. 20. Each video title set (VTS) 72 is made up of one or more video titles having common attributes.
The video title set information (VTSI) 94 contains the management information on the video titles, including the information on entry search points, the information on playback of video object sets 72, the information on playback of title set menus (VTSM), and the attribute information on video object sets 72.
Each video title set 72 is provided with the backup of the video title set information (VTSI BUP) 97.
Between the video title set information (VTSI) and the backup of the information (VTSI BUP) 97, a video object set for video title set menus (VTSM VOBS) 95 and a video object set for video title set titles (VTSTT VOBS) 96 are arranged. Both of the video object t=
sets (VTSM VOBS and VTSTT VOBS),95, 96 have the structure shown in FIG. 8, as explained earlier.
The video title set information (VTSI) 94, the backup of the information (VTSI BUP) 97, and the video object set (VTSTT VOBS) 96 for video title set titles are items indispensable to the video title set 72.
The video object set (VTSM VOBS) 96 for video title set menus is an option provided as the need arises.
The video title set information (VTSI) 94 consists of five tables as shown in FIG. 20. The five tables are forced to align with the boundaries between logical sectors. The video title set information management table (VTSI MAT) 98, a first table, is a mandatory table, in which the size of the video title set (VTS) 72, the start addresses of each piece of information in the video title set (VTS) 72, and the attributes of the video object sets (VOBS) 96 in the video title set (VTS) 72 are written.
The video title set part of title search pointer table (VTS PTT SRPT) 99, a second table, is an selection table provided as the need arises. Written in the table 99 are the program chains (PGC) 87 and/or programs (PG) 89 contained in the video title set 72 that are selectable according to the entry of a title number from the key/display section 4 of the apparatus or the selection of a title number give via the remote controllers.
The video title-set program chain information table (VTS PGCIT) 100, a third table, is a mandatory table, in which the VTS program chain information (VTS PGCI) 104 is written. The video title set time search map table (VTS TMAPT) 101, a fourth table, is an selection table provided as the need arises, in which the information on the recording location, for a specific period of time of display, of the video data in each program chain (PGC) 87 in the title set 72 to which the map table (VTS TMAPT) 101 belongs is written..
A video title set menu PGCI unit table (VTSM PGCI UT) 111, the fifth table, is an essential item when a video object set (VGSM VOBS) 95 for the video title set menu is provided, and contains informationabout a program chain for reproducing a video title set menu (VTSM) provided for each language. By referring to this video title set menu PGCI unit table (VTSM PGCI UT) 111, the program chain of the specified language in the video object set (VTSM VOBS) 95 can be acquired to be reproduced as a menu.
Next, the video title information management table (VTSI MAT) 98 and video title set program chain information table (VTSI PGCIT)-100 shown in FIG. 20 will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 30.
FIG. 21 shows the contents of the video title information management table (VTSI MAT) 98, in which the video title set identifier (VTS ID), the size of the video title set 72 (VTS SZ), the version number of the DVD video specification (VERN), and the video title set category (VTS CAT) are written inthat order.
Furthermore, in the table (VTSI MAT)-98, the start address of the video object set (VTSM VOBS) for VTS
menus is expressed by a logical block relative to the first logical block in the video title set (VTS) 72.
The start address (VTSTT VOB SA)of the video object 83 for titles in the video title set (VTS) 72 is expressed by a logical block (RLBN) relative to the first logical block ire the video title set (VTS) 72.
Furthermore, in the table (VTSI MAT) 98, the end address (VTSI MAT EA) of the video title set information management table (VTI MAT) 98 is represented by the number of blocks, relative to the first byte in the table (VTSI MAT) 98 and the start address (VTS PTT SRPT SA) of the-video,title set part of title search pointer table (VTS PTT SRPT) 99 is represented by the number of blocks, relative to the first byte in the video title set information (VTSI) 94.
Still furthermore, in the table (VTSI MAT) 98, the start address (VTS PGCIT SA) of the video title set program chain information table (PGCIT) 100 is expressed by the number of blocks, relative to the first byte of the video title set information (VTSI) 94, and the start address (VTS TMAPT SA) of the time a__ search map (VTS TMAPT) 101 in the video title set (VTS) 72 is expressed by a logical sector relative to the first logical sector in the video title set (VTS) 72.
This table (VTSI MAT) 98 contains the start address (VTGSM PGCI UT SA),of,the video"title, set menu PGCI
unit table (VTSM PGCI UT) in terms of the number of relative blacks from the top byte of the video title set information (VTSI) 94. When the video manager menu PGCI unit table (VMGM PGCI UT) 81isnot present, "OOOOOOOOh" is described at the start address. Written in the table (VTSI MAT) 98 are the video object set (VTSM VOBS) 95-for-the video title-set menu (VTSM) in the video title set (VTS) 72, the video attributes (VTS V ATR)ofthevideo object_set (VTST VOBS) 96 for the titles -(VTSTT) in the video-title set 72, and the number of audio streams (VTS AST Ns) in the video object set (VTSTT VOBS~ 82-for the titles (VTSTT) for the video title sets 72. Here, the video attributes (VTS V ATR) include a video compression mode, a frame rate of the TV system, and an aspect ratio for displaying an image on a display unit.
Written in the table (VTSI MAT) 98 are the audio stream attributes (VTS AST ATR)-of-the-video object set (VTST VOBS) for the- titles (VTSTT) in the video title set (VTS). The attributes (VTS AST ATR) include an audio encoding mode indicating how audio is encoded, the number of bits used to quantize audio, the number . . _ . . . ._ , r, .,.
y ft:..
of audio channels and an audio language code.
Furthermore, written in the table (VTSI MAT) 98 are the number (VTS SPST Ns) of sub-picture streams in the video object set 82 for the titles (VTSTT) in the video title set (VTS) 72 and the attributes (VTS SPST ATR) of each sub-picture stream.
The attributes (VTR SPST ATR) for-each sub-picture stream include a sub-picture coding mode, a sub-picture display type and a sub-picture language code.
Furthermore, in the table (VTSI MAT) 98, written are the number (VTSM AST Ns) of-audio streams in the video title set menu (VTSM), the audio stream attributes (VTSM AST ATR),-the number=(VTSM SPST Ns) of sup-picture streams, and the sup-picture stream attributes (VISM SPST ATR).
Each audio stream attribute (VTS AST ATR) of the video title set (vTS) contains the audio coding mode, the multichannel extension, the audio type, the audio application ID, quantization, the sampling frequency, and the number of audio channels from bit number b63 to bit number b48 with bit b51 reserved, and audio stream language codes as specific codes from bit number b47 to bit number b40 and from bit number b39 to bit number b32, as shown in FIG. 22. Bit number b31 to bit number b24 of this audio stream attribute (VTS AST ATR) are reserved for specific codes. Bit number 23 to bit number b8 are reserved for the future use, and bit ._-.. - .~. LI_.., . . '-, .. ...:_,:: ,...:
number b7 to bit number b0 describe application information. When the video-object set (VTSM YOBS) 95 for the VTS menu is not present or that video object set contains no audio stream, "0" is described in each of the bits from bit number.b63_,to bit number b0.
Specific codes are described in bits b47 to b40 and b39 to b32 where a language code determined by ISO-639 is described as a language symbol when the audio stream type is a language or voice. When the audio stream type is not a language or voice, this area is reserved.
As shown in FIG. 23, each sub-picture stream attribute (VTS SPSTG ATR) of.the,video object set (VTST VOBS) 96 for VTSTT contains the sub-picture coding mode, sub-picture display type and sub-picture type from bit number b47 to bit number b40 with bit b44 reserved, and a language code of this sub-picture stream as specific codes from bit number b39 to bit number b32 and from bit number b31 to bit number b24.
Bits b23 to b16 are reserved for specific codes. Bits b23 to b8 are reserved for the future use, and bits b15 to b8 describe the specific-code extension. Further, bits b7 to b0 are reserved.
The VTS program chain information table (VTS PGCIT)-100 has-a-structure asshown in FIG. 24.
In the information table (VTS PGCIT)--100, information on the VTS program chain (VTS PGC) is written, starting . ~.:I.
~1g2~77 with information (VTS PGCIT I) 102on _the information table (VTS PGCIT)100relatedto the VT$program chain (VTS PGC). In the information table (VTS PGCIT) 100, the information (VTS PGCIT-I) 102 is followed by as many VTS PGCI search pointer (VTS PGCIT SRP) 103 used to search for VTS program chains (VTS PGC) as the number (#1 to #n) of VTS program chains in the information table (VTS PGCIT).-At the end of the table, there are provided as many pieces of information (VTS PGCI) 104-on the respective VTS program chains (VTS PGC) as the number (from #1 to #n) of the VTS
program chains (VTS PGC).
The information (VTS PGCIT I) 102 in the VTS
program chain information table (VTS PGCIT) 100 contains the number (VTS PGC Ns)- of VTS program chains (VTS PGC) as-shownin FIG. 25. The end address (VTS PGCIT EA) of the table information-(VTS'PGCIT I) 102 is expressed by the number of bytes, relative to the first byte in the information table (VTS PGCIT) 100.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 26, the VTS PGCIT
search pointer (VTS PGCIT SRP) 103 contains the attributes (VTS PGC'CAT) of the program chains (VTS PGC) in--the video title set (VTS~72 and the start address (VTS PGCI SA) of the VTS,-PGC information (VTS PGCI)104 expressed by the number of bytes, relative to the first byte in the VTS PGC information table (VTS PGCIT) 100. Here, the VTS PGC attribute ~~92077 (VTS PGC CAT) is, forexample, an attribute indicating whether an entry program chain (Entry PGC) is the first one to loe reproduced. Usually, an entry program chain (PGC) is written before program chains (PGC) that are 5 not entry program chains (PGC). Generally, program chains (PGC) are reproduced in--the description order of VTS PGCIs as shown in FIG. 24.
The PGC information (VTS PGCI) 104 in the video title set 72 contains four items as shown in FIG. 27.
10 In they information (VTS PGCI) 104, the program chain general information (PGC GI) 105 on a mandatory item is first arranged, followed by at least three items that are made mandatory only when there is an video object 83. Specifically, contained as the 15 three items in the PGC information (VTS-PGCI) 104 are a program chain program map (PGC PGMAP) 106, a cell playback information table (C PBIT) 107, and a cell position information table (C POSIT) 108.
As shown in FIG. 28, the program chain general 20 information (PGC GI) 105 contains thecategory (PGCI CAT)of the program chain 87, the contents (PGC CNT) ofthe program chain (PGC) 87, and the playback time of the program chain (PGC). 87 Written in the category of PGC (PGCI CAT) are whether the PGC
25 can be copied or not and whether the programs 89 in the PGC are played back continuously or at random. The contents of PGC (PGC CNT) contains the description of _~r..
~l9ZOll the program chain structure, that is, the number of programs 89, the number of cells 84, and the number of angles in the program chain 87. The playback time of PGC (PGC PB TIME) contains the total playback time of the programs 89 in the PGC. The playback time is the time required to continuously play back the programs 89 in the PGC, regardless of the playback procedure.
When an angle mode is available, the playback time of angle cell number 1 is the playback time of the angle.
Furthermore, the program chain general information (PGC-GI) 105_ contains PGC sub-picture stream control (PGC SPST CTL), PGC audio-stream control (PGC AST CTL), and PGC sub-picture pallet (PGC SP PLT). The PGC sub-picture stream control (PGC SPST CTL) contains the number of sub-pictures usable in the PGC 89 and the PGC
audio stream control (PGC AST CTL) likewise-contains the number of audio streams usable in the PGC 89. The PGC sub-picture palette (PGC SP PLT) contains a set of a specific number of color pallets used in all of the sub-picture streams in the PGC 89.
Furthermore, the PGC general information (PGC GI) 105 contains the start address (C PBIT SA) of the cell playback information table (C PBIT) and the start address (C POSIT SA) of the cell-position information table (C POSIT) 108. Both of the start addresses (C PBIT SA and--C POSIT SA) are represented by the number of logical blocks, relative to the first byte _ _. ~', in the VTS PGC information (VTS PGCI) 105.
For a program chain (PGC) for a menu, as shown in FIG. 29, bit b31 of the category (PGC CAT) of the program chain describes a PGC entry or a non PGC entry as the entrytyper bits b30.to.b28 of are reserved for the future use, bits b27 to b24 describe a menu ID
indicative of the type of the menu, bits b23 and b22 describe the PGC block mode, bits b21 and b20 describe the PGC block type, bits b19 to b16 describe the program playback control, bits b15 and bl4 describe the copy flag, bits b13 and b12 describe the playback management, bits bll to b8 describe the application type, and bits b7 to b0 are reserved for the future usage.
With regard to the menu ID, "0010" indicates a title menu for use in the video manager information menu (VMGM), "0011" indicates a root menu for use in the video title set menu (VTSM), "0100" indicates a sub-picture menu for use in the video title set menu (VTSM), "0101" indicates an audio menu for use in the video title set menu (VTSM), "0110" indicates an angle menu for use in the video title set menu (VTSM), and "0111" indicates a program menu for use in the video title set menu (VTSM).
When the category (PGC CAT)- of the program chain (PGC) is a program chain (PGC) for a title, bits b30 to b24 describe the number of titles (VTS TTN), any of ~'~ , . ...-,- :.. . _. ...~,., , ~ ,~ ,.; .,- ..
numbers 1 to 99, in this program chain (PGC), bits b15 to b8 describe the number of cells, any of 1 to 255, in this program chain (PGC), bits b7 to b4 are reserved for the future use, and bits b3 to b0 describe the number of angles, any one of 1 to 9, in the program chain (PGC).
The program chain program map (PGC PGMAP) 108 is a map showing the arrangement of the programs 89 in the PGC 87 of FIG. 31. In the map (PGC PGMAP) 106, the entry cell numbers (ECELLN), the start cell numbers of the individual programs 89, are.written in ascending order as shown in FIGS. 31 and 32. In addition, program numbers are allocated, starting at 1, in the order in which the entry cell numbers are written.
Consequently, the first entry number in the map (PGC PGMAP)106 must be #1.
The cell playback information table (C PBIT) defines the order in which the cells 84 in the PGC 87 are played back. In the cell playback information table (C PBIT) 107, pieces of the cell playback information (C PBI) are writtenconsecutively as shown in FIG. 33. Basically, cells 84 are played back in the order of cell number. The cell playback information (C PBIT) 108-contains a cell-category (C CAT) as shown in FIG. 34. Written in the cell category (C CAT) are a cell block mode indicating whether a cell is in the block and if it is in the block, whether the cell is -the first one, a cell-block type indicating whether a cell 84 is not part of the block or is in an angle block, and an STC discontinuity flag indicating whether the system time clock (STC) must be set again.
An "angleblock" of cells is defined as a set of cells 84 having a specific angle. The angle can be changed by replacing one angle block with another.
In the case of a baseball videoprogram, for example, an angle block representing a scene taken from the outfield may be replaced by an angle block representing a scene taken from the infield.
Further written in the cell category (C CAT) are a cell playback mode indicating whether the video object units (VOBU) 85 in the cell 84 are played back continuously or a picture is made still at one video object unit (VOBU) 85 to another in the cell 84, and cell navigation control indicating whether the picture is made still after the playback of the cell or indicating the rest time.
As shown in FIG. 34, the cell playback information table (C PBIT) 107 contains the cell playback time (C PBTNMj representing the total-playback-time of the PGC 87. When the PGC 87 has an angle cell block, the playback time of the angle cell number 1 represents the playback time of the angle block. Further written in the cell playback information table (C PBIT) 107 are the start address (C FVOBU SA) of the first video .. . .rts. , object unit (VOBS) 85 in the cell 84 expressed by the number of logical sectors, relative to the first logical sector in the video object unit (VOBS) 85 in which the cell 84 is written and the start address 5 (C LVOBU SA) of the end video object unit (YOBS) 85 in the cell 84 expressed by the number of logical sectors, relative to the first logical sector in the video object unit (VOBS) 85 in which the cell 84 is written.
The cell position information table (C POSI) 108 10 specifies the identification number (VOB-ID) of the video object (VOB) 85 in the cell used in the PGC 87 and the identification number (Cell ID)- of the cell 84.
In the cell position information table (C POSI) 108, pieces of the cell position information (C POSI) 15 corresponding to the cell numbers written in the cell playback information table 107 as shown in FIG. 35 are written in the same order as in the cell playback information table (C PBIT) 107.- The cell position information (C POSI) contains the identification number 20 (C VOB IDN) of the video-object-unit-(VOBS) 85 in the cell 84 and the cell identification number (C IDN) as shown in FIG. 36.
The video title set menu PGCI unit table (VTSM PGCI UT) 111 describing language-by-language 25 information of the video titleset menu (VTSM) shown in FIG. 20-consists of video title set menu PGCI unit table-information (VTSM PGCI UTI). 111A, n video title .~:. . ,' _ .; : ..,,.
set menu language unit search pointers (VTSM LU SRP) 111B and n video title set menu language units (VTSM LU) 111C i.n the named order, as shown in FIG. 37.
The video title set menu PGCI unit table information_(VTSM PGCI UTI) 111A containsinformation of this table 111. The video title set menu language unit search pointers (VTSM LU SRP) 111B are described in the order associated with the video title set menus #1 to #n, and contain descriptions about the pointers to search for the video title set menu language units (VTSM LU) 111C described in the order associated with the video title set menus #1 to #n. Described in each video.title set menu language unit (VTSM LU) 111C are the category and start address of the program chain of the associatedvideo title set menu.
More specifically, as shown in FIG. 38, the video title set menu PGCI unit table information (VTSM PGCI UTI) 111A contains the number of the video title set menu language units (VTSM LU) 111C as a parameter (VTSM LU Ns) and the end addressof the video title set menu language units (VTSM LU) 111C as a parameter (VTSM PGCI UT EA). AS shown in FIG. 39, each video title set menu language unit search pointer (VTSM LU SRP) 111B describes a video title set menu language code as a parameter (VTSM LCD) and the start address of the associated video title set menu language unit (VTSM LU) 111C as a parameter (VTSM LU $A).
r n._;i: . .., , ...rt-. ..,._ .. ..a.
As shown in FIG. 40, each video-title set menu language unit (VTSM LU) 111C consists of-video title set menu language unit information (VTSM LUI) 111D, video title set menu PGC information search pointers (VTSM PGCI SRP) 111E and video title set menu PGC
information (VTSM PGCI) 111F in the named order.
The video title set menu language unit information (VTSM LUI) 111D contains information of this table 111C. The video title set menu PGC information search pointers (VTSM PGCI SRP) 111E are described in the order associated with the video title set menus #1 to #n, and contain the categories of program chains of the video title set menus and descriptions about the pointers to search for the video title set menu PGC
information (VTSM PGCI) 111F described in the order associated with the video title set menus #1 to #n.
Each video title set menu PGC information (VTSM PGCI)111F-contains- information about the program chain of the associated video title set menu, i.e., VTSM program chain information (VTSM PGCI).
More specifically, as shown in FIG. 41, the video title-set menu language unit informatign (VTSM LUI) 111D contains the number of pieces of video title set menu PGC information (VTSM PGCI)- 111F as a parameter (VTSM PGCI Ns), and the end address of the video title set menu language unit information (VTSM LUI) 111D as a parameter (VTSM LUI EA). As shown_in FIG. 42, each ,__<_._.. .: .:.. _ ~.<
~~92~1~
video title set menu PGC information search pointer (VTSM PGCI SRP)--111E, contains the--category of the program chain of the associated video title set menu as a parameter (VTSM PGC CAT)andthe start address of the associated video title set menu PGC information (VTSM PGCI)--111F as-a parameter (VTSM PGCI $A).
Described in the category (VMGM PGC CAT) of the program chain of the video title set menu are a flag indicating whether or not there is an entry of this PGC
and a menu-ID indicating if it is-a.menu. The menu ID
indicates a sub-picture menu when it is "0100,"
indicates an angle menu when it is "0110," and indicates a program menu when it is "0111."
As explained with reference to FIG. 8, a cell 84 is a set of video object units (VOBU) 85. A video object unit 85 is defined as a pack train starting with a navigation (NAV) pack 86. Therefore, the start address (C FVOBU SA) of the first video object unit (VOBU) 85 in a cell 84 is the start address of the NAV
pack 86. As shown in FIG. 43, the NAV pack 86 consists of a pack header 110, a system header 111, and two packets 116, 117 of navigation data; namely, a playback control information (PCI) packet 116 and a data search information (DSI) packet 117. As many bytes as shown in FIG. 43 are allocated to the respective sections so that one pack may contain 2048 bytes corresponding to one logical sector. The NV pack is provided .. .; -.c s4 immediately before the video pack 88 which contains the first data item in the group of pictures (GOP). Even if the object unit 85 contains no video pack 88, the NV
pack 86 is positioned at the head of the object unit 85, provided that the object unit 85 contains an audio pack 91 and/or a sub-picture pack 90. Thus, even if object unit 85 contains no video pack, its playback time is determined on the basis of the time required for playing back a video pack 88, exactly in the same way as in the case where the unit 85 contains a video pack 88.
Here, GOP is defined as a data train constituting a screen determined in the MPEG standards. In other words, GOP is equivalent to compressed data which may be expanded into image data representing a plurality of frames of a moving picture. The pack header 110 contains a pack starting code, a system clock reference (SCR), and a multiplex rate. The system header 111 contains a bit rate and a stream ID. The packet header 112, 114 of-each of the PCI packet 116 and DCI packet 117 contains a packet starting code, a packet length, and a stream ID as determined in the MPEG2.
As shown in FIG. 44, another video, audio or sub-picture pack consists of a pack header 120, packet header 121, and a packet 122 containing the corresponding data as in the system layer 24 MPEG 2.
Its pack length is determined to be 2048 bytes. Each ~~ 82077 of these packs is aligned with the boundaries between logical blocks.
The PCI data (PCI) 113 in the PCI packet 116 is navigation data used to make a presentation, or to 5 change the contents of the display, in synchronization with the playback of the video data in the VOB unit (VOBU) 85. Specifically, the PCI data (PCI) 113 contains PCI general information (PCI GI) as information on the entire PCI data 113 and angle 10 information (NSML AGLI) as each-piece.of jump destination angle information during angle change and high light information (HLI) as shown in FIG. 45. The PCI general information (PCI GI) contains the address (NV PCK LBN)= of the NV pack (NV PCK) 86 in which the 15 PCI data isrecorded as shown in FIG. 28, the address being expressed in the number of blocks, relative to the VOBU logical sector in which the PCI data is recorded. The PCI general information (PCI GI) contains the category of VOBU (VOBU CAT), the start PTS
20 of VOBU 85 (VOBU SPTS)-, and the--end-PTS of VOBU 85 (VOBU EPTS). Here, the start PTS of VOBU 85 (VOBU SPTS) indicates the playback start time (start presentation time stamp (SPTS)) of the video data in the VOBU 85 containing the PCI data. The playback 25 start time is the playback start time of the first picture in the first GOP in the VOBU 85. Normally, the first picture corresponds to I picture (intra-picture) _.: ___~.
data in the MPEG standards. The end PTS (VOBU EPTS) in the VOBU 85-indicates the playback end time (end presentation time stamp (EPTS)) of the video data in the VOBU 85 containing the PCI data. The playback end time is the playback start time of the last picture in the last GOP in the VOBU 85.
The angle information (NSML AGLI) contains as many start addresses (NSML AGL C DSTA) of the angle cells at jump destinations as the number of angles as shown in FIG. 47. Each of the start addresses is represented by a logical sector-relative to the logical sector of the NV pack 86 in which the PCI data is recorded. When the angle is changed on the basis of the angle information (NSML AGLI), the angle information (NSML AGLI) contains either the start address of the VOBU in another angle block whose playback time is equal to that of the VOBU 85 in which the PCI data is recorded as shown in FIG. 48, or the start address (NSML AGL C DSTA)-of the--VOBU 85 in another angle block whose playback time is closest to the preceding one.
According to the description of the start address (NSML AGL C DSTA) of such an angle-cell, the angle is changed in a concrete example as follows. Assuming that a series of consecutive scenes where in a baseball game, the pitcher throws a ball, the batter hits the ball, and the ball lands in the stands, the change of .~.-r- .. .. ~.
_ ~ , . ,- ~ ........ , : :r.
the angle will be explained. An angle cell (ANG C#j) can be changed on a video object unit (VOBU) 85 basis as shown in FIG. 48. In FIG. 48, the video object units (VOBU) 85 are assigned numbers in the order of playback. The video object unit (VOBU#n) 85 corresponding to playback number n of an angle cell (ANG C#j) stores-the video data-for a different scene which is contemporary with or immediately preceding that for which the video data is stored in the video object unit (VOBU#n) 85 with playback number n corresponding to another angle cell (ANG C#1) or angle call (ANG C#9). It is assumed that in an angle cell (ANG C#j), VOBUs are arranged consecutively as video data used to show on the screen the whole view including the pitcher and batter and a series of actions. It is also assumed that in angle cell (ANG C#1), VOBUs are arranged consecutively as video data used to show only the batter on the screen to view the batting form of the batter, and that in angle cell (ANG C#9), VOBUs are arranged consecutively as video data used to show only the expression of the pitcher on the screen. When the user is viewing angle cell #j (ANG C#i) and changes to angle-cell #1-the moment the batter hit the ball, that is, changes to the angle at which only the batter is shown, at the moment the batter made a hit, this switches to a screen where the batter starts swinging a bat before making the hit, not .. ;--_ . . . . ... . _ .""s ,.. .: ....
~~ ~~(~~7 to a screen showing only the batter after he made a hit. Furthermore, when the user is viewing angle cell #j (ANG C#i)-and changes to angle. cell #9 the moment the batter hit the ball, that is, changes to the angle at which only the pitcher is shown, at the moment the batter made a hit, this causes the pitcher's expression at the moment the batter made a hit to appear on the screen, enabling the user to read a change in the pitcher's mental state in his expression.
Highlight information (HLI) is information for highlighting one rectangular area in a sub-picture display area. The mixing ratio-(contrast) of the color and the video of the sub-picture of the specific rectangular area in the sub-picture display area is described. As shown in FIG. 49, the highlight information is commonly valid for all sub-picture streams to be reproduced within the valid period. For instance, when the video and the sub-picture and the highlight information are mixed, a mixing picture as shown in FIG. 50 is displayed on the monitor section 6.
As shown in FIG. 51, the highlight information describes highlight general-information (HL GI) 113A, button color information table (BTN COLIT) 113B and button information table (BTNIT) 113C. As shown in FIG. 52, the button color information table (BTN COLIT) 113B describes three button color information (BTN COLI)113D, 113E, 113F, and the button information __._, :~~~. . . r. _. :a....... . ~,~..
~i 9~~77 table (BTNIT) 113C describes 36 button information IBTNI) 113I at the maximum.
For instance, as shown in FIG. 52, 36 button information (BTNI) 113I are described by three group modes composed by specifying button groups of 1 group mode made up of 36 button information, two group modes formed of -18 button information, and three group mode composed of 12 button information.
The highlight general-information (HL GI) 113A is information of the entire highlight information. As shown in FIG. 53, the highlight general-information (HL GI) 113A describes status of highlight information (HLI SS), start PTM-of HLI (HLI S PTM), end PTM of HLI
(HLI E PTM), end PTM of button select (BTM SL E PTM), mode. of button (BTM MD), button start number (BTN SN), number of valid buttons (BTN Ns)-, number of numerical select buttons (NSBTN Ns), forcedly selected button number (FSLBTN N), and forced activated button number (FACBTN N).
The status of highlight information (HLI SS) describes the status of the highlight information in corresponding PCI. For-instance, in the case of "00", the status of highlight information (HLI SS) describes no valid highlight information. In the case of "O1", the status of highlight information (HLI SS) describes different highlight from the highlight information of the VOBU. In the case of "10", the status of highlight v , v x~. . - v. y~.. . u. . . .. i'._ - ~ v .' ~~077 information (HLI SS) describes the same highlight information as the highlight information of the VOBU.
In the case of "11", the status of highlight informa-tion (HLI SS) describes the highlight information 5 containing difference from the k~ighlight information of the VOBU only from button command.
The start PTM of highlight information (HLI S PTM) describes the start PTM of-the highlight in which the corresponding highlight information becomes valid 10 (start presentation time (SPTM)). The start PTM of the highlight becomes the display start time or more of the sub-picture stream in which the highlight information becomes an object. When HLI SS is "O1", the high-light start time of highlight information which is 15 renewed during the presentation period of VOBU in which the PCI is included is described. When HLI SS is "10" or "11", the highlight start time of highlight information used continuously during the presentation period of .VOBU in which the PCI is included is 20 described.
The end PTM of highlight information (HLI E PTM) describes the end PTM of the highlight information in which the highlight information becomes invalid. The end PTM of highlight information becomes the display 25 end time or less of the sub-picture stream in which the highlight information becomes an object. When HLI SS
is "O1", the highlight termination time of highlight information which is renewed during the presentation period ofVOBU in which the PCI is included is described. When HLI SS is "10" or "11", the highlight termination time of highlight information used continu-ously during the presentation period of VOBU in which the PCI is included is described. When HLI SS is used during the still state, the end PTM of highlight information (HLI E PTM) shall-describe-(FFFFFFFFh).
End PTM of button select (BTN SL E PTM) describes the end PTM of the button select. The end PTM of the button select becomes the display end time or less of the sub-picture stream in which the highlight informa-tion becomes an object. When HLI SS is "O1", the button select termination time of highlight information which is renewed during the presentation period of VOBU
in which the PCI is included is described. When HLI SS
is "10" or "11", the button select termination time of highlight information used continuously during the presentation period of VOBU in which the PCI is included is described. When highlight information is used during the still state, the button select termination time (BTN SL E PTM) shalldescribe (FFFFFFFFh).
The mode of button (BTN MD) describes grouping of the buttons and the display type of the sub-picture corresponding to each group. For instance, the mode of button (BTN MD) describes number of button groups (BTNGR Ns), display type of sub-picture corresponding sz to the button group 1 (BTNGR1 DSPTY)-,-display type of sub-picture corresponding to the button group 2 (BTNGR2 DSPTY) and display type of sub-picture corre-sponding to the button group 3 (BTNGR3 DSPTY). The number of the button groups (BTNGR Ns)-is one group in the case of "O1", 2 groups in the case of "10", and three groups in the case of "11". The display type is wide (9/16) in the case of "O1", letter box in the case of "-10~,and pan-scan in the case of "11".
The button start number (BTN SN) describes initial button offset number in button groups. The offset number can be described in a range of-1 to 255. The button start number (BTN SN) is commonly applied to each button group.
The number of valid buttons (BTN Ns) describes the number of valid buttons in the button groups. The number of the buttons can described a range of 1 to 36 in the case of 1 of the button group, 1 to 18 in the case of 2 of the button group, and 1 to 12 in the case of 3 of the button group. The number of valid buttons (BTN Ns) is-commonly applied to-each--button group.
The number numerical select of buttons (NSBTN Ns) which can be selected by the number describes the number of the buttons which can be selected by the button number in the button groups. The number of the buttons can described 1 to 36 in the case of 1 of the button group, 1 to 18 in the case of 2 of the button ~~.~~ _. t _,. z . . _:~
group, and 1 to 12 in the case of 3 of the button group. The button start number {NSBTN Ns) is commonly applied to each button group.
The forcedly selected button number (FSLBTN N) describes the button number which is forcedly selected at the highlight start time (HLI S PTM). Even when the presentation starts during the highlight information validity period, the button number set at highlight information is to be selected. The button number can described 1 to 36 and 63 in the case of 1 of the button group, 1 to 18 and 63 in the case of 2 of the button group and 1 to 12 and 63 in the case of 3 of the button group. The forcedly selected button number (FSLBTN N) is commonly applied to each button group.
The forcedly activated button number (FACBTN N) describes the button number which is forcedly activated at the end PTM of button select (BTN SL E PTM). The button number can described 1 to 36 and 63 in the case of 1 of the button group, 1 to -18 and 63 in the case of 2 of .the button group and 1 to 12 and 63 in the case of 3 o~-the button group. The forcedly activated button number {FACBTN N) is commonly applied to each button group.
Button color information table (BTN COLIT) 113B
describes, as shown in FIG. 54, three button color information (BTN COLI)113D, 113E and 113F. The button color number {BTN COLN) is allocated from "1" in the describing sequence of the button color information (BTN COLD--113D. As shown in FIG 54, selection color information (SL COLI) 1136 and action color information (AC COLI) 113H are described in the button color information (BTN COL D -113D. .The color-and-contrast which are altered when the button is selected is described in the selection color information (SL COLI) 1136. The color and contrast which are altered when the button is activated are described in the action lp color-information (AC COLI) li3H.-- The button selection status is the status in which the selection color is displayed. At the time of this status, the user can alter the highlighted button to other button. The button action status is the status in which the action - coloris displayed and the button command is executed.
At the time of this status, the user is inhibited to alter the highlighted button to the other button.
As shown in FIG. 55, emphasis pixel-2 selection color code, emphasis pixel-2 selection color code, pattern pixel selection color code, background pixel selection color code, emphasis pixel-2 selection contrast, emphasis pixel-1-selectioncontrast, pattern pixel selection contrast, background pixel selection contrast are described in the selection color informa-tion (SL COLD 1136.
As shown in FIG. 56, emphasis pixel-2 action color code, emphasis pixel-2 action color coda, pattern pixel .::.:. :_. . ._ :_::~. . . .. ~. _.
i action color code, background pixel action color code, emphasis pixel-2 action contract, emphasis pixel-1 action contrast, pattern pixel action contrast, background pixel action contrast are described in the 5 action color information (SL COLI) 1136.
As shown in FIG. 57, 36 button information (BTNI) I13I are described in button information table (BTNIT) 113C.--The button information (BTNI) 113I can be utilized as three modes of three mode groups grouped by 10 1 group mode in which all 36 button information (BTNI)113I become valid in the describing sequence of the button information table (BTNIT), 2 group mode in which 18 units of button information (BTNI) 1131 are grouped and 3 group mode in which 12 units of button 15 information (BTNI) 113I are grouped according to the described content of the number of button groups (BTNGR Ns).- Since-the describing area of the button information (BTNI) 113I of each group mode is station ary, zero is all described in the areas in which valid 20 button information (BTNI) 113I does not exist. The button number (BTNN) is allocated from "1" in the describing sequence of the button information (BTNI) 113I in each button group.
The user number specifiable buttons in the button 25 group are the numbers of the values described from BTN #1 to NSBTN Ns.
As shown in FIG. 57, the button information (BTNI) .,~~.:..,,..~,s. =:~,._.. _ _ ._.,.
.n 9H~
~1 ~~(~~7 113I describes button position information (BTN POSI) 113J, adjacent button position information (AJBTN POSI) 1138 and button command (BTN CMD) 113L.
As shown in FIG. 58, the color numbers (1 - 3) used for the buttons and the display rectangular area on the video display screen are described in the button position information (BTN POSI) 113J. The button color number of the button (BTN COLN), start X-coordinate of the rectangular area displayed by the button (start X-coordinate), end X-coordinate of the rectangular area display by the button (end X-coordinate), start Y-coordinate of the rectangular area displayed by the button (start Y-coordinate), end Y-coordinate of the rectangular area displayed by the button and auto action mode (auto action mode) are described in the button position information (BTN POSI) 113J. The auto action mode describes whether an selection status is not maintained, or describes whether an selection status or activated state is maintained.
The adjacent button position information (AJBYN POSI) 113IC describes whether or not the button to be the button number disposed in four directions of upward, downward, rightward and leftward directions has an selection status. The button having no selection status is a button in which, when the button is moved to the button of the object, the button is immediately transferred to the action state without becoming the ~_,.- . :: ~:~,.:., ... . ;..... .. . , .: .,. . ..
~~92077 selection status. For example, the upper button number, the lower button number, the left button number and the right button number are described. It corresponds to the designation of the select key 5m.
The button command (BTN CMD) 113L describes the command to be executed when the button is activated.
A program for transferring, for example, to another selection screen or a program chain for reproducing a title is designated according to the command.
The DSI data (DSI) 115 in the DSI packet 117 shown in FIG. 43 is the navigation data used to search for a VOB unit (VOBU) 85. The DSI data (DSI) 115 contains the DSI general information (DSI GI), angle information (SML AGLI), VOB unit search information (VOBU SRI), - and the synchronizing playback information (SYNCI), as shown in FIG. 59.
The DSI information (DSI GI)contains information about the entire DSI data 115. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60, the DSI general information (DSI GI) contains the system clock reference for the NV pack (NV PCK SCR) 86. The system clockreference (NV PCR SCR) is storedin the system timeclock (STC) 54A, 58A, 60A or 62A built in each section of FIG. 1. On the basis of the STC 54A, 58A, 60A, 62A, video, audio, and sub-picture packs are decoded at the video, audio, and sub-picture decoders 58, 60, and 62 and the monitor 6 and the speaker 8 reproduce images ~..:~..:.. .'~.~, .;.:,' . -:.:....;~a:
and sound, respectively. The DSI general information (DSI GI) contains-the-start address -(NV PCR LBN) of the NV pack (NV PCK) 86 containing the DSI data expressed by the number of logical sectors-(RLSN), relative to the first logical sector in the VOB set (VOBS) 82 containing the DSI, and the address (VOBU EA) of the last pack in the VOB unit (VOBU) 85 containing the DSI
data expressed by the number of logical sectors (RLSN), relative to the first logical sector in the VOB
unit (VOBU) 85.
Furthermore, the DSI general information (DSI GI) contains the end address (VOBU IP EA) of the V pack (V PCK) 88 containing-thelast data item for the first I picture in the VOB unit (VOBU) expressed by the number of logical sectors (RLSN), relative to the first logical sector in the VOB unit (VOBU) 85 containing the DSI data, and the identification number (VOBU IP EA) of the VOB 83 containing the DSI and the identification number (VOBU C IDN) of- the cell-84 in which the DSI
data is recorded.
Like the angle information (NSML AGLI) in PCI 113, the angle information (SML AGLI) contains as many start addresses (SML AGL C DSTA) of angle cells at jump destinations as the number of angles, as shown in FIG. 61. Each of the start addresses is represented by a logical sector relative to the logical sector in the NV pack 86 in which the DSI 115 is recorded. When the ~~ 9~D~77 angle is changed on the basis of the angle information (SML AGLI), the angle information (SML AGLI) contains the start address of the cell 84 in another angle block after the playback time of the VOBU 85 in which the DSI
data 115 is recorded, as shown in FIG. 62.
When the angle information (SML AGLI) in DSI data 113 is used, the angle is changed, cell by cell, whereas PCI can be changed on the basis of a video object unit (VOBU) 85. Namely, consecutive changes of the angle are described in the angle information (SML AGLI)=in DSI data115, whereas discontinuous changes of the angle are described in the angle information (SML AGLI) in PCI data 113. In the above example of baseball, the angle is changed as follows.
It is assumed that angle cell #j (AGL C#j) 84 contains a stream of video data for a series of scenes where the pitcher throws a ball, the batter hits the ball, and the ball lands in the stands, filmed from the infield, and that angle cell #1 contains a stream of video data for a series of the same scenes filmed from the outfield. Furthermore, angle cell #9 is assumed to be a stream of video data as to how the team to which the batter belongs looks in connection with a series of the above scenes. When the user is viewing angle cell #j (AGL C#j)and changes to ,angle cell #1 the instant the batter made a hit, that is, changes to a scene from the outfield the instant the batter hit the ball, he or she ~o can switch to consecutive scenes where the ball is flying closer to the outfield after the batter hit the ball. Furthermore, when the user is viewing angle cell #j (AGL C#i)-andchanges to anglecell #9 the moment the ball landed in the stands, that is, changes to an angle at which how the batter's team looks is shown on the screen, the team cheering for the home run and the baseball manager's expression are displayed on the screen. When the angle information (NSML AGLI) in PCI
data 113 andthe angle information (SML AGLI) in DSI
data 115 are used, it is apparent that a different scene is played back.
The search information (VOBU SI)in VOBU 85 contains information used to identify the first address in a cell 84 as shown in FIG. 63. Specifically, the search information (VOBU SI) in VOBU 85 contains the start addresses {A FWDn) of +1 to +20, +60, +120, and +240 VOB units (VOBU) 85 as forward addresses (FWDANn) in the order of playback on the basis of the VOB unit (VOBU) 85 containing the DSI 115 as shown in FIG. 35A, the forward addresses being expressed by the number of logical sectors, relative to the first logical sector in the VOB unit.
Each forward address {FWDANn) contains 32 bits as shown in FIG. 64. Bit number 29 (b29) to bit number 0 (b0) are assigned to its address, for example, the address of forward address 10 (FWDA10). At the head of ..-. .-~ ~ __. E.., .. ._.. . . __. ~_.~_"..~,._- _ __ ~~ ~3~C77 ~l the forward address (FWDANn), a flag (V FWD Existl) indicating whether the video data exists in the video object unit (VOBU) 85 corresponding to the forward address (FWDANn) and a flag (V FWD Exist2) indicating whether the video data exists in the video object unit between the current address and the forward address (FWDAn). Specifically, VFWD Existl corresponds to bit number (b31). When this flag is at 0, this means that there is no video data in the video object unit (VOBU) specified by the address (FWDANn) written in bit number 29 to bit number 0. When this flag is at 1, this means that there is video data in the video object unit (VOBU) specified by the forward address (FWDANn) written in bit number 29 to bit number 0. For example, if forward address 10 (FWD10) has video data, the flag will be up (1) in V FWD Existl of the 31st bit.
If the address has no video data, the flag will be down (0) in V FWD Existl of the 3lst,bit. Furthermore, V FWD Epist2corresponds to bit number (b30). When this flag is at 0, this means that there is video data in none of the video object units between the current address and the forwarding address (FWDAn).
Specifically; V FWD Exixt 1 corresponds to bit number (b31). When this flag is at 0, this means that there is no video data in the video object units (VOBU) 85 between the forward address (FWDANn) written in bit number 29 to bit number 0 and current address. When _. :..:_ .:;;_. , , - : _ . - :~ >... , this flag is at 1, this means that there is video data in at least one of the video object units (VOBU) 85 between them. For example, if there is video data in a plurality of video object units 85 between forward address-1 and forward address 9, the flag will be up (1) in V FWD Exist2 of the 30th, bit-._Ifthe address has no video data, the flag will be down (0) in V FWD Exist2 of the 30th bit.
Furthermore, the VOBU search information (VOBU SI) containsthe start addresses (A BWDn) of -1 to -20, -60, -120, and -240 VOB units (VOBU) 85 as backward addresses (BWDA) in the reverse order of playback on the basis of the VOB unit (VOBU) 85 containing the DSI
as shown in FIG. 63, the backward addresses being expressed by the number of logical sectors, relative to the first logical sector in the VOB unit 85.
Each backward address (FWDANn) contains 32 bits as shown in FIG. 65. Bit number 29 (b29) to bit number 0 (b0) are assigned to its address, for example, the ZO address of backward address 10 (BWDA10). At the head of the backward address (BWDANn), a flag (V BWD Existl) indicating whether the video data exists in the video object unit (VOBU) 85 corresponding to the backward address (BWDANn) and a flag (V BWD Exist2) indicating whether the video data exists in the video object units between the backward address (BWDAn) and the current address. Specifically, V BWD Existl corresponds to bit ,~ _ d.: _ ::_ _. , :.. .. ,.. - :.
number (b31). When this flag is at 0, this means that there is no video data in the video object unit (VOBU) 85 specified by the address (BWDANn) written in bit number 29 to bit number 0. When this flag is at 1, this means that there is video--data in the video object unit (VOBU) specified by the address (BWDANn) written in bit number 29 to bit number 0. For example, if backward address 10 (BWDA10) has video data, the flag will be up (1) in V BWD Existl of the 31st-bit.If the address has no video data, the flag will be down (0) in V BWD Existl of the 31st bit. Furthermore, V BWD Exist2 corresponds to bit number (b30). When this flag is at 0, this means that there is video data in none of the video object units between the backward address (BWDANn) written in bit number 29 to bit number 0 and the current address. When this flag is at 1, this means that there is video data in at least one of the video object units (VOBU) 85. For example, if there is video data in video object units between the backward address 10 (BWDA10) and the current address 0, the flag will be up (1) in V BWD-Exist2 of the 30th bit. If the address has no video data, the flag will be down (0) in V BWD Exist2 of the 30th bit.
The synchronizing information (SYNCI) contains address information on the sub-pictures and audio data reproduced in synchronization with the playback start time of the video data in the VOB unit (VOBU) 85 _.v ~~::_:.,._ ~:.-.....
containing the DSI data. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 66, the start address (A SYNCA) of the target audio-pack (A PCK) is expressed by the number of logical sectors (RLSN), relative to the NV pack (NV PCK) 86-in which DSI data 115 is recorded. When there are more than one audio stream (8 audio streams maximum), as many pieces of the synchronizing information (SYNCI) as there are audio streams are written. Furthermore, the synchronizing information 1~ (SYNCI) contains the address (SP SYNCA) of the NV pack (NV PCK) 86of theVOB unit (VOBU) 85 containing the target audio pack (SP PCK) 91, the address being expressed by the number of logical sectors (RLSN), relative to the NV pack (NV PCK) 86 in which DSI 115 is recorded. When there are more than one sub-picture stream.(32 sub-picture streams maximum), as many pieces of the synchronizing information (SYNCI) as there are sub-picture streams are written.
A sub-picture unit composed of sub-picture data of 2~ a plurality of sub-picture packets will be explained by referring to FIG.--67. The sub-picture unit as data (e.g., caption) of still pictures corresponding to several tens of screens can be recorded in 1 GOP. The sub-picture unit is composed of a sub-picture unit header (SPUR), a pixel data formed of run-length data (PXD) and display control sequence table (DCSQT).
As shown in FIG. 68, size of sub-picture unit s~.
~ 19077 (SPDSZ) and start address of display control sequence table (SPDCSQTA) are described in the sub-picture unit header (SPUH).
As shown in FIG. 69, display control sequence 5 (DCSQ) is described in a lapse time sequence in the display control sequence table (DCSQT).
As shown in FIG. 70, start address of following display control sequence (SPNDCSQA) and at least one of display control command (SPDCCMD) are described in each 10 display control sequence (DCSQ).
The display control command (SPDCCMD) is composed of set command of forcedly display start timing of pixel data (FSTA DSP), set command of display start timing of pixel data (STA DSP), set command of display 15 end timing of pixel data (STP DSP), set command of color code of pixel data (SET COLOR),-set command of contrast ratio of pixel-data and video (SET CONTR), set command of display area of pixel data (SET DAREA), set command of display start address of pixel data 20 (SET DSPXA), set command of color change and contrast change of pixel data (CHG COLCON), and end command of display control command (CMD END).
The command (STA DSP) is a command for designating the display start of the sub-picture data, and ~25 described by offset PTM from PTM described in the sub-picture packet including the sub-picture unit header {start PTM). The command (STP DSP) is a command for ,_.-,:..
~1~~07~
designating thedisplay stop of the sub-picture data, and described in the offset PTM from the PTM described in the sub-picture packet including the sub-picture unit header (stop PTM).
This start PTM and stop PTM are delayed by arbitrary predetermined time from the PTM of the video data and the audio data regenerated in the same time zone and set.
The system processor section 54 shown in FIG. 1 has a packet transmit dispose section 200 for determin-ing the type of the packet and transmitting the data in the packet to each decoder. This packet transmit dispose section 200 is composed, as shown in FIG. 71, a memory interface section (memory I/F section) 191, a stuffing length detect section 192, a pack header end address calculation section 193, a pack classification judgement,section 194, a packet data transmit control section 195, and decoder interface section (decoder I/F
section) 196.
The memory I/F section 191 outputs pack data from the data RAM section 56 to the stuffing length detect section 192, the pack classification judgement section 194, the packet data transmit control section 195 and the decoder I/F section 196 via a data bus.
The stuffing length detect section 192 detects how many byte the stuffing length in the pack header 120 in the pack data supplied from the memory I/F section 191 ~~~~07~
contains, and outputs the detected result to the pack header end address calculation section 193.
The pack header end address calculation section 193 calculates the pack header end address according to the stuffing length supplied from the stuffing length detect section 192, and outputs the calculated result to the pack classification judgement section 194 and the packet data transmit control section 195.
The pack classification judgement section 194 judges any of the video pack 88, the audio pack 91, the sub-picture pack 90 and the NV pack 86 according to the content of the 4-byte data supplied next to the address of the pack data supplied from the memory I/F section 191 in accordance with the pack header end address supplied from the pack header end address calculation section 193, and outputs the judged result to the packet data transmit control section 195.
The packet data transmit control section 195 judges the destination and the packet start address in 2D response to the pack header end address supplied from the pack header end address calculation section 193 and the judged result of the pack classification supplied from the pack classification judgement section 194, and further judges the packet length in the packet header 121 of the pack data supplied.- Further, the packet data transmit control section 195 supplies a signal indicating the destination as a transmit control signal ~~'>,: ~- _. _. .. _:_~ ., :. .,.~.._". :..
~1~~071 ~8 to the decoder I/F section 196, and supplies the packet end address from the packet start address to the memory I/F section 191.
The decoder I/F section 196 outputs the video data, the audio data, the sub-picture data as packet data including the packet header 121 supplied under the control of the packet data transmit control section 195 from the memory IJF section 191 to corresponding decoder sections 58, 60, 62, or outputs navigation data and computer data as packet data to the data RAM
section 56.
The packet transmit dispose section 200 will be explained.
The pack data read from the data RAM section 56 is supplied to the stuffing length detect section 192, the pack classification judgement section 194, the packet data transmit control section 195 and the decoder I/F
section 196 via the memory I/F section 191.
Thus, the stuffing length is detected by the stuffing length detect section 192, and the data indi-eating the stuffing length is output to the pack header end address calculation section 193.
The pack header end address calculation section 193 calculates the pack header end address according to the stuffing length supplied, and supplies the pack header end address to the pack classification judgement section 194 and the packet data transmit control . __ ,...: ;. e':'~ - i~ ' =,t,~. ._ ~;- ~ - .. _ u;: ~..~ . . , .._,.
section 195.
The pack classification judgement section 194 judgesany of the NV pack 86, the video pack 88, the auto pack 91 of-Dolby AC3, the audio pack 91 of linear PCM and thesub-picture pack 90 according to the con-tent of the data of 4 to 6 byte supplied next to the address in accordance with the supplied pack header end address, and supplies the judged result to the packet data transmit control section 195.
Specifically, when the stream ID of 1 byte indicating the private stream 2 is supplied, it is judged as the NV pack 86. The video pack 88 is judged according to the stream ID of 1 byte indicating the video stream. Any of the audio pack 91 of the Dolby AC3, the audio pack 91 and the sub-picture pack 90 is judged according to the stream ID of one byte indicating the private stream 1.
When the stream ID is the private stream 1, the audio pack of the linear PCM, the audio pack of the Dolby AC3 or the sub-picture stream is judged according to the substream ID continued to the packet header 121, and its stream number is judged.
The packet data transmit control section 195 judges the destination and the packet start address in response to the judged result of the supplied pack classification and the pack header end address, and further judges the packet length in the packet header ___. _._.~ ~_-,.v:u _ .. : .~... . : .;:~ .. ;., .s~._:-« :.."
ao 121 of the supplied pack data. Thus, the packet data transmit control section 195 supplies the signal indi-Gating the destination as the transmit control signal to the decoder I/F section 196, and supplies the packet end address-from the packet start address to the memory I/F section 191.
Therefore, the substantially valid packet data is supplied-from the memory I/F section 191 to the decoder I/F section 196 via the data bus, and then transferred to the decoders 58, 60, 62 or the data RAM section 56 as the destination.
Specifically, the packet data of the video data is transferred to the video decoder section 58, the packet data of the audio data is transferred to the audio decoder section 60, and the packet data of the sub-picture data is transferred-to the sub-picture decoder section 62.
In this case, since the pack data has a constant length, the storage state of the data RAM section 56 and hence the start address has a constant interval.
Accordingly, the head of the pack data in the data RAM
section 56 is always stored by the address of the same interval, and the pack data is not address managed, but only the pack number may be managed.
in the step of judging the classification of the data, in the case of the PCI data and the DSI data as the NV data indicating the reproduced position of the :: a , o-... . . , ;;;"
~i9~~77 video data, the NV data is not transferred to the decoder, but stored in the data RAM section 56. The NV
data is referred according to the system CPU section 50, if necessary, and utilized when the specific repro-duction of the video data is executed. In this case, the PCI data and the DSI data are identified according to the substream ID imparted to the PCI data and the DSI data.
When the reproduction of one cell is finished, cell information to be reproduced next is obtained from the reproducing sequence information in the program chain data, and similarly continuously reproduced.
The above-described sub-picture decoder section 62 shown in FIG. 1 has a decoder 62B for decoding the sub-picture data supplied from the system processor section 54, and a highlight processor section 62C for highlighting the sub-picture data after decoding by the decoder 62B. The highlight processor section 62C
highlights in response to the X-, Y-coordinate values indicating the rectangular area for displaying the selection item as highlight information supplied from the system CPU section 50, color code, highlight color/contrast value.
The decoder 62B expands the pixel data compressed by the run-length compression as the sub-picture data in response to the highlight pixel, the pattern pixel, the background pixel, etc.
N ., ~..: ,. - :.:a. ., ..:: ... ~ ~ . . .. -~1 ~'Z077 The highlight processor section 62C is composed, as shown in FIG. 72, a highlight area setting/judgement section 180, a default color/contrast setter 818, a highlight color/contrast setter 182, a selector 183 and a color pallet register 184.
The highlight area setting/judgement section 180 judges the designated highlight area according to the X-, Y-coordinate values indicating the rectangular area (designated highlight area) representing an selection item by the system CPU section 50 and the X-, Y-coordinate values obtained by raster scanning, i.e., pixel data X-, Y-coordinate values, outputs a switching signal indicating a highlight zone, and supplies its output to the selector 183.
The default color/contrast setter 181 sets the display color and the contrast of the default of each pixel included in the sub-picture data.
The highlight color/contrast setter 182 sets the highlight color and contrast values by the system CPU 50.
The selector 183 selectively outputs the display color and contrast of the default from the default color/contrast setter 181 to the color pallet register 184, or outputs the color and the contrast at the time o~-the highlight from the highlight color/contrast setter 182 to the color pallet register 184.
The color pallet register 184 outputs the signal ..
~=3: .. ., x 2192~J77 responsive to the color and the contrast supplied from the selector 183.
Therefore, when out of the highlight area is judged by the highlight area setting/judgement section 180, the selector 183 receives the display color and the contrast of the default of -each pixel data from the default color/contrast setter 181, outputs them to the color-pallet register 184, and outputs the color signal from the color pallet register 184 to a D/A and data reproducing section 64.
When the highlight area is judged by the high-light area setting/judgement section 180, the selector 183 receives the display color and the contrast at the time of the highlight of each pixel data from the highlight color/contrast setter 182, outputs it the the color-pallet register 184, and outputs the color signal from the color pallet register 184 to the D/A and data reproducing section 64.
The reproducing process of the menu will be explained by using an optical disk 10 having a logic format shown in FIGS. 6 to 66 by referring to FIG. 1.
In FIG. 1, arrows with solid lines between the blocks indicate data buses, and arrows with broken lines indicate a control bus.
In the optical disk apparatus shown in FIG. l, when a power source is turned on and the optical disk 10 is inserted, the system CPU 50 reads the initial _ ..~:.t~S' . .. ~. , _ program from the system ROM and RAM section 52, and operates the disk drive section 30. Accordingly, the disk drive section 30 starts reading from a lead-in area 27, and reads volume and file structure area for specifying the volume and the file structure according to ISO-9660 subsequently to the lead-in area 27.
Specifically, the system CPU 50 applies a read command to the disk drive section 30 to read the volume and the file structure area 70 recorded--at a predetermined position of the optical disk l0 set to the disk drive section 30, reads the contents of the volume and file structure area 70, and temporarily stores the contents in the data RAM section 56 via the system processor section 56. The system CPU 50 extracts information such as recording position, recording capacity, size, etc., and management information as necessary informa-tion for the other management via a pass table and directory record stored in the data RAM section 56, transfers them and stores them at a predetermined position the system ROM and RAM section 52.
Then, the system CPU section 50 acquires a video manager 71 composed of a plurality of files starting from "0" of the file number by referring to the information of the recording position and the recording capacity of each file from the,system ROM and RAM
section 52. Specifically, the system CPU section 50 applies the read command to the disk drive section 30 ;0. _ . ~ . ~wL a _, , .,~. , . ~ ~. _.» ..,~:..:
X1'82077 by referring to the information of the recording position and the recording capacity of each file obtained from the system ROM and RAM section 52, obtains the position and the size of the plurality 5 files-for composing the video manager 71 present on a route directory, reads the video manager 71, and stores them-inthe data RAM section 56 via the system processor section 54.
Thereafter, the system CPU section 50, as shown in 10 FIGS. 73 and 74, the number of titles in the optical disk 10, the number of chapters of each title (number of programs), the number of audio streams of each title, the language of the audio stream, the number of sub-picture streams of each title and the language of 15 the sub-picture stream.
Specifically, the system CPU section 50 searches the title search pointer table (TT SRPT) 79 of the second table of the video manager 71 (Step S51). The system CPU 50 acquires the total number of the titles 20 in the optical disk 10 according to the number of the title-search pointers described in the information of the title search pointer table (TT SRPTI) 92 in the title search pointer table (TT SRPT) 79 (Step S52).
The system CPU acquires the number of chapters 25 (number of programs) of each title according to the number of part-of-titles (PTT Ns) as the number of chapters (number of programs) described in each title ::,._ . ..'am .. - o,.: -..":,...d. .. ;..-.~":. _._.~. . _x s_y:::,_ ...
_..'...
search pointer (TT SRP) 93-in the title search pointer table (TT SRPT) 79 (Step S53). -.
The system CPU 50 searches the video title set part-of-title search pointer table (VTS PTT SRPT) 99 in the video title set information (VTSI) 94 of the first table of the video title set 72 described in each title search pointer (TT $RP) 93 (Step S54). The system CPU
50 acquires the number of audio streams of each title according to the number of the -audio streams described in the table (VTS PTT $RPT) 99 of each video title-set -72, and acquires the number of-the sub-picture streams of each title according to the,number of the sub-picture streams (VTS SPST Ns)-(Step S55).
The system CPU 50 acquires the language of the audio streams of each title according to the language code of the auto of each audio stream described in the audio stream attribute (VTS AST ATR) of the table (VTS PTT SRPT) 99 of each video--title set 72, and acquires the language of the audio streams of each title (Step S56).
The system CPU section 50 acquires the sub-picture streams of each title according to the language code of the sub-picture of the sub-picture streams described in the sub-picture stream attribute (VTS SPST ATR) of the table (VTS PTT SRPT) 99 of each video title set 72 (Step S57).
The system CPU section 50 also searches the video _ .~.__ __~._ -n, r.~~~;.J, _~. .i~~. ,_. .-~ .,~....Y. .u-«.:-, . ..:
manager menu PGCI unit table (VMGM PGCI UT) 81 of the fourth table in the video manager information (VMGM) 75 of the video manager 71 (Step S58). By this search, the video manager menu PGCI unit search pointer (VMGM) LU SRP) $1B describing the same language code as the language set to the reproducing apparatus (Step S59).
When the video manager menu PGCI unit search pointer (VMGM LU SRP) S1Bdescribingthe same language code is searched, the system CPU section 50 searches the menu ID described together with the category (VMGM PGC CAT) of the program chain of each video manager menu of the video manager menu PGC information search pointer (VMGM) PGCI SRP)81E inthe video manager menu language unit (VMGM) LU) 81C corresponding to the pointer (VMGM LU SRP) 81B (Step S60), judges whether or not the main menu as the route menu by the search exists, and judges whether or not the title menu (video title set menu) exists (Step S61).
When the main menu exists, the system CPU section 50 reads the contents of the corresponding VMGM program chain information (VMGM PGCI SA) by the start address of the VMGM program chain information (VMGM PGCI) 81F
described in one of the video manager menu PGC informa-tion search pointer (VMGM PGCI SRP) 81E describing the menu ID of the route menu, and stores the start address (C FVOBU SA) of the head video object unit (VOBU) 85 ~_y ~...~:.~.~ _ ,. ,.:-:~ ~ ... ... .._.'f-=,.~~,_ ;-~19~077 described in the VMGM program chain information (VMGM PGCI) 81F in the memory table 56A as the start address of the main menu (Step S62).
When the title menu exists, the system CPU section 50 reads the contents of thecorresponding VMGM program chain information (VMGM PGCI) 81F according to the parameter (VMGM PGCI SA) by the-start address of the VMGM program chain information (VMGM PGCI) 81F described in one of the video manager menu PGC information search pointer (VMGM PGCI SRP) 81E describing, the menu ID of the title menu, and stores the start address (C FVOBU SA) of the head video object chain information (VOBU) 85 described in the corresponding VMGM program chain information (VMGM PGCI) 81F in the--memory table 56A as the start address of the title menu (Step S63).
The system CPU section SO searches the video title set menu PGCI unit table (VTSM PGCI UT) 111_ in the video title set information (VTSI) 94 of the first table of each video title set 72 (Step S64). By this search the video title set menu PGCI unit search pointer (VTSM LVJ SRP) 111B describing the same language code as the language set to the. reproducing apparatus (Step S65).
When the video title set menu PGCI unit search pointer (VTSM LU SRP) 111B describing the same language code is searched, the system CPU section 50 searches the menu ID descried together with the category ... .~» .. .. ,..~.".,.. d:L. .."_.. .. . , . r, ~ . . ..: ~ .a..: ~s. . . ,.
{VTSM PGC CAT) of the program chain of each video title set menu of the video title set menu PGC information search pointer (VTSM PGCI $RP) 111E-in the video title set menu language unit (VTSM LU) 111C corresponding to the pointer (VTSM LU SRP),-111B-Step S66), judges whether or not the sub-picture menu, the audio menu, the angle menu, the chapter (program) menu exist by this search, and judges whether or not the title menu exists (Step S67).
When these menus exist, the system CPU section 50 reads the contents of the corresponding VTSM program chain information (VTSM PGCI) 111F by the parameter (VTSM PGCI SA) by the start-address of the VTSM program chain information (VTSM PGCI-) 111F described in one of the video title set menu PGC information search pointer {VTSM PGCI SRP) 111E describing-=the menu ID, and stores the start address (C FVOBU SA)of the head-video object unit (VOBU) 85 described in the VTSM program chain information (VTSM PGCI) 111F in the memory table 56A as the start address of the corresponding menu (Step S68).
As described above, the start addresses of the sub-picture menu, the audio menu, the angle menu, the chapter (program) menu of each video title set 72 are stored in the memory table 56A.
As a result, as shown in FIG. 75, the start address corresponding to each menu corresponding to the language set to the reproducing apparatus is stored in _>. _ . . ..-:~~..~.= -.,-~. a ::v~ :.."~ . '-_. . _.:~._,. ..
~i92077 the memory table 56A.
Therefore, when the menu key 5k of the remote controller 5 is closed, the system CPU section 50 judges the_-reproduction of the main menu, and judges 5 whether or..not the main menu exists. "As the result of the judgement, if the presence of the main menu is judged, the system CPU section 50 reads the start address (C FVOBU-SA) of the head video object unit (VOBU) 85 stored corresponding to the main menu of the 10 memory table 56A, reads the data of the main menu corresponding to the address from the area correspond-ing to the,video object set (VMGM VOB$) 76 for the video-manager menu (VMGM) 75 of the optical disk 10, and reproduces it. The reproduced data is input to the 15 data RAM section 56 via the system processor section 54. The data cell 84 is applied to the video decoder section 58, the audio decoder-section 60 and the sub-picture decoder section 62 based on the reproducing time information, decoded, signal-converted by the D/A
20 and data-reproducing section 64, and the image of the main menu as shown in FIG. 76 on the monitor 6, and the voice is reproduced from the speaker 8.
When the title key 51 of the remote controller 5 is closed, or the "1" key corresponding to the title is 25 closed in the state that the main menu is reproduced, or at the time of normal reproducing, the system CPU
section 50 judges the reproduction of the tile menu, :.. ~z. ~.~~ ~:..~...... ,....,..n.,:~.
~19~~~7 and judges whether or not the title menu exists. As a result of the judgement, if the presence of the title is judged, the system CPU section 50 reads the start address (C FVOBU SA) of the head video object unit (VOBU) 85 stored corresponding to the title menu of the memory table 56A, reads the data of the title menu corresponding to the address from the area correspond-ing to the video object set (VMGM VOBS) 76 for the video manager menu (VMGM) 75 of the optical disk 10, and reproduces it. The reproduced data is input to the data RAM section 56 via the system processor section 54. The data cell 84 is applied to the video decoder section 58, the audio decoder section 60 and the sub-picture decoder section 62 based on the reproducing time information, decoded, signal-converted by the D/A
and data reproducing section 64, and the image of the title-menu as shown in FIG. 77A on the monitor 6 is reproduced and the voice is reproduced from the speaker 8.
When the "2" key corresponding to the chapter is closed in the state that the main menu is reproduced, or the title is selected by the normal reproduction, and then the system CPU section 50 judges the reproduc-tion of the chapter menu corresponding to the title selected at present, and judges whether or not the chapter menu exists. As the result of the judgement, if the presence of the chapter menu is judged, the :T -~-.'. ....."~: - ._ . _ .-.:. .. ~ .~~-,a. z .::,.-_..~.,..
~19~Q77 system CPU section 50 reads. the start address (C FVOBU SA) of the head video object unit (VOBU) 84 stored corresponding to the chapter menu of the memory table 56A, reads the data of the chapter menu corre-sponding to the address from the areacorresponding to the video object set (VTSM VOBS) 96 for the video title set menu (VTSM) of the optical disk 10, and reproduces it. The reproduced data is input to the data RAM
section 56 via the system processor section 54. The data cell 84 is applied to the video decoder section 58, the audio decoder section 60 and the sub-picture decoder section 62 based on the reproducing time information, decoded, and signal-converted by the D/A
and data reproducing section 64, and the image of the chapter menu as shown in FIG. 77B on the monitor 6 is reproduced, and the voice is reproduced from the speaker 8.
When the "3" key corresponding to the audio is closed in the state that the main menu is reproduced, 2Q or the title is selected by the normal reproduction, and then the system CPU section 50 judges the reproduc-tion of the audio menu corresponding to the title selected at present, and judges whether or not the audio menu exists. As the result of the judgement, if the presence of the audio menu is judged, the system CPU section 50 reads the start address (C FVOBU SA) of the head video object unit (VOBU) 84 stored corresponding ii ~, _ .~ .' 4~ 7 .. _bas. ,..';kie~-' ryx.-?,..,. . . e...
to the audio menu of the memory,table 56A, reads the data of the audio menu corresponding to the address from the area corresponding to the video object set (VTSM VOBS)96 for the video-title set menu (VTSM) of the optical disk 10, and reproduces it. The reproduced data is input to the data RAM section 56 via the system processor section 54. The data cell 84 is applied to the video decoder section 58, the audio decoder section 60 and thesub-picture decoder section 62 based on the reproducing time information, decoded, and signal-converted by the D/A and data reproducing section 64, and the image of the chapter menu as shown in FIG. 77C
on the monitor 6 is reproduced, and the voice is reproduced from the speaker 8.
When the "4" key corresponding to the sub-picture is closed in the state that the main menu is reproduced, or the title is selected by the normal reproduction, and then the system CPU section 50 judges the reproduction of the sub-picture menu corresponding to the title selected at present, and judges whether or not the sub-picture menu exists. As the result of the judgement, if the presence of the sub-picture menu is judged, the system CPU section 50 reads the start address (C FVOBU SA) of the head video object unit (VOBU) 84 stored corresponding to the sub-picture menu of the memory table 56A, reads the data of the sub-picture menu corresponding to the address from the area .~.~ = n:,. .,.: ;,.-z-x. .., .:_ .,.-,.:.
corresponding to the video object set (VTSM VOBS) 96 for the video title set menu (VTSM) of the optical disk 10, and reproduces it. The reproduced data is input to the data RAM section 56 via the system processor section 54. The data cell 84 isapplied to the video decoder section 58, the audio decoder section 60 and the sub-picture decoder section 62 based on the reproducing time information, decoded, and signal-converted by the D/A and data reproducing section 64, and the image of the chapter menu as shown in FIG. 77D
on the monitor 6 is reproduced, and the voice is reproduced-from the speaker 8.
When the "5" key corresponding to the angle is closed in the state that the main menu is reproduced, or the title is selected by the normal reproduction, and then the system CPU section 50 judges the reproduc-tion of the angle menu corresponding to the title selected at present, and judges whether or not the angle menu exists. As the result of the judgement, if the presence of the angle menu is judged, the system CPU section 50 reads the start address (C FVOBUfSA)-of the head video object unit (VOBU) 84 stored corresponding to the angle menu of the memory table 56A, reads the data of the angle menu corresponding to the address from the area corresponding to the video object set (VTSM YOBS) 96 for the video title set menu (VTSM) of the optical disk 10, and reproduces it. The ~ P ~~ ~":~ Y e.... a . ... ::. [ ~' n' ,.
reproduced data is input to the data RAM section 56 via the system processor section 54. The data cell 84 is applied to-the video decoder section 58, the audio decoder section 60 and the sub-picture decoder section 62 based on. the reproducing time information, decoded, and signal-converted by the D/A and data reproducing section 64, and the image of the chapter menu as shown in FIG. 77E on the monitor 6 is reproduced, and the voice is reproduced-from the speaker 8.
Therefore, since the system CPU section 50 can stores the position data of the acquired each menu in the menu table 56A in the data RAM 56, necessary menu can be easily reproduced by using the same.
The system CPU 50 sets the parameters for repro-during thevidao manager menu to each video decoder section 58, each audio decoder section 60 and each sub-picture decoder section 62 based on the attribute information acquired for the number of-streams of the video, the audio and the sub-picture and the attribute information for the video manager menu described in the information management table (VMGI MAT) 78 of the video manger (VMGI) 75.
The process of the case ofreproducing the above-described menu will be described in detail by referring to the flowchart shown in FIG. 78.
The start address of the initial VOBU in the cell as the start address corresponding to the menu to be ;~, ~,_..
2~ ~z~~~
reproduced and the PGC number, i.e., the cell number are stored in the system ROM and RAM section 52 (Step S1).
When the preparation for reading the video title set is arranged, a read command is applied from the system CPU section 50 to the disk drive section 30, and the optical disk 10 is sought by the disk drive section 30 based on the above-described start address (Step S2). The cell regarding the designated program chain (PGC) are sequentially read from the optical disk 10 according to the read command, and sent to the data RAM
section 56 via the system CPU section 50 and the system processor section 54 (Step S3). The sent data is stored as the pack from the navigation pack 85 of the heat pack of the video object unit (VOBU) 85 as shown in FIG. 8 in the data RAM section 56. Thereafter, the packet data of the video--pack 8$, the audio pack 91 and the sub-picture pack 90 of the video object unit (VOBU) are transferred by the packet transmit dispose section 200 to the video- decoder section 58, the audio decoder section 60 and the sub-picture decoder section 62, and the PCI data and the DSI data as the packet data of the navigation pack 86 are transmitted to the data RAM
section 56 (Step S4).
In this case, the system CPU section 50 judges the highlight information (the contents of FIGS. 49 to 58 described above) corresponding -to the display button according to the PCI data stored-in the data RAM
section 56 (Step S5).
Specifically, the system CPU section 50 judges the rectangular area of the button at each button, the display color and the contrast value of the pixel data before selecting in the case that the button is the selection button, the display color and the contrast value of the pixel data after selecting, the display color and the contrast value ofthe pixel data before activation in the case that the button is the action button, and the display color and the contrast value of-the pixel data after the activation, and stores them in the data RAM section 56. As the pixel data, highlight pixels l, 2 pattern pixel, background pixel are pre-pared, and the corresponding display colors and the contrast values are prepared.
As described above, the system CPU section 50 outputs X- and Y-coordinate values indicating the rectangular area corresponding to each button stored in the data RAM section 56 to the highlight area setting/
judgement section 180 of the highlight processor section 62C, and outputs the highlight color and the contrast value responsive to the highlight information corresponding to the scanning position to the highlight color/contrast setter 182 of the highlight processor section 62C (Step 56).
Thus, the highlight area setting/judgement section .. v .. . m,af . L3 . ,. ~ a: -... ,~' ~ .~,. ~ ,.: ~.- ~: a'1,.1 " . .
180 judges the designated highlight area according to the X-, Y-coordinate values indicating the rectangular area (designated highlight area) displayed by the selection item by the system CPU section 50 and the X-and Y-coordinate values obtained,the,raster scanning, i.e., pixel data B-, Y-coordinate values, and supplies the switching signal indicating-the highlight section to the selector 183 (Step S7) The highlight color/contrast setter 182 sets the highlight color and contrast value by the system CPU
section 50, in response to the X- and Y-coordinate values obtained by raster scanning (Step S8).
As described above, the selector 183 selectively outputs the display color and contrast of the default from the default color/contrast setter 181 to the color pallet register 181 in response to the switching signal from the highlight area setting/judgement section 180 or outputs the color and the contrast at the time of the highlight from the highlight colorlcontrast setter 182 to the color pallet register 184 (Step S9).
The color pallet register 184 outputs the signal responsive to-the color and the contrast supplied from the selector 183 (Step S10).
As a result, when out of the highlight area is judged by the highlight area setting/judgement section 180, the selector 183 receives the display color and the contrast of the default of each pixel from the .::~F:., _~-. :... ... ... . ....._.. ,.~, ._ _:._ default color/contrast setter 181, outputs them to the color pallet register 184 and outputs the color signal from the color pallet register 184 to the D/A and data reproducing section 64.
When the highlight are is judged by the highlight area setting/judgement section 180, the selector 183 receives the display color and the contract at the time of the highlight of each pixel data from the highlight color/contrast setter 182, outputs them to the color pallet register 184, and outputs the color signal from the color pallet register 184 to the D/A and data reproducing section 64.
As a result, the sub-picture data of the pixel data after decoding is altered at the color and the contrast in response to the highlight information, and supplied to the image mixing section 64A (refer to FIG. 1) in the D/A and data reproducing section 64 shown in FIG. 1.
Therefore, the video data decoded by the video decoder section 58 is supplied to the image mixing section 64A in the D/A and data reproducing section 64, decoded by the decoder 62B in the sub-picture decoder section 62, and supplied to the image mixing section 64A in the D/A and data reproducing section 64 via the highlight processor section 62C. Thus, the video data and the sub-picture data are mixed by the image mixing section 64A, and the mixing picture is displayed on the loo monitor section 6.
For instance, the sub-picture image formed of the button as the selection item shown in FIG. 79B is combined with the video as the background image shown g in FIG. 79A to the image highlightedaccording to the highlight information indicated by FIG. 79C, thereby acquiring the mixing picture indicated in FIG. 79D. In this case, the background of the selection item is displayed by blue, and the character of the selection item- isdis~layedby black.- -_-The audio data decoded by the audio decoder section 60 is supplied to the D/A and data reproducing section 64, and the menu or the voice corresponding to the video is reproduced from the speaker 8.
When.the user selects the selection item highlight displayed by the keyldisplay section 4 of the remote controller 5 is selected in the menu display state, the system CPU section 50 outputs the highlight color and contrast value corresponding after selecting to the highlight color/contrast setter 182 of-the highlight processor section 62C. As a result, the highlight color and contrast of the seledtion item are altered.
In this case, the background of the selection item is displayed by read, and the character of the selection item is displayed by white.
The other example of the menu image will be explained by referring to FIGS. 80A to 80E.
Specifically, when the video data shown by in FIG. 80A and the sub-picture data shown by in FIG. 80B
are supplied, the menu image before selecting is displayed as shown in FIG. 80G so that the characters g of the selection item for "1" and "2" are display with black and the background is displayed gray.
Thereafter, when the selection item of "1" is selected by the key/display section 4 or the remote controller ~, the system CPU 50 sets the X-, Y-coordinatesindicating the rectangular area for the selection item of "1" read from the PCI data and the altered content (highlight information) of the color or contrast of the pixel to the highlight processor section 62C.
As descrikredabove, the sub-picturedata decoded by the decoder 62B of the sub-picture decoder section 62 is altered at the highlight color and contrast value corresponding to the selection item of "1" by the high-light processor 62C, and supplied to the image mixing section 64A in the D/A and data reproducing section 64.
As a result, the video data and the sub-picture data are mixed by the image mixing section 64A, and the mixed image, i.e., the display content of the selection item of "1" of the selection item is altered as shown in FIG. 80D to the menu image, which is displayed on the monitor section 6. For instance, the part of the character of the selection item of "1" is displayed _ ~.~ w.:, ~.~. . .:=.u:. '-'. . ~z:.. __.
~1920~7 with white and the background is displayed with red.
Thereafter, when the selection item of "2" is selected by the key/display section 4 or the remote controller 5, the system CPU 50 sets the X-, Y-coordinates indicating the rectangular area for the selection item of "1" read from the PCI data and the altered content (highlight information) of the color or contrast of the pixel to the highlight processor section 62C.
As described above, the sub-picture data decoded by the decoder 62B of the sub-picture decoder section 62 is altered at the highlight color and contrast value corresponding to the selection item of "1" by the high-light processor 62C, and supplied to the image mixing section-64A in the D/A and data reproducing section 64.
As a result, the video data and the sub-picture data are mixed by the image mixing section 64A, and the mixed image, i.e., the display content of the selection item of "2" of the selection item is altered as shown in FIG. 80E to the menu image, which is displayed on the monitor section 6. For instance, the part of the character of the selection item of "2" is displayed with white and the background is displayed with red.
As described above, various menu screens can be simply altered without reading new video image.
The selection item position information is simply determined at the positional relationship between ........... ,.»an..W..,faw~ -jH'4'-~.... ~ ~ l..r.u.a.3e.w..~,...E~' -'.;
the video and the sub-picture by designating it corresponding to the display coordinate system of the video. ._ .... . .._..__.. _. .._.. ... . _ An embodiment of the relation of the highlight information. as the sub-picture data of the selection item and the control data in FIGS. 81A and 81B.
In the drawings, the pixel surrounded by "O" is formed by using pattern pixel and using the pixel represented by "D" by using the highlight pixel 1.
FIG. 81A shows the case that the pattern pixel of the sub-picture data and highlight pixel used as the shade of the pattern pixel are employed. In this case, after the control data is selected, the display color information is altered real time by setting the color of the highlight pixel 1-to new color and setting the pixel color-and the contrast except it with the present color remained as it is. Thus, the selected selection item is altered to the shade of different color from the other selection item real time.
FIG. 81B shows the case that the sub-picture data is formed only of pattern pixel. In this case, after the highlight information is selected, the display colorinformation is set at the color of the pattern pixel to new color, and setting the pixel and the contrast except the information to the present color as it is. Thus, the selected selection item itself is altered to the color different from the other selection ~e.~... . ta.~
~e'.a °.~.f~:_~ __1''~:.. . .. .d, ..ire. , :,..'ezf .'tr- -%,~-"v.'~ .
_._...., . . .
item.
In addition, the contrast of the background pixel in the selection item area is set-to 100 of the sub-picture data at the time of selecting, and to 0~
at the time of inhibiting to select. Thus, at the time of selecting, the control for varying the entire color of the selection area, and hence various format can be employed real time by using the structure of the sub-picture data and the content of the highlight information.
Eor example, when the above-descried identified cell--classification is a menu, it is not automatically transferred to next cell reproduction, but in the final frame display state at the time of finishing the cell reproduction, it becomes the standby state.
Therefore, when the cell for the menu is reproduced, still picture state is obtained in the cell final display state. Since the HV pack 88 is always inserted at a constant unit of-the video data in the cell, the highlight information of the above-mentioned menu is stored in the data RAM section 56.
The system CPU section 50 becomes a standby state of user vent (key input, etc.,) when the cell repro-duction is finished, the process of the selection item for-the user selection of the menu is executed by referring to the information regarding the menu (highlight information from the PCI data stored in the ,.,-~Ym'.u, . :..ig~,~ iy~,y ~ ~_~.ue yra 2a~~~'.. _::rai:W~.. ..~.... ., - ' 3,.
2~~2~77 r data RAM section 56.
With reference to FIG. 1, a description will now be given of the operation for reproducing movie data from the optical disk 10 which has the logic format illustrated in FIGS. 6 through 66 under the condition that the title, etc. are selected through the above-described menus.
When the playback key 4c on the key/display section 4 or-the playback key 5d on the remote controller 5 is manipulated while the desired title is selected, the system CPU section 50 acquires the last address of the title search pointer table (TT SRPT) 79 from the title search pointer table information (TT SRPTI) 92 and acquires the video title set number (VTSN), program chain cumber (PGCN) and the start address (VTS SA) of the video title set, which correspond to the input number, from the title search pointers (TT SRP) 93 corresponding to the input number from the key/display section 4 or the title number selected by the remote controller-5. When there is only one title set, a single title search pointer (TT SRP) 93 is searched, regardless of the presence of the input number from the key/display section 4 or the selection of the title number by the remote controllex5, to acquire the start address (VTS SA) of that title set. The system CPU
section 50 acquires the target title set from the start address (VTS SA) of the title set.
~, ,~~:_ ,: . ,~ , .r_~ : ... ....:
Next, from the start address (VTS SA) of the video title set 72 of FIG. 13, the video title set information (VTSI) 94 about the title set is obtained as shown in FIG. 20. The end address (VTI MAT EA) of the video title set information management table (VTSI MAT) 98 0~ FIG.21 is acquired from the management table (VTSI MAT) 98 of the video title set information (VTSI) 94. At the same time, each section of the reproducing unit shown in FIG. 1 is set on the basis of the number of audio streams and the number of sub-picture data streams (VTS AST Ns, VTS SPST Ns) and the attribute information on the video, audio, and sub-picture data (VTS, V ATR, VTS A ATR, VTS SPST ATR).
When a menu (VTSM) for a video title set (VTS) has a simple structure, the start address (VTSM VOB SA) of a video object set (VTSM VOB) for menus for a video title set is acquired from the video title set informa-tion management table (VTSI MATS 98 of FIG. 21. On the basis of the video object set (VTSM VOB) 95, a menu for the video title set fs displayed. When an video object set (VTT VOBS) 96 fortitles (VTST) in the title set (VTS) is simply reproduced without selecting a program chain (PGC) with reference to the menu, the video object set 96 is reproduced on the basis of the start address (VTSTT VOB SA) shown in_FIG. 21.
When a program chain is specified from the key/display section 4 or the remote controller 5, the ..y.s .~>=~~~ _ . ,." . ~~.-f. ,....
l07 desired program chain 87 is retrieved in the following procedure. The retrieval of a program chain 87 is not limited to a program chain 87 for titles in the video-title set. The same procedure applies to the retrieval of a program chain 87 for a relatively complex menu made up of program chains 87. The start address of the program chain information table (VTS PGCIT) 100 in the video title set (VTS) of FIG. 21 written in the management table (VTSI MAT) 98 of the video title set information (VTSI) 94 is acquired, and the information (VTS PGCIT I) 102 in the VTS program chain information table 100 of FIG. 24 is read. From the information (VTS PGCIT I)104, the number of program chains (VTS PGC Ns) and-the end-address (VTS PGCIT EA) of the table 100 shown in FIG. 25 are obtained.
When the number of a program chain 87 is specified from the key/display section 4 or the remote controller 5 the category of the program chain 87 and the start address of the VTS PGC information-104 corresponding to the search pointer (UTS PGCIT SRP) 103 shown in FIG. 26 are acquired from the VTS PGCIT search pointer (VTS PGCIT SRP) 103 corresponding tothe- number shown in FIG. 24. On the basis of the start address (VTS PGCI $A), the program chain general information (PGC GI) of-FIG. 27- isread out.- According to the general information (PGC GI) 105, the category and playback time of the program chain (PGC) (PGC CAT, w~ >,,~..- e' _ :,:.rte ~,.....: , . _=
'~2~ 92077 PGC PB TIME)are obtained-and further the start addresses (C PBIT SA, C POSIT SA) of the cell playback information table (C-PBIT) and cell position information table (C POSIT) 108, contained in the general information (PGC GI)-are acquired. From the start address (C PBIT SA), the video object identifier (C VOB IDN) and cell identifier=(C IDN) of FIG. 36 are acquired as the cell position information (C POSI) of FIG. 35 Furthermore, from the start address (C POSIT SA), the cell playback information (C PBI) of FIG. 33 is obtained. The start address (C FVOBU SA) of the first VOBU 85 and the start address (C IVOBU SA) of the last VOBU in the cell of FIG. 34 contained in the playback information (C PBI)-are acquired.- Then, the target cell is retrieved. In the playback of cells, referring to the program map of FIG. 31-in the PGC program map (PGC PGMAP)--106 of-FIG.27,-playback cells 84 are determined one after another. The data cells of program chains thus determined are read one after another from the video object 144 and inputted to the data RAM section 56 via the system processor section 54.
The data cells 84, on the basis of the playback time information, are supplied to the video decoder section 58, audio decoder section 60, and sub-picture decoder section 62, which decode them. The decoded signals are subjected to signal conversion at the D/A and _. .~
.v.. u. . ::-'.'-5. f...~""tk ?.~dt a .'F. .,.N1=~s a*Nrt .. 3., 5'kf:iif. , ::<6i: :: .
data-reproducing section 64 and an image is reproduced at the monitor.section 6 and at the same time, sound is reproduced at the speaker sections 8.
Furthermore, a normal playback and high-speed search of the video data using a navigation pack 86 will be described in detail with reference to a flowchart.
In a normal playback of video data, when a normal playback is started as shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, after the start-up at step 511, the video manager information (VMGI) 75, as eacplained earlier is retrieved by the system CPU section 50 and stored in-the system ROM/RAM
section 52. On the basis of the video manger information (VMGI) 75, the video title set information (VTSI) 94 on the video title set (VTS) 72 is read and simultaneously the video title set menu is displayed on the monitor section 6, as mentioned above, using the video object set (VYTSM VOBS)95. On-the basis of the display, as shown in step 513, the user selects a title set 72 to be reproduced and playback conditions. When the decided title 72 is selected using the key/display section 4 or the remote controller 5, as shown in step S14, the data in the cell playback information table (C PBIT) 107 of FIGS. 17, 21, and 22 is read by the system CPU section 50 from the program chain information table (VTS PGCIT) 100 of FIG. 12 in the selected title set 72. The read-out data is stored . :: _..:.... ~._. s._~~~~ .~ : ~ . :~ . . : .x ...... ., alo ~in the system ROM/RAM section 52. According to the playback conditions, the system CPU section 50 determines,a program chain number (VTS PGC Ns), angle number (ANGNs), audio stream number, and sub-picture stream number using the aforementioned menus.
For example, the eleventh boxing match for a world championship is selected as a title for a program chain and it is determined that Japanese subtitles are displayed as sub-pictures with English narration.
The user selects an angle so that a match between the champion and the opponent may be viewed impressively.
The determined sub-picture number and audio stream number are set in the register of the system processor section 54 as shown in step 516. Similarly, the playback start time is set in the system time clock in each of the system processor section 54, video decoder 58, audio decoder 60, and sup-picture decoder 62.
The start address of the first VOBU in a cell and PGC
number, or cell number, are stored in the system ROM/RAM section 52.
As shown in step 517, at the time when a preparation to read a video title set has been made, the system CPU section 50 gives,a read command to the disk drive section 30, which searches the optical disk 10 on the basis of the above start address and PGC
number. By the read command, the cells 84 related to the specified program chain (PGC) are read one after .,_~. .._.~:,. :. . __.~,.: ~ :. a~; . . >.;,~_,. , , ... .
another from the optical disk 10, and are transferred to the data RAM section 56 via the system CPU section 50 and system processing section 54. The transferred cell data includes a navigation pack 86 which is, as shown in FIG. 8, the head pack of the video object unit (VOBU) 85. The navigation pack 86 is stored into the data RAM 56. Thereafter, the video pack 88, audio pack 91, and sub-picture pack 90 in the video object unit (VOBU) are distributed to the video decoder section 58, audio decoder section 60, and sub-picture decoder section 62, respectively. The individual decoders decode the packs and supply the resulting signals to the D/A and data-reproducing section 64. As a result, a video signal is sent to the monitor 6 and an audio I5 signal is transmitted to the speaker 8, thereby starting the display of images with sub-pictures.
At the same time, the reproduction of sound is started.
If a key input is supplied from the key/display section 4 or the remote controller 5 during the video and audio reproduction, the key data acquired is stored into the system RAM/ROM section 52. If there is no key input from the section 4, it is determined in step S19 whether or not a play-back end message has been supplied from the drive section 30. If the message has been supplied, it is determined whether or not a navigation pack 86 has been transferred to the system ROM/RAM section 52. If the navigation pack 86 has been .~ ~.,.~.._..
transferred to the section 52, the logical sector number (NV PCK LSN) in the navigation pack 86 is stored as current logical block number (NOWLBN) into the system RAM/ROM-section 52 in steg 20.
After--the NV pack has been transferred, it is determined whether the NV pack is the last one in the cell 84. More precisely, in step S22 it is determined whether or not the NV pack is the last navigation pack 86 in the cell 84. This is effected by comparing the start address (C LVOBU SA) of the cell playback table (C PBI) 107 with the address (V_PCK LBN) of the navigation.pack 86. If the NV 86 is not the last one in the cell 84, control will return to step 518.
If the NV pack 86 is the last one in the cell-84, control goes to step 523. In step 523 it is verified whether there is an angle change. An angle change is judged on-the basis of whetheran angle change is inputted from the key/display section 4 or the remote controller 5 to the system CPU section 50. If there is no angle change, as shown in step 524, it will be verified whether it is the end cell of the program chain (PGC) to which the cell 84 belongs. The verification is effected on the basis of whether the cell 84 shown in FIGS. 27 and 33 is the end cell in the cell playback information table (C PBIT) 107. Namely, the verification is achieved on the basis of the number of cells 84 constituting the program chain and the :. :. ,",..:_.~. ~-= "_.~:.~.:..~ ~_ .._~-.: .,: .,~.: .n- , i ,:
~~9~~77 identification number of the reproduced cell. If the cell does not correspond to the end cell-of the program chain (PGC), control will be returned to step 519.
If the cell 84 is the end cell of the program chain-(PGC), it will be determined that the program chain has finished and the next, program chain (PGC) will be specified. Except for special cases, the program chains are reproduced in the sequence of their numbers, so that adding 1 to the number of the program chain that has been reproduced enables the number of a program chain to be reproduced next to be set.
Whether there is a program chain whose program number is the set program chain number is verified at step 526. If there is no program chain to be reproduced next, control will be passed to-the flow for the playback end procedure shown in FIG. 84 explained later. If the set program chain is present, as shown in step 527, the address of the cell in the program chain that has been set again, that is, the start address (C FVOBU SA) of C FVOBU.in-the cell playback information (C PBI) 107 of FIG.- 34 is obtained as the present logical block number. As shown in step 528, it is verified whether the start address (C FVOBU SA) is equal to the address obtained by adding 1 to the end address (ENDLBN) of the cell 84 in the preceding program chain already reproduced. If they are equal to each other, this means the playback of cells having consecutive--addresses and control will return to step 519. If those addresses are not equal, this means that addresses of the cells are-not consecutive. In this case in step 529, the system CPU section 50 issues a,read end address command and temporarily stops the reading operation of the disk drive section 30. The read end address command designates the end address of the current video object unit. Thereafter, in step 530, the system CPU section 50 gives a consecutive read command again to the disk drive section 30. Then, control return to step 518, thereby starting the retrieval of a navigation pack 86.
if a key input is supplied from the key/display section 4 or the remote controller 5 at step 519, it will be confirmed in step S31 whether the key input is for fast-forward (FF), for--example. If it is for fast-forward (FF), a high-speed searching process will be executed in step 532. If it is not for fast-forward, another process, or a process related to a series of video playback, such as a pause in playback or the change of audio streams, will be carried out at step S9. Then, control returns to step 519.
If the end of playback has, been specified in step 519, or if there is no program chain to be reproduced next in step 526, the end PTS (VOBU EPTS) contained in the PCI general information (PCI GI)-is referred to in step S31 (FIG. 64). When the end PTS (VOBU EPTS) ,' ~s,.
.~.~~'~.a...~K z:..n .4a ~ .a. ~,1 ,..,..
coincides with the system time clock (STC), the monitor 6 will stop-displaying on the screen as shown in step 532, then the system CPU will supply a data transfer stop command to the disk drive section 30, which thereby stops the data transfer-as shown in step 533, terminating the playback operation.
zf an angle change input is supplied from the key/display section 4 or the remote controller 5 in step 523, it will be checked whether there is angle data as shown in step S40 of FIG. 65. The presence/
absence of angle has been gives as angle information (NSML AGLI,,SML AGLI). to both of, the-.PCIdata 113 and DSI data 115 in the navigation pack 86. If there is no angle to be, changed in step 540, the message that there is no angle data will be displayed on the key/display section 4 or the remote controller 5 or the monitor 6 as shown in step 541. After the message for no angle data is displayed, control goes to step 524. If there is angle data, as shown in step 542, an angle number to be changed-will be specified.from the key/display section 4 or the remote controller 5. In this case, as explained earlier, it will be specified which of the angle information in the PCI data and the DSI data (NSML AGLI,.SMh AGLI) is used to change the angle.
When only one type of angle information is available, the selection is limited to the one type. If an angle-number is specified, the target addresses ~ .~ ,y r a . ~ x 1.. .. _ ~,~=~ r _ _~. x =;~~, ~ =- ~ .~" ~-c- ...H.s~~..
. 2192077 (NSML AGL C DSTA, SML AGL DSTA)- of-the angle cell corresponding to the specified angle number as shown in FIGS. 47 and 48 will be acquired at step 543. By this address, a cell is searched for. The address is set for the logical block number (NOWLBN) to be searched for. With the angle change operation using the PCI
data, the system CPU section 50 performs a muting process on the playback of video and audio data and also effects a pause process on the playback of sub-pictures. -These processes stop the system time clock (STC) in each section of the reproducing system and make it possible to take in the angle data already changed by clearing the buffers in the video, audio, and sub-picture decoders 58, 60, and 62. At the same time, at shown in step 545, the system CPU section 50 issues a read end address command and temporarily prevents the disk drive section 30 from reading the data. Thereafter, as shown in step 546, the CPU
section 50 supplies a read command to the disk drive section 30. Then, the selected cell is searched for by the set retrieval logical block number, or by the start address of the cell, the cell data is retrieved consecutively. The transfer of the data in the selected angle cell is ten started.
After..the transfer has been started, it is checked again, in step S47 whether a playback end has been specified and control waits for-the transfer of the ~i92G77 navigation pack of the first cell associated with the changed angle. As shown in step S4B, it is checked whether a navigation pack has been transferred as a result of the data transfer. ,If no navigation pack has been transferred, control will be returned to step 547. If a navigation pack has been transferred, each system time clock (STC) will be set with reference to the SCR in the NV pack (NV PCK SCR) contained in the DSI general information (DSIG) in the navigation pack 86. Thereafter, the video and audio muting state and the pause state of sub-pictures are canceled at step S44 and then the system time clock (STC) starts.
Then, step S21 of FIG. 82 is executed as in a normal playback.
Next, the video data in the logic formats shown in FIGS. 6 to 66, a method of recording data on the optical disk 10 to reproduce the video data, and a recording system to which the.recording method is applied will be explained with reference to FIGS. 86 to 91.
FIG. 86 shows an encoder system that creates a video file of a title set 84 in which the video data including menu data is encoded. In the system of FIG. 86, for example, a videotape recorder (VTR) 201, an audiotape recorder (ATR) 202, and a sub-picture source 203 are used as sources of the video data, the audio data, and the sup-picture data. Under the -.uu,.f .x.-,a _ ~ .,.~...N~ .~~,-a.-~~ : , .. , ...
ii8 control of a system controller (Sys con) 205, they create the. video data, audio data, and sup-picture data, which are supplied to a video encoder (VENC) 206, an audio encoder (AENC) 207, and a sub-picture encoder (SPENC) 208_, respectively. Under the control of the system controller (Sys con) 205, these encoders 206, 207, and 208 perform A/D conversion of the video data, audio data, and sup-picture data and encode them by the respective compression schemes. The encoded video data, audio data, and sub-picture data (Comp Video, Comp Audio, Comp Sub-pict) are stored in memories 210, 211, and 212. The video data, audio data, and sub-picture data (Comp Video, Comp Audio, Comp Sub-pict) are outputted to a file formatter (FFMT) 214 under the control of. the system controller (Sys con) 205, which converts them so that they may have a file structure of video data for the system as explained earlier. Then, under the control of the system controller (Sys con) 205, management information, such as the setting conditions for each data item, the athributes, the highlight information and data for preparing menu data are stored-in a memory 216 in the form of files.
Explained next will be a standard flow of an encoding process in the system controller (Sys con) 205 that creates a file from video data.
According to the flow of FIG. 87, the video data and the audio data are encoded and the encoded .. . -~,x..~!~u. .~r~.~;.,M-,, ~.-.A,.....~..~:_s~.,aa:~~~..:
aow:......_~,._w. ..
~i92077 video data and audio data (Comp Video, Comp Audio) are supplied. Specifically, when the encoding process is started, as shown in step S70 of FIG. 87, the parameters necessary for encoding the video data and audio data are set. Part of the set parameters are stored.in the system controller (Sys con) 205 and at the same time, are used at the file formatter (FFMT) 214. As shown in step 5271, the video data is pre-encoded using the parameters and the optimum distribution of the amount of codes is calculated.
Then, on the basis of the code amount distribution obtained in the pre-encoding, the video data is encoded as shown in step 5272. At the same time, the audio data is also encoded at step 5272. As shown in step in 5273, if necessary, the video data is partially encoded again and the reencoded portion of the video data is replaced with the old one.
Through the series of steps, the video data and audio data are encoded. Furthermore, as shown in steps 5274 and 5275, the sub-picture data is encoded and the encoded sub-picture data (Comp Sub-pict) is supplied.
Namely, the parameters necessary for encoding the sub-picture data is set. As shown in step 5274, part of the parameters are stored in the system controller (Sys con) 205 and used in the file formatter (FFMT) 214.
On the basis of the parameters, the sub-picture data is encoded. By the process, the sup-picture data is ~a .. ,.. .. A -'ai _f~d~9. .'_ ~. i. _,."m ~ k :.fP-'. w. .. ,.
12~
encoded. -According to the flow of FIG. 88, the encoded video data, audio data, and sup-picture data (Com Video, Com.Audio, Comp Sub-pict) are combined and converted so as to form a video data title set structure as explained in FIG. 6. Specifically, as shown in step 5276, a cell is set as the smallest unit of the video data and cell playback information on a cell (C PBI) is created. Then, as shown in step 5277, the structure of the cells constituting a program chain and the video, sub-picture, and audio attributes (the information obtained in encoding the respective data items are used part of these attributes) are set and the video title set information management table -- information (VTSI MAT) 98 containing information on n program chain and a video title set time search map table (VTS TMAPT) 101 are created in FIG. 12. At this time, as the need arises, a video title set part of title search pointer table (VTS PTT SRPT) is also created. The encoded video data, audio data, and sup-picture data (Com Video, Comp Audio, Comp Sup-pict) are subdivided intospecific packs. An NV pack is placed at the head of each VOBU unit so that playback can be effected in the order of time code of each data item.
With the NV packs arranged this way, each data cell is positioned so that a video object (VOB) may be composed of a plurality of cells as shown in FIG. 6. A set of _. .... ..:~.~ _. ,.
~~~~077 such video-objects is formatted into the title set structure.
In the flow of FIG. 88, the program chain information (PGI) is obtained in the process of step 5277 by using the database in the system controller (Sys con) 205 or entering data again as the need arises.
FIG. 89 shows a disk formatter system that records on an optical disk the title set formatted as described above.In-the disk formatter system of FIG. 89, the memories 220, 222 in which the created title set is stored supply these file data items to a volume formatter (VFMT) 226. In the volume formatter (VFMT) 226 extracts the management information from the title sets 84, 86, produces a video manager 71, and create the logic data to be recorded on the disk 10 in the arrangement of FIG. 6. A disk formatter (DFMT) 228 adds error correction data to the logic data created at the volume formatter (VFMT) 226, thereby reconverting the logic data into physical data to be recorded on the disk. A modulator 230 converts the physical data created at the disk formatter (DFMT) 228 into the recording data to be recorded actually on the disk.
Then, a recorder 232 records the modulated recording data on the disk 10.
A standard flow for creating the aforementioned disk will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 _ s.
.. - a ~ :~,~.-.~:~... _~ _ ~' _ n~::r ~_w.,., ~ ,..t~..~.,- f " :.,......
and 91. FIG. 90 shows the flow for creating the logic data to be recorded on the disk 10. Specifically, as shown in step 5280, parameter data items, including the number of video data files, their arrangement, and the size of each video data file, are set first. Next, in step 5281 video manger 71 is generated from the parameters set and the video title set information 281 of each video title set 72. In step 5282, the video manager 71 and the video tile set 71 are arranged in the order mentioned, according to their logic block numbers, thereby generating logic data which is to be recorded on the disk 10.
Thereafter, the flow for creating the physical data to be recorded on the disk as shown in FIG. 91 is exacuted. Specifically, as shown in step 5283, the logic data is divided into units of a specific number of bytes, thereby forming error correction data. Next, as shown in step 5284, the logic data divided into units of a specific number of bytes are combined with the created error correction data to form physical sectors. Thereafter, as shown in step 5285, physical data is created by combining physical sectors.
In this way, the modulating process based on certain rules is performed on the physical data created in the flow of FIG. 91, thereby forming the recording data. Thereafter, the recording data is recorded on the disk 10.
.. - :,-:--.s. .'.;t,~~_. t_x.xl:.ia_.~.. "F~'-..~::~~', ».-~:=.'. .., , :~.6ue<s.~sz:<~...:, .u;.s.~- ~...-. '.
~~~2G77 The above-described data structure can be applied not only to a case where the data is recorded on recording mediums, such as optical disks, and then the disks are distributed to the users, but also to a communication system as shown inFIG. 92.
Specifically, according to the procedure shown in FIGS. 86 to 89, an optical disk 10 in which a video manager 71 and video title.set 72 as shown in FIG. 6 may be loaded unto a reproducing unit 300, from whose system CPUsection 50 the encoded data istaken out digitally and transmitted by a modulator/transmitter 310 to the users or the cable subscribers by radio or via a cable. Furthermore, the encoding system 320 shown in FIGS. 86 and 89 may create the data encoded on the provider side, such as a broadcasting station and the encoded data may be transmitted by the modulator/transmitter 310 to the users or the cable subscribers by radio or via a cable. In such a communication system, the information in the video manager 71 is modulated at the modulator/transmitter 310 and then supplied to or is directly supplied to the users free of charge. When a user is interested in the title, the modulator/transmitter 310 transmits the title set 72 at the user's or subscriber's request by radio or via a cable. Under the control of the video manager 71, the video title set information 94 is first transferred and then the title video object 95 in the ~s F
....". ..o- -ae..~ "'~ '~'::.e~:c,3v~W. '_ :.~uas.oLa.WSit7:Xt~'!~~~ ._..v .... . r , ..". ..
video title set reproduced according to the title set information 94 is transferred. .At this time, if necessary, the video title set menu video object 95 is also transmitted. The transferred data is received by a receiver/demodulator 400 on-the user side and is processed as encoded data at the system CPU section 50 of the reproducing unit on the user or subscriber side of FIG. 1 in the same manner as in the above-described reproducing process, whereby the video data is reproduced.-Industrial Applicability In transferring the video .title set 72, the video object sets 95, 96 are transferred using the video object unit 85 of FIG. 6 as a unit. At the head of the video object unit 85, an NV pack 86 containing video playback and search information is arranged.
Furthermore, because the NV pack contains the addresses of the video object units to be reproduced immediately before and after the video object unit 85 to which the NV pack 86 belongs, even if the video object unit 85 is lost during transfer for some reason, the video object can be reproduced reliably on the user side by requesting the lost video object unit 85 to be transmitted again. Furthermore, even if transfer is not carried out in the order of-playback of video object units, because the system ROM/RAM section 52 on the user side holds the accurate playback information on program chains, the system CPU section 50 can specify the order of playback referring to the address data in its NV pack.
Additional advantages and modifications will readily occur to those skilled in the art. Therefore, the invention in its broader aspects is not limited to the specific details, representative devices, and illustrated examples shown and described herein.
Accordingly, various modifications may be made without departing from the spirit or scope of the general inventive concept as defined by the appended claims and their equivalents.
.. _.. ,.: ~ ~:.-._.~ .::..taaa ,r,;::- ~..... v.... ...~-,;.= , .
.,~...~.,.., ...:.
The present invention also provides a reproducing apparatus in which various menus can be easily' formed by altering highlight information corresponding to the selection item or action item of sub-picture image, namely the color and the contrast of the character according to the video data as the background image of the menu and the sub-picture data of the selection item or action item of the menu.
Accordingly, the present invention provides an encoding method for encoding data to be recorded in an information recording medium, said recording medium having a data recording area for recording a video manager and at least one video title set, said video manager having data for controlling said video title set and said video title set containing video data, audio data, and sub-picture data, said encoding method comprising:
receiving said video data, said audio data, and said sub-picture data;
encoding said video data, said audio data, and said sub-picture data;
dividing contents of said encoded video, audio, and sub-picture data into corresponding one or more video packs, one or more audio packs, and one or more sub-picture packs;
arranging said video packs, audio packs, and sub-picture packs and appending a navigation pack to define a video object unit, wherein said navigation pack includes playback control data and is disposed at a beginning position within said video object unit;
arranging a plurality of said video object units to define each of a plurality of video object sets;
arranging a plurality of said video object sets to define said video title set;
wherein at least one of said video manager and said video title set contains menu information, said menu information including a menu background image, at least one 5 menu selection item image for indicating a selection of a menu item, and at least one menu status button for indicating a status of a selection;
wherein said playback control data includes highlight information for highlighting said menu status button;
wherein said highlight information contains highlight general information describing attributes of said highlight information including a highlight start time during a presentation period of said video object unit, number of numerical selection button information, forcedly selected button number information at said highlight start time, and forcedly activated button number information at an end time of a button selection, said highlight information also containing a menu status button color information table describing color attributes of said menu status button and a menu status button information table having menu status button information; and wherein said menu status button information includes, status button position information for indicating a position corresponding to said menu status button adjacent status button information for describing a direction of a next selection for said menu status button, and status button command for describing a status command to be executed when said menu status button is activated to reproduce a title which is designated according to said status button command.
The present invention also provides a reproducing apparatus for reproducing menu information from a recording medium, where the recording medium includes plural data units which are reproduced in sequence, the data units each being reproduced within a predetermined period of time, each data unit including a data pack array and a control pack, each of the data pack arrays including multiple data 5a packs, the data packs comprising reproduction data including at least one of video data and sub-picture data, at least one menu information formed from the reproduction data being used for confirming contents of the video data and for selecting from among the video data, the menu information including a background image recorded as the video data and either a selection item or an action item represented by the sub-picture data, the control pack being positioned before the data pack array within each data unit so as to control reproduction of the reproduction data, the control pack recording control data for controlling the selection item or the action item, the reproducing apparatus comprising:
a reader for reading reproduction data from a data pack array and control data from a control pack;
a first extractor for extracting video data from the reproduction data read by the reader;
a second extractor for extracting sub-picture data from the reproduction data read by the reader;
a third extractor for extracting a status button color information table from the control data, said status button color information table having entries corresponding to one or more status buttons in said sub-picture;
a fourth extractor for extracting a status button information table from the control data, said status button information table having entries corresponding to said status button in said sub-picture, wherein said status button information table includes status button information, and said status button information includes (a) status button position information for indicating a position of the corresponding status button in a menu, (b) adjacent status button information for describing a direction of a next selection for a status button which is in the user selection status, and (c) a status button command for describing a status command to be executed when the status button in the user selection is activated;
a fifth extractor for extracting from the control data the status button position information;
5b a sixth extractor for extracting from the control data the adjacent status button information;
a seventh extractor for extracting from the control data a status button command;
a decoding circuit for decoding the sub-picture data extracted by the second extractor based on the control data read by the reader from the control pack; and a synthesizing device for generating reproduced menu information by synthesizing the sub-picture data decoded by the decoding circuit with the video data extracted by the first extractor.
The present invention also provides a reproducing method for reproducing menu information from a recording medium, where the recording medium includes plural data units which are reproduced in sequence, the data units each being reproduced within a predetermined period of time, each data unit including a data pack array and a control pack, each of the data pack arrays including multiple data packs, the data packs comprising reproduction data including at least one of video data and sub-picture data, at least one menu information formed from the video data and the sub-picture data being used for confirming contents of the video data and for selecting from among the video data, the menu information including a background image recorded as the video data and either a selection item or an action item represented by the sub-picture data, the control pack being positioned before the data pack array within each data unit so as to control data for controlling the selection item or the action item, the reproducing method comprising:
reading reproduction data from a data pack array and control data from a control pack;
extracting video data from the reproduction data read from the data pack array;
extracting sub-picture data from the reproduction data read from the data pack array;
extracting a status button color information table from the control data, said status button color information 5c table having entries corresponding to one or more status buttons in said sub-picture;
extracting a status button information table from the control data, said status button information table having entries corresponding to said status buttons in said sub picture, wherein said status button information table includes status button information, and said status button information includes (a) status button position information for indicating a position of the corresponding status button in a menu, (b) adjacent status button information for describing a direction of a next selection for a status button which is in the user selection status, and (c) a status button command for describing a status command to be executed when the status button in the user selection status is activated;
extracting from the control data the status button position information;
extracting from the control data the adjacent status button information;
extracting from the control data a status button command;
updating the sub-picture data extracted based on the control data read from the control pack; and generating reproduced menu information by synthesizing the sub-picture data updated with the video data extracted.
In a still further aspect, the present invention provides a reproducing method for reproducing menu information from a recording medium, where the recording medium includes plural data units which are reproduced in sequence, the data units each being reproduced within a predetermined period of time, each data unit including a data pack array and a control pack, each of the data pack arrays including multiple data packs, the data packs comprising reproduction data including at least one of compressed video data and sub-picture data, at least one menu information formed from the video data and the sub-picture data being used for confirming contents of the video data and for selecting from among the video data, the 5d menu information including a background image recorded as the video data and either a selection item or an action item represented by the sub-picture data, the control pack being positioned before the data pack array within each data unit so as to control data for controlling the selection item or the action item, the reproducing method comprising:
reading reproduction data from a data pack array and control data from a control pack;
extracting video data from the reproduction data read from the data pack array;
extracting sub-picture data from the reproduction data read from the data pack array;
extracting a status button color information table from the control data, said status button color information table having entries corresponding to one or more status buttons in said sub-picture;
extracting a status button information table from the control data, said status button information table having entries corresponding to said status buttons in said sub picture, wherein said status button information table includes status button information, and said status button information includes (a) status button position information for indicating a position of the corresponding status button in a menu, (b) adjacent status button information for describing a direction of a next selection for a status button which is in the user selection status, and (c) a status button command for describing a status command to be executed when the status button in the user selection status is activated;
extracting from the control data the status button position information;
extracting from the control data the adjacent status button information;
extracting from the control data a status button command;
updating the sub-picture data extracted based on the control data read from the control pack; and 5e generating reproduced menu information by synthesizing the sub-picture data updated with the video data extracted.
The present invention also provides an information medium for recording data units each of which has to be played back within a given period of time, said data unit including a navigation data pack at a leading position of the data unit, and a video data pack as well as sub-picture pack arranged after said navigation data pack;
wherein each of said video data pack and sub-picture data pack includes a pack header and data packet, said video data packet includes data of a video stream according to MPEG specification, and said sub-picture data pack includes pixel data being subjected to a run-length compression;
wherein said navigation data pack includes a pack header, a first data packet, and a second data packet, said first data packet includes highlight information for highlighting a rectangular area within a sub-picture display area, and said second data packet includes data search information for searching data of said data unit;
wherein said data unit includes menu information including a background image and selection item, said background image being contained in video data of the video data packets, and said selection item being contained in sub-picture data of the sub-picture packets, and wherein said highlight information int he navigation data pack comprises:
a number of button groups each said button group representing a particular rectangular area in which a user selection item is displayed by the sub-picture data of said menu information;
a display type of the sub-picture data of each said button group;
button color information including a mixing rate of the video data with respect to the sub-picture data when the button of each said button group is selected, and including another mixing rate of the video data with respect to the sub-picture data within the button when the 5f button is selected; and button position information representing a position of each button of said button groups.
In a still further aspect, the present invention provides an apparatus for reproducing recorded contents of an information medium for recording data units each of which has to be played back within a given period of time, said data unit including a navigation data pack at a leading position of the data unit, and a video data pack as well as sub-picture pack arranged after said navigation data pack;
wherein each of said video data pack and sub-picture data pack includes a pack header and data packet, said video data packet includes data of a video stream according to MPEG specification, and said sub-picture data pack includes pixel data being subjected to a run-length compression;
wherein said navigation data pack includes a pack header, a first data packet, and a second data packet, said first data packet includes highlight information for highlighting a rectangular area within a sub-picture display area, and said second data packet includes data search information for searching data of said data unit;
wherein said data unit includes menu information including a background image and selection item, said background image being contained in video data of the video data packets, and said selection item being contained in sub-picture data of the sub-picture packets, and wherein said highlight information in the navigation data pack comprises:
a number of button groups, each said button group representing a particular rectangular area in which a user selection item is displayed by the sub-picture data of said menu information;
a display type of the sub-picture data of each said button group;
button color information including a mixing rate of the video data with respect to the sub-picture data when 5g the button of each said button group is selected, and including another mixing rate of the video data with respect to the sub-picture data within the button when the button is selected; and button position information representing a position of each button of said button groups;
said reproducing apparatus comprising:
means for reading packs from the information medium in unit of a series of the data packs;
discriminating means, which receives the pack read by said reading means, for discriminating data next to the pack header contained in the received pack to determine whether the received pack includes the navigation data pack, video data pack, or sub-picture data pack;
detecting means, when said discriminating means determines that the received pack includes the navigation data pack, for detecting highlight information of playback control information contained in the data packet of the navigation pack;
means for decoding data of the video data pack and sub-picture data pack respectively determined by said discriminating means; and means, responsive to the button position information and button color information of the highlight information detected by said detecting means, for changing a color or contrast of the button in the rectangular display area of pixel data contained in the data packet of the sub-picture data pack determined by said discriminating means.
Brief Description of the Drawings Fig. 1 is a schematic block diagram of an optical disk apparatus according to an embodiment of the present invention;
Fig. 2 is a detailed block diagram of the mechanical section of the disk drive unit of Fig. 1;
Fig. 3 is a schematic perspective view of the structure of an optical disk loaded in the disk drive unit of Fig. 1;
Fig. 4 is a schematic diagram of a key/display section 5h in Fig. 1;
Fig. 5 is a schematic diagram of a remote controller in Fig. 1;
Fig. 6 shows the structure of the logic format of the optical disk of Fig. 5;
Fig. 7 shows the structure of the video manager of Fig. 6;
Fig. 8 shows an example of the structure of the video object set (VOBS) shown in Fig. 7;
Fig. 9 is a diagram to help explain the structure of the video object unit of Fig. 8;
Fig. 10 shows the parameters and contents of the volume manger information management table (VMGI-MAT) in the video manager (AMGI) of FIG. 7;
FIG. 11 shows the structure of the title search pointer table (TT SRPT) in the video manager (VMGI) of FIG. 7;
FIG. 12 shows the parameters and contents of the title search pointer table information (TT SRPTI) in the title search pointer table (TT SRPT) of FIG. 11;
FIG. 13 shows the parameters and contents of the title search pointer (TT SRP) corresponding to the input number in the title search pointer table (TT-SRPT) of FIG. 11;
FIG. 14 depicts the structure of a video manager menu PGCI unit table (VMGM PGCI UT) shown in FIG. 7;
FIG. 15 illustrates the parameters and contents of video manager menu PGCI unit table information (VMGM PGCI UTI) in FIG. 14;
FIG. 16 illustrates the parameters and contents of a video manager menu PGCI unit search pointer (VMGM LU SRP) in FIG. 14;
FIG. 17 shows the structure of video manager menu language unit (VMGM LU) in FIG. 14;
FIG. 18 depicts the parameters and contents of video-manager menu language unit information (VMGM LUI);
FIG. 19 illustrates the parameters and contents of video manager menu PGC information search pointer (VMGM PGCI SRP);
2~92~77 FIG. 20 illustrates the structure of the video title.set of FIG. 6;
FIG. 21- shows the parameters and contents of the video title set information management table (VTSI MAT) of the video- title set information (VTSI) of FIG. 20;
FIG. 22 illustrates the contents of the attribute (VTS ATS_ATR) of an audio stream of a video title set (VTS) in FIG. 6;
FIG. 23 illustrates the contents of the sub-picture stream attribute (VTS SPST ATR) of the video title set (VTS) in FIG. 6;
FIG. 24 illustrates the structure of the video title set program chain information table (VTS PGCIT) of the video title set (VTS) of FIG. 20;
FIG. 25 shows the parameters and contents of the information (VTS PGCIT I) in the video title set program chain information table (VTS PGCIT) of FIG. 24;
FIG. 26 shows the parameters and contents of the search pointer (VTS PGCIT SRP) corresponding to the program chain in the video title set program chain information table (VTS PGCIT) of FIG. 24;
FIG. 27 illustrates the structure of the program chain information (VTS PGCI) in-the video set corresponding to the program chain in the video title set program chain information table (VTS PGCIT) of FIG. 24;
FIG. 28 shows the parameters and contents of the 21.92077 program chain general information (PGC GI)in the program chain information (VTS PGCI) of FIG. 27;
FIG. 29 shows the structure of a category (PGC CAT) of a program chain (PGC) of general information (PGC GI) of the program chain in FIG. 28;
FIG. 30 shows the structure of the contents (PGC CNT) of the general information (PGC GI) of the program chain in FIG. 28;
FIG. 31 illustrates the structure of a program chain map (PGC PGMAP) of the program chain information (VTS PGCI) of FIG.27;
FIG. 32 shows the parameters and contents of the entry cell numbers (ECELLN) corresponding to the programs written in the program chain map (PGC PGMAP) of FIG. 31;
FIG. 33 illustrate the structure of the cell playback information table (C PBIT)of the program chain information (VTS PGCI) of FIG. 27;
FIG. 34 shows the parameters and contents of the cell playback information (C PBI) of FIG. 33;
FIG. 35 illustrates the structure of the cell position information (C POSI) in the program chain information (VTS PGCI) of FIG. 28;
FIG. 36 shows the parameters and contents of the cell position information (C POSI)- of FIG. 35;
FIG. 37 shows the structure of a video title set menu PGCI unit table (VTSM PGCI-UT) in FIG. 20;
~1924~ 7 FIG. 38 depicts the structure of video title set menu PGCI unit table information (VTSM PGCI UTI) in FIG. 37;
FIG. 39 shows the structure of a video title set menu PGCI unit search pointer (VTSM LU SRP) in FIG. 37;
FIG. 40 illustrates the structure of a video title set menu language unit (VTSM LU)in FIG.-37;
FIG. 41 illustrates the structure of video title set menu language unit information (VTSM LUI) in FIG. 37;
FIG. 42 illustrates the parameters and contents of a video title set menu PGC info~tation search pointer (VTSM PGCI SRP);
FIG. 43 illustrates the structure of the navigation pack of FIG. 8;
FIG. 44 illustrates the structure of the video pack, audio pack, sub-picture pack, or VBI pack of FIG. 8;
FIG. 45 shows the parameters and contents of the playback control information (PCI) in the navigation pack of FIG. 43;
FIG. 46 shows the parameters and contents of the general information (PCI GI) inthe playback control information (PCI) of FIG. 45;
FIG. 47 shows the parameters and contents of the angle information (NSML AGLI) in the playback control information (PCI) of FIG. 45;
FIG. 48 is a diagram to help explain how to change 2I ~2fl17 the angle using the angle information (NSML AGLI) in the playback control information (PCI) of FIG. 47;
FIG. 49 is a view showing a valid period of high-light information of each sub-picture stream for a 5 reproducing period of one sub-picture image unit;
FIG. SO is a view for explaining a video image, a sub-picture and highlight information and mixing image mixed with them;
FIG. 51 illustrates parameter and content of the 10 highlight information (HLI) in reproduction control information (PCI) shown in FIG. 45;
FIG. 52 is a view for explaining content of high-light information (HLI) shown in FIG. 51;
FIG. 53 illustrates parameter and content of high-light generating information (HL GI) in highlight information (HLI) shown in FIG. 51;
FIG. 54 is a view showing a configuration of a button color information table (BTN COLIT) in highlight information (HLI) shown in FIG. 51;
FIG. 55 is a view showing the detail of descrip-tion content of selection color information (SL COLI) shown in FIG. 54;
FIG. 56 is a view showing the detail of description content of definite color information (AC COLI) shown in FIG. 54;
FIG. 57 is a view showing the detail of description content of button information table (BTNIT) .a __ in highlight information (HLI) shown in FIG. 51;
FIG. 58 is a view showing the detail of description content of button position information (BTN POSI) in button information (BGNI) shown in FIG. 57;
FIG. 59. shows the parameters and-contents of the disk search information (DSI) in the navigation pack of FIG. 45;
FIG. 60 shows the parameters and contents of the DSI general information (DSI GI)in the disk search informationof FIG. 59;
FIG. 61-shows the parameters and contents of the angle information (SML AGLI) in_the disk search information of FIG. 59;
FIG. 62 is a diagram to help explain how to change r the angle using the angle information (SML AGLI) in the disk search information (DSI) of FIG. 61;
FIG. 63 shows the parameters and contents of the search information (VOBU SRI) for the video object unit (VOBU) of FIG. 59;
FIG. 64 illustrates bit maps describing the forward addresses (FWDA) of the search information (VOBU SRI)-on the video object unit (VOBU) of FIG. 59;
FIG. 65 illustrates bit maps describing the backward addresses (BWDA) of the search information (VOBU SRI) on the video object unit (VOBU) of FIG. 59;
FIG. 66 shows the parameters and contents of the synchronizing playback information (SYNCI) on the video a~~~a~~
object unit (VOBU) of FIG. 59;
FIG. 67 illustrates the configuration of sub-picture unit;
FIG. 68 illustrates parameter and content of sub-picture unit header (SPUH) of sub-picture unit shown in FIG. 67;
FIG. 69 illustrates parameter and content of display control sequence table of sub-picture unit shown in FIG. 67;
FIG. 70 illustrate parameter and content of display control sequence (DCSQ) shown in FIG. 69;
FIG. 71 illustrates a packet transmit dispose section;
FIG. 72 illustrates the configuration of a highlight processor section;
FIGS. 73 and 74 present flowcharts for detecting the total number of titles on an optical disk, the number of chapters (programs) for each title, the number and languages of audio streams for each title, and the number and languages of sub-picture streams for each title;
FIG. 75 is a diagram exemplifying what is stored in a memory table;
FIG.-76 is a diagram showing an example of the reproduced image of a main menu;
FIGS. 77A through 77E show examples of the reproduced images of a title menu, a chapter menu, 2192~.7~
an audio menu, a sub-picture menu and an angle menu;
FIG. 78 shows a flowchart showing the processing sequence when the menu is reproduced;
FIGS. 79A, 79B, 79C and 79D are views for ~ explaining video, sub-picture, highlight information and combined image of them;
FIGS. 80A, 80B, 80C, 80D and 80E are views for explaining video, sub-picture, highlight information and combined image of them;
FIGS. 81A and 81B are views showing a pattern pixel and highlight pixel in sub-picture data;
FIGS. 82, 83 and 84 are flowcharts of the procedure for reproducing the video data in the normal mode from an optical disk having logic formats shown in FIGS. 6 to66;
FIG. 85 is a flowchart of the procedure for changing the angle during playback of the video data from an optical disk having logic formats shown in FIGS. 6 to 66;
FIG. 86 is a block diagram of an encoder system that encodes the video data and generates a video file;
FIG. 87 is a flowchart for an encoding process of FIG. 86;
FIG. 88 is a flowchart for combining the video data, audio data, and sup-picture data all encoded according to the flow of FIG. 87 to create a video data file;
FIG. 89 is a block diagram of a disk formatter system that recordsthe formatted video files on an optical disk;
FIG. 90 is a flowchart for creating logic data to be recordedpn a disk in the disk formatter of FIG. 89;
FIG. 91 is a flowchart for creating from the logic data the physical data to be recorded on a disk; and FIG. 92 is a schematic diagram of a system that transfers the video title set of FIG. 6 via a communication route.
Best Mode of Carrying Out the Invention Hereinafter, referring to the accompanying drawings, an optical disk reproducing apparatus according to an embodiment of the present invention will be explained.
FIG. l is a block diagram of an optical disk reproducing apparatus that reproduces the data from an optical disk associated with an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a block diagram of the disk drive section that drives the optical disk shown in FIG. 1. -FIG. 3 shows the structure of the optical disk shown in FIGS. 1 and 2.
As shown in FIG. 1, the optical disk reproducing apparatus comprises a key/display section 4, a monitor section 6, and a speaker section 8. When the user operates the key/display section 4, this causes the recorded data to be reproduced from an optical disk 10.
The recorded-data contains video data (main-picture data), sub-picture data, and audio data, which are converted into video signals and audio signals. The monitor section 6 displays images according to the 5 audio signals and the speaker section 8 generates sound according to the audio signals.
It is known that the optical disk 10 is available with various structures. For instance, one type of the optical disk 10 is a read-only disk on which data is 10 recorded with a high density~as shown in FIG. 3. The optical disk 10, as,shown in FIG. 3, is made up of a pair of composite layers 18 and an adhesive layer 20 sandwiched between the composite disk layers 18. Each of the composite disk layers 18 is composed of 15 a transparent substrate 14 and a recording layer or a light-reflecting layer 16. The disk layer 18 is arranged so that the light-reflecting layer 16 may be in contact with the surface o~ the adhesive layer 20.
A center hole 22 is made in the optical disk 10. On the periphery of the center hole 22 on both sides, clamping areas 24 are provided which are'used to clamp the optical disk 10 during its rotation. When the disk 10 is loaded in the optical disk apparatus, the spindle of a spindle motor 12 shown in FIG. 2 is inserted into the center hole 22. As long as the disk is being rotated, it continues clamped at the clamping areas 24.
As shown in FIG. 3, the optical disk 10 has an information zone 25 around the clamping zone 24 on each side, the information zones allowing the information to be recorded on the optical disk 10.
In each information area 25, its outer circumference area is determined to be a lead-out_,area 26 in which no information is normally recorded, its inner circumference area adjoining the clamping area 24 is determined to be a lead-in area27 in which no information is normally recorded, and the area between the lead-out area 26 and the lead-in area 27 is determined to be a data recording area 28.
At the recording layer 16 in the information area 25, a continuous spiral track is normally formed as an area in which data is to be recorded. The continuous track is divided into a plurality of physical sectors, which are assigned serial numbers.
On the basis of the sectors, data is recorded. The data recording area 28 in the information recording area 25 is an actual data recording area, in which management data, video data, sub-picture data, and audio data are recorded in the form of pits (that is, in the form of changes in the physical state) as explained later. With the read-only optical disk 10, a train of pits is previously formed in the transparent substrate 14 by a stamper, a reflecting layer is formed by evaporation on the surface of the transparent substrate 14 in which the pit train is formed, and the ~~~2077 reflecting layer serves as the recording layer 16. In the read-only optical disk 10, a groove is normally not provided as a track and the pit train in the surface of the transparent substrate 14 serves as a track.
a The optical disk apparatus 12, as shown in FIG. l, further comprises a disk drive section 30, a system CPU
section S0, a system ROM/RAM section 52, a system processor section 54, a data RAM section 60, a video decoder 58, an audio decoder section 60, a sub-picture decoder section 62, and a D/A and data reproducing section 64, and the menu generator 66. The system processor section 54 is provided with a system time clock (STC) 54A and a register 54B. The video decorder section 58, audio decorder section 60, and sub-picture decorder section 62 are also provided with system time clocks (STC) 58A, 60A, 62A, respectively.
As shown in FIG. 2, the disk drive section 30 contains a motor driving circuit 11, a spindle motor 12, an optical head 32 (i.e., an optical pickup), a feed motor 33, a focus circuit 36, a feed motor driving circuit 37, a tracking circuit 38, a head amplifier 40, and a servo processing circuit 44. The optical disk 10 is placed on the spindle motor 12 driven by the motor driving circuit 11 and is rotated by the spindle motor 12. The optical head 32 that projects a laser beam on the optical disk 10 is located under the optical disk 10. The optical head 32 is placed on a guide mechanism 2 ~ 92711 (not shown). The feed motor driving circuit 37 is provided to supply a driving signal to the feed motor 33. The motor 33 is driven by the driving signal and moves in and out the optical head 32 across the radius of the optical disk 10. The optical head 32 is provided with an object lens 34 positioned so as to face the optical disk 10. The object lens 34 is moved according to the driving signal_supplied from the focus circuit 36 so as to move along its optical axis.
To reproduce the data from the above optical disk 10, the optical head 32 projects a laser beam on the optical disk 10 via the object lens 34. The object lens 34 is moved little by little across the radius of the optical disk 10 according to the driving signal supplied from the tracking circuit 38. Furthermore, the object lens 34 is moved along its optical axis according to the driving signal supplied from the focusing circuit 36 so that its focal point may be positioned on the recording layer 16 of the optical disk 10. This causes the laser beam to form the smallest beam spot on the spiral track (i.e., the pit train), enabling the beam spot to trace the track. The laser beam is reflected from the recording layer 16 and returned to the optical head 32. The optical head 32 converts the beam reflected from the.optical disk 10 into an electric signal, which is supplied from the optical head 32 to the servo processing circuit 44 via 2192fl77 r the head amplifier 40. From the electric signal, the servo processing circuit 44 produces a focus signal, a tracking signal-, and a motor control signal and supplies these signals to the focus circuit 36, tracking circuit 38, and motor driving circuit 11, respectively.
Therefore, the object lens 34 is moved along its optical axis and across the radius of the optical disk 10, its focal point is positioned on the recording layer 16 of the optical disk 10, and the laser beam forms the smallest beam spot on the spiral track.
Furthermore, the spindle motor 12 is rotated by the motor driving circuit 11 at a specific rotating speed.
This allows the beam to track at, for example, a constant linear speed.
The system CPU section 50 of FIG. 1 supplies to the servo processing circuit 44 a control signal serving as an access signal. In response to the control signal, the servo processing circuit 44 supplies a head-moving signal to the feed motor driving circuit 37, which supplies a driving signal to the feed motor 33. Then, the feed motor 33 is driven, causing the optical head 32 to move across the radius of the optical disk 10. Then, the optical head 32 accesses a specific sector formed at the recording layer 16 of the optical disk 10. The data is reproduced from the specific sector by the optical head 32, which then ?~77 supplies it to the head amplifier 40. The head amplifier 4D amplifies the reproduced data, which is outputted at the disk drive section 30.
The reproduced data is transferred and stored in 5 a data RAM section 56 by the system processor section 54 which is controlled by the system CPU section 50 which is operated in accordance with the programs stored in the system ROM/RAM section 52. The stored reproduced data is processed at-the system processor 10 section 54, which sorts the data into video data, audio data, and sub-picture data, which are supplied to the video decoder section 58, audio decoder section 60, and sub-picture decoder section 62, respectively, and are decoded at the respective decoders. The D/A and data-15 reproducing section 64 converts the decoded video data, audio data, and sub-picture data into an analog video signal, an analog audio signal, and an analog sub-picture signal, subjects these signal to a mixing process, and supplies the resulting video signal and 20 sub-picture signal to the monitor 6 and the resulting audio signal to the speaker 8. Then, on the basis of the video signal and sup-picture signal, an image is displayed on the monitor section 6 and according to the audio signal, sound is simultaneously reproduced at the speaker section 8.
In the optical disk reproducing apparatus shown in FIG. 1, as a user manipulates the key/display section 4 on the front panel of the main body or manipulates the remote controller 5 as a remote terminal connected to the remote control receive section 4A via optical communications using infrared rays, recorded data, i.e., video data, sub-picture data and audio data, is reproduced from the optical disk 10 and is converted to an audio signal and video signal in the apparatus.
The video signal is reproduced as a video image on the external monitor section 6 and the audio signal is reproduced as a voice from the speaker section 8.
As shown in FIG. 4, the key/display section 4 comprises a power key 4a, microphone input terminals 4b, a playback key 4c, a pause key 4d, a stop key 4e, fast forward and rewind keys 4f, an open/close key 4g for instructing the loading or ejecting of the optical disk 10, indicators 4h, and a load/eject slot 4i for the optical disk 10.
As shown in FIG. 5, the remote controller 5 comprises a power key 5a, numeral keys 5b, a stop key 5c, a playback key 5d, a pause key 5e, a memory key 5f, an open/close key 5g for instructing the loading or ejecting of the optical disk 10, fast forward and rewind keys 5h and 5i, repeat keys 5j for instructing repeating and the repeat range, a menu key 5k for instructing the display of a menu screen, a title key 51 for instructing the display of a title menu screen, and up and down and right and left select keys 5m which 2192u17 are used to select an item on the displayed menu screen.
The detailed operation of the optical disk apparatus of FIG. 1 will be described later with reference to the logic format of the. optical disk explained below.
The data recording area 28 between the lead-in area 27 and the lead-out area 26 on the optical disk of FIG. 1 has a volume and file structure as shown in FIG. 6. The structure has been determined in conformity to specific logic format standards, such as Micro UDF or ISO 9660. The data recording area 28 is physically divided into a plurality of sectors as described earlier. These physical sectors are assigned 15. serial numbers. In the following explanation, a logical address means a logical sector number (LSN) as determined in Micro UDF or ISO 9660. Like a physical sector, a logical sector contains 2048 bytes.
The numbers (LSN) of logical sectors are assigned consecutively in ascending orderas the physical sector number increments.
As shown in FIG. 6, the volume and file structure is a hierarchic structure and contains a volume and file structure area 70, a video manager 71, at least one video title set #i 72, and another recorded area 73. These areas 70, 71, 72, 73 are aligned with the boundaries between logical sectors. As with ., ,...» . ,.. ....,, ,. : ~ :. ,. _--p., . . . ..:..._ . _ a conventional CD, a logical sector is defined as a set of 2048 bytes. Accordingly, one logical sector corresponds to one logical block.
The volume and file structure area 70 corresponds to a management area determined in Micro UDF or ISO
9660. According to the description in the management area, the video manager 71 is stored in the system ROM/RAM section 52. As explained with reference to FIG. 7, the information used to manage video title sets 72 is written in the video manager 71, which is composed of a plurality of files, starting with file #0. In each video title set 72, compressed video data, compressed-audio data, compressed sub-picture data, and the reproducing information about these data items are stored as explained later. Each video title set is composed of a plurality of files 74. The number of video title sets 72 is limited to a maximum of 99.
Furthermore, the number of files- 74 (from file #j to file #j+9) constituting each video title set 72 is determined to be a maximum of 10. These files 72 are also aligned with the boundaries between logical sectors.
In the other recorded area 73, the information capable of- utilizing the aforementioned video title sets 72 is recorded. The other recorded areas 73 are not necessarily provided.
As shown in FIG. 7, the video manager 71 contains at least three items each corresponding to individual files 74. Specifically, the video manager 71 is made up of video manager information (VMGI) 75, a video object set-for video manager menu (VMGM VOBS) 76, and backup of video manager information (VMGI BUP) 77.
Here, the video manager information (VMGI) 75 and the backup of video manager information (VMGI BUP) 77 are determined to be indispensable items, and the video object set for video manager menu (VMGM VOB$) 76 is determined to be an selection item. In the video object set 76 for VMGM, the video data, audio data, and sup-picture data about a menu of the volumes of the optical disk managed by the video manager 71 are stored.
By the video object set 76 for VMGM (VMGM VOBS), the volume name of the optical disk 10, the sound accompanying the volume name representation, and the description of the sub-picture are displayed and at the same time, selectable items are provided in the form of sub-pictures as in video reproduction explained later.
For example, the video object set 76 for VMGM
(VMGM VOBS) indicates that the optical disk 10 contains the video data representing the matches a boxer played until he won a world championship. Specifically, a fighting pose of boxer X, together with a volume name, such as the glorious history of boxer X, is reproduced in the form of video data and at the same ~ ~~~~I~
time, his theme song is reproduced in sound, and his chronological table is provided in a sup-picture.
Furthermore, the user is asked which language option to select, English or Japanese, in doing the narration of 5 the matches. At the same time, the user is asked whether a caption in another language should be provided in a sub-picture or which language option should be selected for a caption. Thus, for example, the VMGM video object set 76 (VMGM VOBS) provides the 10 user with preparations to watch a video of a match of boxer X in English speech with a sub-picture using Japanese captions.
Here, the structure of a video object set (VOBS) 82 will be described with reference to FIG. 8. FIG. 8 15 shows an example of a video object set (VOBS) 82.
The video object set (VOBS) 82 comes in three types for two menus and a title. Specifically, the video object set (VOBS) 82 contains the video title set for video manager menu (VMGM VOBSj76, a video-object set 20 (VTSM YOBS) 95 for a menu in the video title sets 72 and a video object set (VTSTT VOBS) 82 for the titles of at least one video title set 72 in a video title set (VTS) 72 as explained later. Each video object set 82 has the same structure except that their uses differ.
25 As shown in FIG. 8, a video object set (VOBS) 82 is defined as a set of one or more video objects (VOB) 83. The video objects 83 in a video object set (YOBS) 82 is used for the same application. A video object set (VOBS) 82 for menus is usually made up of one video object (VOB) 83 and stores the data used to display a plurality of menu screens. In contrast, a video object set (VTSTT VOBS) 82 for title sets is usually composed of a plurality of video objects (VOB) 83.
When the aforesaid video-of a boxing match is taken as example, a video object (VOB) 83 corresponds to the video data of each match played by boxer X.
Specifying a particular video object (VOB) 83 enables, for example, boxer X's eleventh match for a world championship to be reproduced on a video. The video object set (VTSN! VOBS) 95 fora,menuof the video title sets 72 contains the menu data for-the matches played by boxer X. According to the presentation of the menu, a particular match, for example, boxer X's eleventh match for a world championship, can be specified.
In the case of a usual single story movie, one video object (VOB) 83 corresponds to one video object set (VOBS) 82. One video stream is completed with one video object set (VOBS) 82. In the case of a collection of animated cartoons or an omnibus movie, a plurality of video streams each corresponding to individual stories are provided in a single video object set (VOBS) 82. Each video stream is stored in the corresponding video object 83. Accordingly, the ,.: ~_/ .- g. '. . . ' ./~w, a...:i.
audio stream and sub-picture stream related to the video stream are also completed with each video object (VOB) 83.
An identification number (IDN#j) is assigned to a video object (VOB) 83. By the identification number (ID#j), the video object (VOB) 83 can be identified.
A video-object (VOB) 83 further comprises one or more such cells 84. Although a usual video stream is made up of a plurality of cells 84, a menu video stream, or a video object (VOB) 83 may be composed of one cell 84.
A cell 84 is likewise assigned an identification number (C IDN#j). -By the identificationnumber(C IDN#j), the cell 84 is identified. At the time of the change of the angle explained later, the angle is changed by specifying the cell number.
Here, angle means to change an angle at which an object is viewed in the field of the films.
In an example of a boxing match, angle means that the same knockout scene can be seen from different angles:
e.g., a scene viewed from-the~champion, a scene viewed from the challenger, or a scene viewed from the judge.
An angle may be selected by the user as he or she wishes, or the same scene may be repeated while the angle is being changed automatically as the story advances. Furthermore, the angle may be changed after the beginning of the same scene has been reached: e.g., the scene is changed the moment that the boxer dealt __...~ ?~
2192tJ77 the opponent a counter and thena scene where the counter is dealt again is played. The angle may also be changed at the scene following the current scene:
e.g., the angle is changed the moment that the boxer has dealt the opponent a counter. To achieve any angle change, a navigation pack explained in detail later is provided in a video object unit (VOBU) 85.
As shown in FIG. 8, each cell 84 is composed of one or more video object units (VOBU) 85, normally a plurality of video object units (VOBU) 85. Here, a video object unit (VOBU) 85 is defined as a pack train having a navigation pack (NV pack) 86 at its head. Specifically, a video object unit (VOBU) 85 is defined as a set of all the packs recorded, starting at a navigation pack (NV pack) 86 to immediately in front of the next navigation pack. The reproducing time of the video object unit (VOBU) 85 corresponds to the reproducing time of the video data made up of one or more GOP (Group of Pictures) contained in the video object unit (VOBU) 85 as shown in FIG. 9. The maximum reproducing time is determined to be 0.4 or more second and less than one second. In MPEG, one GOP is defined as compressed image data which corresponds to about 15 frames to be played back for, usually, 0.5 seconds.
In the case where the video data includes a video object unit as illustrated in FIG. 6, GOPs each composed of a video pack (V pack) 88, a sub-picture pack (SP pack) 90 and an audio pack (A pack) 91, all complying to the MPEG standards, are arranged, producing a vide data stream. Regardless of the number of GOPs, a video object (VOBU) 83 is determined based on the time-required for producing a GOP. In the video object (VOBU) 83 has a navigation pack (NV) pack 86 arranged at its head. Any reproduced data, whether audio data, sub-picture data, or audioJsub-picture data, consists of one more video object units. Thus, even if a video object unit is composed of only audio packs only, these audio packs will be reproduced within the time for reproducing the video object unit.
The procedure of reproducing these packs will be explained later in detail, along with the procedure of reproducing the navigation pack (NV pack) 86.
The procedure for reproducing these packs, together with the navigation pack, will be explained in detail later.
The video manager 71 will be explained with reference to FIG. 7. The video-management information 75 placed at the head of the video manager 71 contains the information used to search for titles and the information used to manage the video title sets (VTS) 72 such as the information used for.-reproduction of a video manager menu. The volume management information 75 contains at least four tables 78, 79, 80, 81 in the order shown in FIG. 7. Each of these tables 78, 79, 80, 81 is aligned with the boundaries between logical sectors. A first table 78, a video manger information management table (VMGI MAT)78 is a mandatory table, in which the size of the video manager 71, the starting 5 address of each piece of the information in the video manger 71, and the attribute information about the video object set (VMGM VOBS) 76 for a video manager menu are written.
Written in a second table of the video manager 71, 10 a title search pointer table 79 (TT SRPT), is an entry program chain (EPGC) of the video titles (VTS) 72 contained in the optical disk 10 that are selectable -according to the entry of a title number from the key/display section 4 on the apparatus or the selection 15 of a title_number via the remote controller 5.
Here, a program chain 87 is a set of programs 89 that reproduce the story of a title as shown in FIG. 9.
Continuous reproduction of a program chain 87 completes the movie of a title. Therefore, the user can start to 20 see the movie from a particular scene of the movie by specifying the program 89.
In a third table of the video manager 71, a video title set attribution table (VTS ATRT) 80, the attribute information determined in the video title set 25 72 in the volume of the optical disk 10 is written.
Specifically, in this table 72, the following items are written as attribute information: the number of video title sets, video title set numbers, video attributes, such as a video data compression scheme, audio stream attributes, such as an audio coding mode, and sub-picture attributes, such as the type of sup-picture display.
Described in a video manager menu PGCI unit table (VMGM PGCI UT) 81, the fourth table of the video manager 71, is information about the video-object set (VMGM VOBS) 76 for the video manager menu.
The video manager menu PGCIunit table (VMGM PGCI UT) 81 is essential when the video manager menu (VMGM) is present in the video object set (VMGM VOBS) 76 for the video manager menu.
The contents of the video manager information management table (VMGI MAT)78 and the title search pointer table (TT $RPT) 79 will-be explained indetail with reference to FIGS. 10, 11, 12, and 13.
As shown in FIG. 10, written in the video manager information management table (VMGI MAT) 78 are a video manager identifier (VMG ID), the size of video manager information (VMGI SZ) in logical- blocks (one logical block contains 2048 bytes as mentioned above), the version number (VERN) of the optical disk 10 complying with the digital versatile disk video specification, and the category of video manager 71 (VMG CAT).
In the category of video manager 71 (VMG CAT), a flag indicating whether or not the DVD video s2 directory prohibits copying is written. Further written in the table (VMGI MAT) area volume set identifier (VI~MS ID), the number of video title sets (VTS Ns), the identifier for-a person supplying the data to be recorded on the disk (Provider Unique ID:
PVR ID),--a video-manager menu video-objectset-start -address (VNGM VOBS SA), the end-address- (VMGI MAT EA) of a volume manager information management table (VMGI-MAT) 78, and the start address (TT SRPT SA) of a title search pointer table (TT SRPT) 79. The start address (VMGM PGCI UT SA) of the video manager--menu PGCI unit table (VMGM PGCI UT) 81 is described in this table 78.
When there is no video-manager menu PGCI unit table (VMGM PGCI UT) 81, "OOOOOOOOh~~ is described at the start address. The end address of VMG MAT 78 (VMGI MAT EA) and the start address of TT SRPT
(TT SRPT SA) 79 are represented by the number of logical blocks, relative to the first logical block.
Furthermore, in the table 78, the start address (VTS ATRT SA) of the attribute table (VTS ATRT) 80 of video title sets (VTS) 72 is represented by the number of bytes, relative to the first byte in the VMGI
manager table (VMGI MAT)-71, and the video attribute (VMGM V AST) of-the video manager menu (VMGM) is written. Further written in the table 78 are the number of audio streams (VMGM AST Ns) in the video manager menu (VMGM), the attributes of audio streams (VMGM AST_ATR) in the video manager menu (VMGM), the number of sub-picture streams (VMGM SPST Ns) in the video manager menu (VMGM), and the attributes of sub-picture streams (VMGM SPST ATR)in the video manager menu (VMGM).
In the title search pointertable (TT SRPT) 79, as shown in FIG. 11, the title search pointer table information (TT-SRPTI) is first written and then as many title search pointers for input numbers 1 to n (n < 99) as are needed are written consecutively.
When only the reproducing data for one title, for example, only the video data for one title, is stored in the volume of the optical disk, only one title search pointer (TT SRP) 93 is written in the table (TT SRPT)-79.
As shown in FIG. 12, the title search pointer table information (TSPTI) 92 contains the number of title search pointers (TT Ns) and the end address (TT SRPT EA) of the title search pointer table (TT SRPT) 79. The address(TT SRPT EA) is represented by the number of bytes, relative to the first byte in the title search pointer table (TT SRPT) 79.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 13, each title search pointer (TT SRP) 93 contains the number of port-of-titles (PTT Ns) as the number of chapters (programs), the video title set number (VTSN), the title number (VTS TTN) of the video title set 72, and the start _ :...__.
address (VTS SA)of the video title set 72.
The contents of the title search pointer (TT SRP) 93 specifies a video title set 72 to be reproduced and a location in which the video title set 72 is to be stored. The start address (VTS SA) of the video title set 72 is represented by the number of logical blocks in connection with the title set 72 specified by the video title set number (VTSN).
The details of what is described in the video manager menu PGCI unit table (VMGM PGCI UT) 81 will now be discussed with reference to FIGS. 14 through 19.
The video manager menu PGCI unit table (VMGM PGCI UT) 81 shown in FIG. 14 is, essential when the video object set (VMGM VOBS) 76 for the video manager menu is provided, and information about a program chain for reproducing the video manager menu (VMGM) provided for each language. is described in this table 81. By referring to the video manager menu PGCI
unit table (VMGM PGCI UT) 81, the program chain of the specified language in the video. object set (VMGM VOBS) 76 can be acquired to be reproduced as a menu.
The video manager menu PGCI unit table (VMGM PGCI UT) 81 contains video manager menu PGCI unit table information (VMGM PGCI UTI) 8_lA, n video manager menu language unit search pointers (VMGM LU SRP) 81B, and n video manager menu language units (VMGM LU) 81C
in the named order as shown in FIG. 14.
The video manager menu PGCI unit table information (VMGM PGCI UTI) 81A contains information about the table 81. The video manager menu language unit search pointers (VMGM LU-SRP),81B are descrxbe~l in the order associated with the video manager menus #1 to #n and contain language codes and descriptions about the pointers to search for the video manager menu language units (VMGM LU) 81C, described in the order associated with the video manager menus #1 to #n. Described in each video manager menu language unit (VMGM LU) 81C are the category and start address of the program chain of the associated video manager menu.
More specifically, as shown in FIG. 15, the video manager menu PGCI unit table information , (vMGM PGCI UTI) 81A contains the number of the video manager menu language units (VMGM LU) 81C as a parameter (VMGM LU Ns). and the -end-.address of the video manager menu language units (VMGM LU) 81C as a parameter (VMGM PGCI UT EA).- As_-shown in FIG. 16, each video manager menu language unit search pointer (vMGM LU SRP) 81B contains a video manager menu language code as a parameter (VMGM LCD) and the start address of the associated video manager menu language unit (VMGM LU) 81C as a parameter (UMGM LU SA). Each video manager menu language unit (VMGM LU) 81C consists of video manager menu language unit information (VMGM LUI) 81D,-video manager menu PGC information >~ ...: .
search pointers (VMGM PGCI SRP) 8lE and video manager menu PGC information (VMGM PGCI) 81F in the named order as shown in FIG. 17. The video manager menu language unit information (VMGM LUI)-81D containsinformation about this table 81C. The video manager menu PGC
information search pointers (VMGM PGCI SRP) 81E are described in the order associated with the video manager menus #1 to #n and contain the categories of the program chains of the video manager menus and descriptions about the pointers to search for the video manager menu PGC information (VMGM PGCI) 81F, described in the order associated with the video manager menus #1 to #n.
The video manager menu PGC information (VMGM PGCI) 81P-~ ontains information about the program chain of the video manager menu or VMGM program chain information (VMGM PGCI).
More specifically, as shown in FIG. 18, the video manager menu language unit information (VMGM LUI) 81D
contains the number of pieces of the VMGM program chain information (VMGM PGCI) 81f as aparameter (VMGM PGCI Ns) and the end address of the video manager menu language unit information (VMGM LUI) 81Das aparameter (VMGM LUI EA). As shown in FIG.19, each video manager menu PGC information search pointer (VMGM PGCI SRP) 81E
contains the category of the program chain of the associated video manager menu as a parameter 2192fl77 (VMGM PGC CAT) and the start address of the associated VMGM program chain information (VMGM PGCI) 81F as a parameter (VMGM PGCI-SA).
Described in the category (VMGM PGC CAT) of the program chain of the video manager menu are a flag indicating whether or not there is an entry of this PGC
and a menu ID indicating if it is a menu. The menu ID
indicates a title menu when it is "0010"
The structure of the logic format of the video title set 72 shown in FIG. 6 will be described with reference to FIG. 20. In each video title set (VTS) 72, four items are~written in the order shown in FIG. 20. Each video title set (VTS) 72 is made up of one or more video titles having common attributes.
The video title set information (VTSI) 94 contains the management information on the video titles, including the information on entry search points, the information on playback of video object sets 72, the information on playback of title set menus (VTSM), and the attribute information on video object sets 72.
Each video title set 72 is provided with the backup of the video title set information (VTSI BUP) 97.
Between the video title set information (VTSI) and the backup of the information (VTSI BUP) 97, a video object set for video title set menus (VTSM VOBS) 95 and a video object set for video title set titles (VTSTT VOBS) 96 are arranged. Both of the video object t=
sets (VTSM VOBS and VTSTT VOBS),95, 96 have the structure shown in FIG. 8, as explained earlier.
The video title set information (VTSI) 94, the backup of the information (VTSI BUP) 97, and the video object set (VTSTT VOBS) 96 for video title set titles are items indispensable to the video title set 72.
The video object set (VTSM VOBS) 96 for video title set menus is an option provided as the need arises.
The video title set information (VTSI) 94 consists of five tables as shown in FIG. 20. The five tables are forced to align with the boundaries between logical sectors. The video title set information management table (VTSI MAT) 98, a first table, is a mandatory table, in which the size of the video title set (VTS) 72, the start addresses of each piece of information in the video title set (VTS) 72, and the attributes of the video object sets (VOBS) 96 in the video title set (VTS) 72 are written.
The video title set part of title search pointer table (VTS PTT SRPT) 99, a second table, is an selection table provided as the need arises. Written in the table 99 are the program chains (PGC) 87 and/or programs (PG) 89 contained in the video title set 72 that are selectable according to the entry of a title number from the key/display section 4 of the apparatus or the selection of a title number give via the remote controllers.
The video title-set program chain information table (VTS PGCIT) 100, a third table, is a mandatory table, in which the VTS program chain information (VTS PGCI) 104 is written. The video title set time search map table (VTS TMAPT) 101, a fourth table, is an selection table provided as the need arises, in which the information on the recording location, for a specific period of time of display, of the video data in each program chain (PGC) 87 in the title set 72 to which the map table (VTS TMAPT) 101 belongs is written..
A video title set menu PGCI unit table (VTSM PGCI UT) 111, the fifth table, is an essential item when a video object set (VGSM VOBS) 95 for the video title set menu is provided, and contains informationabout a program chain for reproducing a video title set menu (VTSM) provided for each language. By referring to this video title set menu PGCI unit table (VTSM PGCI UT) 111, the program chain of the specified language in the video object set (VTSM VOBS) 95 can be acquired to be reproduced as a menu.
Next, the video title information management table (VTSI MAT) 98 and video title set program chain information table (VTSI PGCIT)-100 shown in FIG. 20 will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 30.
FIG. 21 shows the contents of the video title information management table (VTSI MAT) 98, in which the video title set identifier (VTS ID), the size of the video title set 72 (VTS SZ), the version number of the DVD video specification (VERN), and the video title set category (VTS CAT) are written inthat order.
Furthermore, in the table (VTSI MAT)-98, the start address of the video object set (VTSM VOBS) for VTS
menus is expressed by a logical block relative to the first logical block in the video title set (VTS) 72.
The start address (VTSTT VOB SA)of the video object 83 for titles in the video title set (VTS) 72 is expressed by a logical block (RLBN) relative to the first logical block ire the video title set (VTS) 72.
Furthermore, in the table (VTSI MAT) 98, the end address (VTSI MAT EA) of the video title set information management table (VTI MAT) 98 is represented by the number of blocks, relative to the first byte in the table (VTSI MAT) 98 and the start address (VTS PTT SRPT SA) of the-video,title set part of title search pointer table (VTS PTT SRPT) 99 is represented by the number of blocks, relative to the first byte in the video title set information (VTSI) 94.
Still furthermore, in the table (VTSI MAT) 98, the start address (VTS PGCIT SA) of the video title set program chain information table (PGCIT) 100 is expressed by the number of blocks, relative to the first byte of the video title set information (VTSI) 94, and the start address (VTS TMAPT SA) of the time a__ search map (VTS TMAPT) 101 in the video title set (VTS) 72 is expressed by a logical sector relative to the first logical sector in the video title set (VTS) 72.
This table (VTSI MAT) 98 contains the start address (VTGSM PGCI UT SA),of,the video"title, set menu PGCI
unit table (VTSM PGCI UT) in terms of the number of relative blacks from the top byte of the video title set information (VTSI) 94. When the video manager menu PGCI unit table (VMGM PGCI UT) 81isnot present, "OOOOOOOOh" is described at the start address. Written in the table (VTSI MAT) 98 are the video object set (VTSM VOBS) 95-for-the video title-set menu (VTSM) in the video title set (VTS) 72, the video attributes (VTS V ATR)ofthevideo object_set (VTST VOBS) 96 for the titles -(VTSTT) in the video-title set 72, and the number of audio streams (VTS AST Ns) in the video object set (VTSTT VOBS~ 82-for the titles (VTSTT) for the video title sets 72. Here, the video attributes (VTS V ATR) include a video compression mode, a frame rate of the TV system, and an aspect ratio for displaying an image on a display unit.
Written in the table (VTSI MAT) 98 are the audio stream attributes (VTS AST ATR)-of-the-video object set (VTST VOBS) for the- titles (VTSTT) in the video title set (VTS). The attributes (VTS AST ATR) include an audio encoding mode indicating how audio is encoded, the number of bits used to quantize audio, the number . . _ . . . ._ , r, .,.
y ft:..
of audio channels and an audio language code.
Furthermore, written in the table (VTSI MAT) 98 are the number (VTS SPST Ns) of sub-picture streams in the video object set 82 for the titles (VTSTT) in the video title set (VTS) 72 and the attributes (VTS SPST ATR) of each sub-picture stream.
The attributes (VTR SPST ATR) for-each sub-picture stream include a sub-picture coding mode, a sub-picture display type and a sub-picture language code.
Furthermore, in the table (VTSI MAT) 98, written are the number (VTSM AST Ns) of-audio streams in the video title set menu (VTSM), the audio stream attributes (VTSM AST ATR),-the number=(VTSM SPST Ns) of sup-picture streams, and the sup-picture stream attributes (VISM SPST ATR).
Each audio stream attribute (VTS AST ATR) of the video title set (vTS) contains the audio coding mode, the multichannel extension, the audio type, the audio application ID, quantization, the sampling frequency, and the number of audio channels from bit number b63 to bit number b48 with bit b51 reserved, and audio stream language codes as specific codes from bit number b47 to bit number b40 and from bit number b39 to bit number b32, as shown in FIG. 22. Bit number b31 to bit number b24 of this audio stream attribute (VTS AST ATR) are reserved for specific codes. Bit number 23 to bit number b8 are reserved for the future use, and bit ._-.. - .~. LI_.., . . '-, .. ...:_,:: ,...:
number b7 to bit number b0 describe application information. When the video-object set (VTSM YOBS) 95 for the VTS menu is not present or that video object set contains no audio stream, "0" is described in each of the bits from bit number.b63_,to bit number b0.
Specific codes are described in bits b47 to b40 and b39 to b32 where a language code determined by ISO-639 is described as a language symbol when the audio stream type is a language or voice. When the audio stream type is not a language or voice, this area is reserved.
As shown in FIG. 23, each sub-picture stream attribute (VTS SPSTG ATR) of.the,video object set (VTST VOBS) 96 for VTSTT contains the sub-picture coding mode, sub-picture display type and sub-picture type from bit number b47 to bit number b40 with bit b44 reserved, and a language code of this sub-picture stream as specific codes from bit number b39 to bit number b32 and from bit number b31 to bit number b24.
Bits b23 to b16 are reserved for specific codes. Bits b23 to b8 are reserved for the future use, and bits b15 to b8 describe the specific-code extension. Further, bits b7 to b0 are reserved.
The VTS program chain information table (VTS PGCIT)-100 has-a-structure asshown in FIG. 24.
In the information table (VTS PGCIT)--100, information on the VTS program chain (VTS PGC) is written, starting . ~.:I.
~1g2~77 with information (VTS PGCIT I) 102on _the information table (VTS PGCIT)100relatedto the VT$program chain (VTS PGC). In the information table (VTS PGCIT) 100, the information (VTS PGCIT-I) 102 is followed by as many VTS PGCI search pointer (VTS PGCIT SRP) 103 used to search for VTS program chains (VTS PGC) as the number (#1 to #n) of VTS program chains in the information table (VTS PGCIT).-At the end of the table, there are provided as many pieces of information (VTS PGCI) 104-on the respective VTS program chains (VTS PGC) as the number (from #1 to #n) of the VTS
program chains (VTS PGC).
The information (VTS PGCIT I) 102 in the VTS
program chain information table (VTS PGCIT) 100 contains the number (VTS PGC Ns)- of VTS program chains (VTS PGC) as-shownin FIG. 25. The end address (VTS PGCIT EA) of the table information-(VTS'PGCIT I) 102 is expressed by the number of bytes, relative to the first byte in the information table (VTS PGCIT) 100.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 26, the VTS PGCIT
search pointer (VTS PGCIT SRP) 103 contains the attributes (VTS PGC'CAT) of the program chains (VTS PGC) in--the video title set (VTS~72 and the start address (VTS PGCI SA) of the VTS,-PGC information (VTS PGCI)104 expressed by the number of bytes, relative to the first byte in the VTS PGC information table (VTS PGCIT) 100. Here, the VTS PGC attribute ~~92077 (VTS PGC CAT) is, forexample, an attribute indicating whether an entry program chain (Entry PGC) is the first one to loe reproduced. Usually, an entry program chain (PGC) is written before program chains (PGC) that are 5 not entry program chains (PGC). Generally, program chains (PGC) are reproduced in--the description order of VTS PGCIs as shown in FIG. 24.
The PGC information (VTS PGCI) 104 in the video title set 72 contains four items as shown in FIG. 27.
10 In they information (VTS PGCI) 104, the program chain general information (PGC GI) 105 on a mandatory item is first arranged, followed by at least three items that are made mandatory only when there is an video object 83. Specifically, contained as the 15 three items in the PGC information (VTS-PGCI) 104 are a program chain program map (PGC PGMAP) 106, a cell playback information table (C PBIT) 107, and a cell position information table (C POSIT) 108.
As shown in FIG. 28, the program chain general 20 information (PGC GI) 105 contains thecategory (PGCI CAT)of the program chain 87, the contents (PGC CNT) ofthe program chain (PGC) 87, and the playback time of the program chain (PGC). 87 Written in the category of PGC (PGCI CAT) are whether the PGC
25 can be copied or not and whether the programs 89 in the PGC are played back continuously or at random. The contents of PGC (PGC CNT) contains the description of _~r..
~l9ZOll the program chain structure, that is, the number of programs 89, the number of cells 84, and the number of angles in the program chain 87. The playback time of PGC (PGC PB TIME) contains the total playback time of the programs 89 in the PGC. The playback time is the time required to continuously play back the programs 89 in the PGC, regardless of the playback procedure.
When an angle mode is available, the playback time of angle cell number 1 is the playback time of the angle.
Furthermore, the program chain general information (PGC-GI) 105_ contains PGC sub-picture stream control (PGC SPST CTL), PGC audio-stream control (PGC AST CTL), and PGC sub-picture pallet (PGC SP PLT). The PGC sub-picture stream control (PGC SPST CTL) contains the number of sub-pictures usable in the PGC 89 and the PGC
audio stream control (PGC AST CTL) likewise-contains the number of audio streams usable in the PGC 89. The PGC sub-picture palette (PGC SP PLT) contains a set of a specific number of color pallets used in all of the sub-picture streams in the PGC 89.
Furthermore, the PGC general information (PGC GI) 105 contains the start address (C PBIT SA) of the cell playback information table (C PBIT) and the start address (C POSIT SA) of the cell-position information table (C POSIT) 108. Both of the start addresses (C PBIT SA and--C POSIT SA) are represented by the number of logical blocks, relative to the first byte _ _. ~', in the VTS PGC information (VTS PGCI) 105.
For a program chain (PGC) for a menu, as shown in FIG. 29, bit b31 of the category (PGC CAT) of the program chain describes a PGC entry or a non PGC entry as the entrytyper bits b30.to.b28 of are reserved for the future use, bits b27 to b24 describe a menu ID
indicative of the type of the menu, bits b23 and b22 describe the PGC block mode, bits b21 and b20 describe the PGC block type, bits b19 to b16 describe the program playback control, bits b15 and bl4 describe the copy flag, bits b13 and b12 describe the playback management, bits bll to b8 describe the application type, and bits b7 to b0 are reserved for the future usage.
With regard to the menu ID, "0010" indicates a title menu for use in the video manager information menu (VMGM), "0011" indicates a root menu for use in the video title set menu (VTSM), "0100" indicates a sub-picture menu for use in the video title set menu (VTSM), "0101" indicates an audio menu for use in the video title set menu (VTSM), "0110" indicates an angle menu for use in the video title set menu (VTSM), and "0111" indicates a program menu for use in the video title set menu (VTSM).
When the category (PGC CAT)- of the program chain (PGC) is a program chain (PGC) for a title, bits b30 to b24 describe the number of titles (VTS TTN), any of ~'~ , . ...-,- :.. . _. ...~,., , ~ ,~ ,.; .,- ..
numbers 1 to 99, in this program chain (PGC), bits b15 to b8 describe the number of cells, any of 1 to 255, in this program chain (PGC), bits b7 to b4 are reserved for the future use, and bits b3 to b0 describe the number of angles, any one of 1 to 9, in the program chain (PGC).
The program chain program map (PGC PGMAP) 108 is a map showing the arrangement of the programs 89 in the PGC 87 of FIG. 31. In the map (PGC PGMAP) 106, the entry cell numbers (ECELLN), the start cell numbers of the individual programs 89, are.written in ascending order as shown in FIGS. 31 and 32. In addition, program numbers are allocated, starting at 1, in the order in which the entry cell numbers are written.
Consequently, the first entry number in the map (PGC PGMAP)106 must be #1.
The cell playback information table (C PBIT) defines the order in which the cells 84 in the PGC 87 are played back. In the cell playback information table (C PBIT) 107, pieces of the cell playback information (C PBI) are writtenconsecutively as shown in FIG. 33. Basically, cells 84 are played back in the order of cell number. The cell playback information (C PBIT) 108-contains a cell-category (C CAT) as shown in FIG. 34. Written in the cell category (C CAT) are a cell block mode indicating whether a cell is in the block and if it is in the block, whether the cell is -the first one, a cell-block type indicating whether a cell 84 is not part of the block or is in an angle block, and an STC discontinuity flag indicating whether the system time clock (STC) must be set again.
An "angleblock" of cells is defined as a set of cells 84 having a specific angle. The angle can be changed by replacing one angle block with another.
In the case of a baseball videoprogram, for example, an angle block representing a scene taken from the outfield may be replaced by an angle block representing a scene taken from the infield.
Further written in the cell category (C CAT) are a cell playback mode indicating whether the video object units (VOBU) 85 in the cell 84 are played back continuously or a picture is made still at one video object unit (VOBU) 85 to another in the cell 84, and cell navigation control indicating whether the picture is made still after the playback of the cell or indicating the rest time.
As shown in FIG. 34, the cell playback information table (C PBIT) 107 contains the cell playback time (C PBTNMj representing the total-playback-time of the PGC 87. When the PGC 87 has an angle cell block, the playback time of the angle cell number 1 represents the playback time of the angle block. Further written in the cell playback information table (C PBIT) 107 are the start address (C FVOBU SA) of the first video .. . .rts. , object unit (VOBS) 85 in the cell 84 expressed by the number of logical sectors, relative to the first logical sector in the video object unit (VOBS) 85 in which the cell 84 is written and the start address 5 (C LVOBU SA) of the end video object unit (YOBS) 85 in the cell 84 expressed by the number of logical sectors, relative to the first logical sector in the video object unit (VOBS) 85 in which the cell 84 is written.
The cell position information table (C POSI) 108 10 specifies the identification number (VOB-ID) of the video object (VOB) 85 in the cell used in the PGC 87 and the identification number (Cell ID)- of the cell 84.
In the cell position information table (C POSI) 108, pieces of the cell position information (C POSI) 15 corresponding to the cell numbers written in the cell playback information table 107 as shown in FIG. 35 are written in the same order as in the cell playback information table (C PBIT) 107.- The cell position information (C POSI) contains the identification number 20 (C VOB IDN) of the video-object-unit-(VOBS) 85 in the cell 84 and the cell identification number (C IDN) as shown in FIG. 36.
The video title set menu PGCI unit table (VTSM PGCI UT) 111 describing language-by-language 25 information of the video titleset menu (VTSM) shown in FIG. 20-consists of video title set menu PGCI unit table-information (VTSM PGCI UTI). 111A, n video title .~:. . ,' _ .; : ..,,.
set menu language unit search pointers (VTSM LU SRP) 111B and n video title set menu language units (VTSM LU) 111C i.n the named order, as shown in FIG. 37.
The video title set menu PGCI unit table information_(VTSM PGCI UTI) 111A containsinformation of this table 111. The video title set menu language unit search pointers (VTSM LU SRP) 111B are described in the order associated with the video title set menus #1 to #n, and contain descriptions about the pointers to search for the video title set menu language units (VTSM LU) 111C described in the order associated with the video title set menus #1 to #n. Described in each video.title set menu language unit (VTSM LU) 111C are the category and start address of the program chain of the associatedvideo title set menu.
More specifically, as shown in FIG. 38, the video title set menu PGCI unit table information (VTSM PGCI UTI) 111A contains the number of the video title set menu language units (VTSM LU) 111C as a parameter (VTSM LU Ns) and the end addressof the video title set menu language units (VTSM LU) 111C as a parameter (VTSM PGCI UT EA). AS shown in FIG. 39, each video title set menu language unit search pointer (VTSM LU SRP) 111B describes a video title set menu language code as a parameter (VTSM LCD) and the start address of the associated video title set menu language unit (VTSM LU) 111C as a parameter (VTSM LU $A).
r n._;i: . .., , ...rt-. ..,._ .. ..a.
As shown in FIG. 40, each video-title set menu language unit (VTSM LU) 111C consists of-video title set menu language unit information (VTSM LUI) 111D, video title set menu PGC information search pointers (VTSM PGCI SRP) 111E and video title set menu PGC
information (VTSM PGCI) 111F in the named order.
The video title set menu language unit information (VTSM LUI) 111D contains information of this table 111C. The video title set menu PGC information search pointers (VTSM PGCI SRP) 111E are described in the order associated with the video title set menus #1 to #n, and contain the categories of program chains of the video title set menus and descriptions about the pointers to search for the video title set menu PGC
information (VTSM PGCI) 111F described in the order associated with the video title set menus #1 to #n.
Each video title set menu PGC information (VTSM PGCI)111F-contains- information about the program chain of the associated video title set menu, i.e., VTSM program chain information (VTSM PGCI).
More specifically, as shown in FIG. 41, the video title-set menu language unit informatign (VTSM LUI) 111D contains the number of pieces of video title set menu PGC information (VTSM PGCI)- 111F as a parameter (VTSM PGCI Ns), and the end address of the video title set menu language unit information (VTSM LUI) 111D as a parameter (VTSM LUI EA). As shown_in FIG. 42, each ,__<_._.. .: .:.. _ ~.<
~~92~1~
video title set menu PGC information search pointer (VTSM PGCI SRP)--111E, contains the--category of the program chain of the associated video title set menu as a parameter (VTSM PGC CAT)andthe start address of the associated video title set menu PGC information (VTSM PGCI)--111F as-a parameter (VTSM PGCI $A).
Described in the category (VMGM PGC CAT) of the program chain of the video title set menu are a flag indicating whether or not there is an entry of this PGC
and a menu-ID indicating if it is-a.menu. The menu ID
indicates a sub-picture menu when it is "0100,"
indicates an angle menu when it is "0110," and indicates a program menu when it is "0111."
As explained with reference to FIG. 8, a cell 84 is a set of video object units (VOBU) 85. A video object unit 85 is defined as a pack train starting with a navigation (NAV) pack 86. Therefore, the start address (C FVOBU SA) of the first video object unit (VOBU) 85 in a cell 84 is the start address of the NAV
pack 86. As shown in FIG. 43, the NAV pack 86 consists of a pack header 110, a system header 111, and two packets 116, 117 of navigation data; namely, a playback control information (PCI) packet 116 and a data search information (DSI) packet 117. As many bytes as shown in FIG. 43 are allocated to the respective sections so that one pack may contain 2048 bytes corresponding to one logical sector. The NV pack is provided .. .; -.c s4 immediately before the video pack 88 which contains the first data item in the group of pictures (GOP). Even if the object unit 85 contains no video pack 88, the NV
pack 86 is positioned at the head of the object unit 85, provided that the object unit 85 contains an audio pack 91 and/or a sub-picture pack 90. Thus, even if object unit 85 contains no video pack, its playback time is determined on the basis of the time required for playing back a video pack 88, exactly in the same way as in the case where the unit 85 contains a video pack 88.
Here, GOP is defined as a data train constituting a screen determined in the MPEG standards. In other words, GOP is equivalent to compressed data which may be expanded into image data representing a plurality of frames of a moving picture. The pack header 110 contains a pack starting code, a system clock reference (SCR), and a multiplex rate. The system header 111 contains a bit rate and a stream ID. The packet header 112, 114 of-each of the PCI packet 116 and DCI packet 117 contains a packet starting code, a packet length, and a stream ID as determined in the MPEG2.
As shown in FIG. 44, another video, audio or sub-picture pack consists of a pack header 120, packet header 121, and a packet 122 containing the corresponding data as in the system layer 24 MPEG 2.
Its pack length is determined to be 2048 bytes. Each ~~ 82077 of these packs is aligned with the boundaries between logical blocks.
The PCI data (PCI) 113 in the PCI packet 116 is navigation data used to make a presentation, or to 5 change the contents of the display, in synchronization with the playback of the video data in the VOB unit (VOBU) 85. Specifically, the PCI data (PCI) 113 contains PCI general information (PCI GI) as information on the entire PCI data 113 and angle 10 information (NSML AGLI) as each-piece.of jump destination angle information during angle change and high light information (HLI) as shown in FIG. 45. The PCI general information (PCI GI) contains the address (NV PCK LBN)= of the NV pack (NV PCK) 86 in which the 15 PCI data isrecorded as shown in FIG. 28, the address being expressed in the number of blocks, relative to the VOBU logical sector in which the PCI data is recorded. The PCI general information (PCI GI) contains the category of VOBU (VOBU CAT), the start PTS
20 of VOBU 85 (VOBU SPTS)-, and the--end-PTS of VOBU 85 (VOBU EPTS). Here, the start PTS of VOBU 85 (VOBU SPTS) indicates the playback start time (start presentation time stamp (SPTS)) of the video data in the VOBU 85 containing the PCI data. The playback 25 start time is the playback start time of the first picture in the first GOP in the VOBU 85. Normally, the first picture corresponds to I picture (intra-picture) _.: ___~.
data in the MPEG standards. The end PTS (VOBU EPTS) in the VOBU 85-indicates the playback end time (end presentation time stamp (EPTS)) of the video data in the VOBU 85 containing the PCI data. The playback end time is the playback start time of the last picture in the last GOP in the VOBU 85.
The angle information (NSML AGLI) contains as many start addresses (NSML AGL C DSTA) of the angle cells at jump destinations as the number of angles as shown in FIG. 47. Each of the start addresses is represented by a logical sector-relative to the logical sector of the NV pack 86 in which the PCI data is recorded. When the angle is changed on the basis of the angle information (NSML AGLI), the angle information (NSML AGLI) contains either the start address of the VOBU in another angle block whose playback time is equal to that of the VOBU 85 in which the PCI data is recorded as shown in FIG. 48, or the start address (NSML AGL C DSTA)-of the--VOBU 85 in another angle block whose playback time is closest to the preceding one.
According to the description of the start address (NSML AGL C DSTA) of such an angle-cell, the angle is changed in a concrete example as follows. Assuming that a series of consecutive scenes where in a baseball game, the pitcher throws a ball, the batter hits the ball, and the ball lands in the stands, the change of .~.-r- .. .. ~.
_ ~ , . ,- ~ ........ , : :r.
the angle will be explained. An angle cell (ANG C#j) can be changed on a video object unit (VOBU) 85 basis as shown in FIG. 48. In FIG. 48, the video object units (VOBU) 85 are assigned numbers in the order of playback. The video object unit (VOBU#n) 85 corresponding to playback number n of an angle cell (ANG C#j) stores-the video data-for a different scene which is contemporary with or immediately preceding that for which the video data is stored in the video object unit (VOBU#n) 85 with playback number n corresponding to another angle cell (ANG C#1) or angle call (ANG C#9). It is assumed that in an angle cell (ANG C#j), VOBUs are arranged consecutively as video data used to show on the screen the whole view including the pitcher and batter and a series of actions. It is also assumed that in angle cell (ANG C#1), VOBUs are arranged consecutively as video data used to show only the batter on the screen to view the batting form of the batter, and that in angle cell (ANG C#9), VOBUs are arranged consecutively as video data used to show only the expression of the pitcher on the screen. When the user is viewing angle cell #j (ANG C#i) and changes to angle-cell #1-the moment the batter hit the ball, that is, changes to the angle at which only the batter is shown, at the moment the batter made a hit, this switches to a screen where the batter starts swinging a bat before making the hit, not .. ;--_ . . . . ... . _ .""s ,.. .: ....
~~ ~~(~~7 to a screen showing only the batter after he made a hit. Furthermore, when the user is viewing angle cell #j (ANG C#i)-and changes to angle. cell #9 the moment the batter hit the ball, that is, changes to the angle at which only the pitcher is shown, at the moment the batter made a hit, this causes the pitcher's expression at the moment the batter made a hit to appear on the screen, enabling the user to read a change in the pitcher's mental state in his expression.
Highlight information (HLI) is information for highlighting one rectangular area in a sub-picture display area. The mixing ratio-(contrast) of the color and the video of the sub-picture of the specific rectangular area in the sub-picture display area is described. As shown in FIG. 49, the highlight information is commonly valid for all sub-picture streams to be reproduced within the valid period. For instance, when the video and the sub-picture and the highlight information are mixed, a mixing picture as shown in FIG. 50 is displayed on the monitor section 6.
As shown in FIG. 51, the highlight information describes highlight general-information (HL GI) 113A, button color information table (BTN COLIT) 113B and button information table (BTNIT) 113C. As shown in FIG. 52, the button color information table (BTN COLIT) 113B describes three button color information (BTN COLI)113D, 113E, 113F, and the button information __._, :~~~. . . r. _. :a....... . ~,~..
~i 9~~77 table (BTNIT) 113C describes 36 button information IBTNI) 113I at the maximum.
For instance, as shown in FIG. 52, 36 button information (BTNI) 113I are described by three group modes composed by specifying button groups of 1 group mode made up of 36 button information, two group modes formed of -18 button information, and three group mode composed of 12 button information.
The highlight general-information (HL GI) 113A is information of the entire highlight information. As shown in FIG. 53, the highlight general-information (HL GI) 113A describes status of highlight information (HLI SS), start PTM-of HLI (HLI S PTM), end PTM of HLI
(HLI E PTM), end PTM of button select (BTM SL E PTM), mode. of button (BTM MD), button start number (BTN SN), number of valid buttons (BTN Ns)-, number of numerical select buttons (NSBTN Ns), forcedly selected button number (FSLBTN N), and forced activated button number (FACBTN N).
The status of highlight information (HLI SS) describes the status of the highlight information in corresponding PCI. For-instance, in the case of "00", the status of highlight information (HLI SS) describes no valid highlight information. In the case of "O1", the status of highlight information (HLI SS) describes different highlight from the highlight information of the VOBU. In the case of "10", the status of highlight v , v x~. . - v. y~.. . u. . . .. i'._ - ~ v .' ~~077 information (HLI SS) describes the same highlight information as the highlight information of the VOBU.
In the case of "11", the status of highlight informa-tion (HLI SS) describes the highlight information 5 containing difference from the k~ighlight information of the VOBU only from button command.
The start PTM of highlight information (HLI S PTM) describes the start PTM of-the highlight in which the corresponding highlight information becomes valid 10 (start presentation time (SPTM)). The start PTM of the highlight becomes the display start time or more of the sub-picture stream in which the highlight information becomes an object. When HLI SS is "O1", the high-light start time of highlight information which is 15 renewed during the presentation period of VOBU in which the PCI is included is described. When HLI SS is "10" or "11", the highlight start time of highlight information used continuously during the presentation period of .VOBU in which the PCI is included is 20 described.
The end PTM of highlight information (HLI E PTM) describes the end PTM of the highlight information in which the highlight information becomes invalid. The end PTM of highlight information becomes the display 25 end time or less of the sub-picture stream in which the highlight information becomes an object. When HLI SS
is "O1", the highlight termination time of highlight information which is renewed during the presentation period ofVOBU in which the PCI is included is described. When HLI SS is "10" or "11", the highlight termination time of highlight information used continu-ously during the presentation period of VOBU in which the PCI is included is described. When HLI SS is used during the still state, the end PTM of highlight information (HLI E PTM) shall-describe-(FFFFFFFFh).
End PTM of button select (BTN SL E PTM) describes the end PTM of the button select. The end PTM of the button select becomes the display end time or less of the sub-picture stream in which the highlight informa-tion becomes an object. When HLI SS is "O1", the button select termination time of highlight information which is renewed during the presentation period of VOBU
in which the PCI is included is described. When HLI SS
is "10" or "11", the button select termination time of highlight information used continuously during the presentation period of VOBU in which the PCI is included is described. When highlight information is used during the still state, the button select termination time (BTN SL E PTM) shalldescribe (FFFFFFFFh).
The mode of button (BTN MD) describes grouping of the buttons and the display type of the sub-picture corresponding to each group. For instance, the mode of button (BTN MD) describes number of button groups (BTNGR Ns), display type of sub-picture corresponding sz to the button group 1 (BTNGR1 DSPTY)-,-display type of sub-picture corresponding to the button group 2 (BTNGR2 DSPTY) and display type of sub-picture corre-sponding to the button group 3 (BTNGR3 DSPTY). The number of the button groups (BTNGR Ns)-is one group in the case of "O1", 2 groups in the case of "10", and three groups in the case of "11". The display type is wide (9/16) in the case of "O1", letter box in the case of "-10~,and pan-scan in the case of "11".
The button start number (BTN SN) describes initial button offset number in button groups. The offset number can be described in a range of-1 to 255. The button start number (BTN SN) is commonly applied to each button group.
The number of valid buttons (BTN Ns) describes the number of valid buttons in the button groups. The number of the buttons can described a range of 1 to 36 in the case of 1 of the button group, 1 to 18 in the case of 2 of the button group, and 1 to 12 in the case of 3 of the button group. The number of valid buttons (BTN Ns) is-commonly applied to-each--button group.
The number numerical select of buttons (NSBTN Ns) which can be selected by the number describes the number of the buttons which can be selected by the button number in the button groups. The number of the buttons can described 1 to 36 in the case of 1 of the button group, 1 to 18 in the case of 2 of the button ~~.~~ _. t _,. z . . _:~
group, and 1 to 12 in the case of 3 of the button group. The button start number {NSBTN Ns) is commonly applied to each button group.
The forcedly selected button number (FSLBTN N) describes the button number which is forcedly selected at the highlight start time (HLI S PTM). Even when the presentation starts during the highlight information validity period, the button number set at highlight information is to be selected. The button number can described 1 to 36 and 63 in the case of 1 of the button group, 1 to 18 and 63 in the case of 2 of the button group and 1 to 12 and 63 in the case of 3 of the button group. The forcedly selected button number (FSLBTN N) is commonly applied to each button group.
The forcedly activated button number (FACBTN N) describes the button number which is forcedly activated at the end PTM of button select (BTN SL E PTM). The button number can described 1 to 36 and 63 in the case of 1 of the button group, 1 to -18 and 63 in the case of 2 of .the button group and 1 to 12 and 63 in the case of 3 o~-the button group. The forcedly activated button number {FACBTN N) is commonly applied to each button group.
Button color information table (BTN COLIT) 113B
describes, as shown in FIG. 54, three button color information (BTN COLI)113D, 113E and 113F. The button color number {BTN COLN) is allocated from "1" in the describing sequence of the button color information (BTN COLD--113D. As shown in FIG 54, selection color information (SL COLI) 1136 and action color information (AC COLI) 113H are described in the button color information (BTN COL D -113D. .The color-and-contrast which are altered when the button is selected is described in the selection color information (SL COLI) 1136. The color and contrast which are altered when the button is activated are described in the action lp color-information (AC COLI) li3H.-- The button selection status is the status in which the selection color is displayed. At the time of this status, the user can alter the highlighted button to other button. The button action status is the status in which the action - coloris displayed and the button command is executed.
At the time of this status, the user is inhibited to alter the highlighted button to the other button.
As shown in FIG. 55, emphasis pixel-2 selection color code, emphasis pixel-2 selection color code, pattern pixel selection color code, background pixel selection color code, emphasis pixel-2 selection contrast, emphasis pixel-1-selectioncontrast, pattern pixel selection contrast, background pixel selection contrast are described in the selection color informa-tion (SL COLD 1136.
As shown in FIG. 56, emphasis pixel-2 action color code, emphasis pixel-2 action color coda, pattern pixel .::.:. :_. . ._ :_::~. . . .. ~. _.
i action color code, background pixel action color code, emphasis pixel-2 action contract, emphasis pixel-1 action contrast, pattern pixel action contrast, background pixel action contrast are described in the 5 action color information (SL COLI) 1136.
As shown in FIG. 57, 36 button information (BTNI) I13I are described in button information table (BTNIT) 113C.--The button information (BTNI) 113I can be utilized as three modes of three mode groups grouped by 10 1 group mode in which all 36 button information (BTNI)113I become valid in the describing sequence of the button information table (BTNIT), 2 group mode in which 18 units of button information (BTNI) 1131 are grouped and 3 group mode in which 12 units of button 15 information (BTNI) 113I are grouped according to the described content of the number of button groups (BTNGR Ns).- Since-the describing area of the button information (BTNI) 113I of each group mode is station ary, zero is all described in the areas in which valid 20 button information (BTNI) 113I does not exist. The button number (BTNN) is allocated from "1" in the describing sequence of the button information (BTNI) 113I in each button group.
The user number specifiable buttons in the button 25 group are the numbers of the values described from BTN #1 to NSBTN Ns.
As shown in FIG. 57, the button information (BTNI) .,~~.:..,,..~,s. =:~,._.. _ _ ._.,.
.n 9H~
~1 ~~(~~7 113I describes button position information (BTN POSI) 113J, adjacent button position information (AJBTN POSI) 1138 and button command (BTN CMD) 113L.
As shown in FIG. 58, the color numbers (1 - 3) used for the buttons and the display rectangular area on the video display screen are described in the button position information (BTN POSI) 113J. The button color number of the button (BTN COLN), start X-coordinate of the rectangular area displayed by the button (start X-coordinate), end X-coordinate of the rectangular area display by the button (end X-coordinate), start Y-coordinate of the rectangular area displayed by the button (start Y-coordinate), end Y-coordinate of the rectangular area displayed by the button and auto action mode (auto action mode) are described in the button position information (BTN POSI) 113J. The auto action mode describes whether an selection status is not maintained, or describes whether an selection status or activated state is maintained.
The adjacent button position information (AJBYN POSI) 113IC describes whether or not the button to be the button number disposed in four directions of upward, downward, rightward and leftward directions has an selection status. The button having no selection status is a button in which, when the button is moved to the button of the object, the button is immediately transferred to the action state without becoming the ~_,.- . :: ~:~,.:., ... . ;..... .. . , .: .,. . ..
~~92077 selection status. For example, the upper button number, the lower button number, the left button number and the right button number are described. It corresponds to the designation of the select key 5m.
The button command (BTN CMD) 113L describes the command to be executed when the button is activated.
A program for transferring, for example, to another selection screen or a program chain for reproducing a title is designated according to the command.
The DSI data (DSI) 115 in the DSI packet 117 shown in FIG. 43 is the navigation data used to search for a VOB unit (VOBU) 85. The DSI data (DSI) 115 contains the DSI general information (DSI GI), angle information (SML AGLI), VOB unit search information (VOBU SRI), - and the synchronizing playback information (SYNCI), as shown in FIG. 59.
The DSI information (DSI GI)contains information about the entire DSI data 115. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60, the DSI general information (DSI GI) contains the system clock reference for the NV pack (NV PCK SCR) 86. The system clockreference (NV PCR SCR) is storedin the system timeclock (STC) 54A, 58A, 60A or 62A built in each section of FIG. 1. On the basis of the STC 54A, 58A, 60A, 62A, video, audio, and sub-picture packs are decoded at the video, audio, and sub-picture decoders 58, 60, and 62 and the monitor 6 and the speaker 8 reproduce images ~..:~..:.. .'~.~, .;.:,' . -:.:....;~a:
and sound, respectively. The DSI general information (DSI GI) contains-the-start address -(NV PCR LBN) of the NV pack (NV PCK) 86 containing the DSI data expressed by the number of logical sectors-(RLSN), relative to the first logical sector in the VOB set (VOBS) 82 containing the DSI, and the address (VOBU EA) of the last pack in the VOB unit (VOBU) 85 containing the DSI
data expressed by the number of logical sectors (RLSN), relative to the first logical sector in the VOB
unit (VOBU) 85.
Furthermore, the DSI general information (DSI GI) contains the end address (VOBU IP EA) of the V pack (V PCK) 88 containing-thelast data item for the first I picture in the VOB unit (VOBU) expressed by the number of logical sectors (RLSN), relative to the first logical sector in the VOB unit (VOBU) 85 containing the DSI data, and the identification number (VOBU IP EA) of the VOB 83 containing the DSI and the identification number (VOBU C IDN) of- the cell-84 in which the DSI
data is recorded.
Like the angle information (NSML AGLI) in PCI 113, the angle information (SML AGLI) contains as many start addresses (SML AGL C DSTA) of angle cells at jump destinations as the number of angles, as shown in FIG. 61. Each of the start addresses is represented by a logical sector relative to the logical sector in the NV pack 86 in which the DSI 115 is recorded. When the ~~ 9~D~77 angle is changed on the basis of the angle information (SML AGLI), the angle information (SML AGLI) contains the start address of the cell 84 in another angle block after the playback time of the VOBU 85 in which the DSI
data 115 is recorded, as shown in FIG. 62.
When the angle information (SML AGLI) in DSI data 113 is used, the angle is changed, cell by cell, whereas PCI can be changed on the basis of a video object unit (VOBU) 85. Namely, consecutive changes of the angle are described in the angle information (SML AGLI)=in DSI data115, whereas discontinuous changes of the angle are described in the angle information (SML AGLI) in PCI data 113. In the above example of baseball, the angle is changed as follows.
It is assumed that angle cell #j (AGL C#j) 84 contains a stream of video data for a series of scenes where the pitcher throws a ball, the batter hits the ball, and the ball lands in the stands, filmed from the infield, and that angle cell #1 contains a stream of video data for a series of the same scenes filmed from the outfield. Furthermore, angle cell #9 is assumed to be a stream of video data as to how the team to which the batter belongs looks in connection with a series of the above scenes. When the user is viewing angle cell #j (AGL C#j)and changes to ,angle cell #1 the instant the batter made a hit, that is, changes to a scene from the outfield the instant the batter hit the ball, he or she ~o can switch to consecutive scenes where the ball is flying closer to the outfield after the batter hit the ball. Furthermore, when the user is viewing angle cell #j (AGL C#i)-andchanges to anglecell #9 the moment the ball landed in the stands, that is, changes to an angle at which how the batter's team looks is shown on the screen, the team cheering for the home run and the baseball manager's expression are displayed on the screen. When the angle information (NSML AGLI) in PCI
data 113 andthe angle information (SML AGLI) in DSI
data 115 are used, it is apparent that a different scene is played back.
The search information (VOBU SI)in VOBU 85 contains information used to identify the first address in a cell 84 as shown in FIG. 63. Specifically, the search information (VOBU SI) in VOBU 85 contains the start addresses {A FWDn) of +1 to +20, +60, +120, and +240 VOB units (VOBU) 85 as forward addresses (FWDANn) in the order of playback on the basis of the VOB unit (VOBU) 85 containing the DSI 115 as shown in FIG. 35A, the forward addresses being expressed by the number of logical sectors, relative to the first logical sector in the VOB unit.
Each forward address {FWDANn) contains 32 bits as shown in FIG. 64. Bit number 29 (b29) to bit number 0 (b0) are assigned to its address, for example, the address of forward address 10 (FWDA10). At the head of ..-. .-~ ~ __. E.., .. ._.. . . __. ~_.~_"..~,._- _ __ ~~ ~3~C77 ~l the forward address (FWDANn), a flag (V FWD Existl) indicating whether the video data exists in the video object unit (VOBU) 85 corresponding to the forward address (FWDANn) and a flag (V FWD Exist2) indicating whether the video data exists in the video object unit between the current address and the forward address (FWDAn). Specifically, VFWD Existl corresponds to bit number (b31). When this flag is at 0, this means that there is no video data in the video object unit (VOBU) specified by the address (FWDANn) written in bit number 29 to bit number 0. When this flag is at 1, this means that there is video data in the video object unit (VOBU) specified by the forward address (FWDANn) written in bit number 29 to bit number 0. For example, if forward address 10 (FWD10) has video data, the flag will be up (1) in V FWD Existl of the 31st bit.
If the address has no video data, the flag will be down (0) in V FWD Existl of the 3lst,bit. Furthermore, V FWD Epist2corresponds to bit number (b30). When this flag is at 0, this means that there is video data in none of the video object units between the current address and the forwarding address (FWDAn).
Specifically; V FWD Exixt 1 corresponds to bit number (b31). When this flag is at 0, this means that there is no video data in the video object units (VOBU) 85 between the forward address (FWDANn) written in bit number 29 to bit number 0 and current address. When _. :..:_ .:;;_. , , - : _ . - :~ >... , this flag is at 1, this means that there is video data in at least one of the video object units (VOBU) 85 between them. For example, if there is video data in a plurality of video object units 85 between forward address-1 and forward address 9, the flag will be up (1) in V FWD Exist2 of the 30th, bit-._Ifthe address has no video data, the flag will be down (0) in V FWD Exist2 of the 30th bit.
Furthermore, the VOBU search information (VOBU SI) containsthe start addresses (A BWDn) of -1 to -20, -60, -120, and -240 VOB units (VOBU) 85 as backward addresses (BWDA) in the reverse order of playback on the basis of the VOB unit (VOBU) 85 containing the DSI
as shown in FIG. 63, the backward addresses being expressed by the number of logical sectors, relative to the first logical sector in the VOB unit 85.
Each backward address (FWDANn) contains 32 bits as shown in FIG. 65. Bit number 29 (b29) to bit number 0 (b0) are assigned to its address, for example, the ZO address of backward address 10 (BWDA10). At the head of the backward address (BWDANn), a flag (V BWD Existl) indicating whether the video data exists in the video object unit (VOBU) 85 corresponding to the backward address (BWDANn) and a flag (V BWD Exist2) indicating whether the video data exists in the video object units between the backward address (BWDAn) and the current address. Specifically, V BWD Existl corresponds to bit ,~ _ d.: _ ::_ _. , :.. .. ,.. - :.
number (b31). When this flag is at 0, this means that there is no video data in the video object unit (VOBU) 85 specified by the address (BWDANn) written in bit number 29 to bit number 0. When this flag is at 1, this means that there is video--data in the video object unit (VOBU) specified by the address (BWDANn) written in bit number 29 to bit number 0. For example, if backward address 10 (BWDA10) has video data, the flag will be up (1) in V BWD Existl of the 31st-bit.If the address has no video data, the flag will be down (0) in V BWD Existl of the 31st bit. Furthermore, V BWD Exist2 corresponds to bit number (b30). When this flag is at 0, this means that there is video data in none of the video object units between the backward address (BWDANn) written in bit number 29 to bit number 0 and the current address. When this flag is at 1, this means that there is video data in at least one of the video object units (VOBU) 85. For example, if there is video data in video object units between the backward address 10 (BWDA10) and the current address 0, the flag will be up (1) in V BWD-Exist2 of the 30th bit. If the address has no video data, the flag will be down (0) in V BWD Exist2 of the 30th bit.
The synchronizing information (SYNCI) contains address information on the sub-pictures and audio data reproduced in synchronization with the playback start time of the video data in the VOB unit (VOBU) 85 _.v ~~::_:.,._ ~:.-.....
containing the DSI data. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 66, the start address (A SYNCA) of the target audio-pack (A PCK) is expressed by the number of logical sectors (RLSN), relative to the NV pack (NV PCK) 86-in which DSI data 115 is recorded. When there are more than one audio stream (8 audio streams maximum), as many pieces of the synchronizing information (SYNCI) as there are audio streams are written. Furthermore, the synchronizing information 1~ (SYNCI) contains the address (SP SYNCA) of the NV pack (NV PCK) 86of theVOB unit (VOBU) 85 containing the target audio pack (SP PCK) 91, the address being expressed by the number of logical sectors (RLSN), relative to the NV pack (NV PCK) 86 in which DSI 115 is recorded. When there are more than one sub-picture stream.(32 sub-picture streams maximum), as many pieces of the synchronizing information (SYNCI) as there are sub-picture streams are written.
A sub-picture unit composed of sub-picture data of 2~ a plurality of sub-picture packets will be explained by referring to FIG.--67. The sub-picture unit as data (e.g., caption) of still pictures corresponding to several tens of screens can be recorded in 1 GOP. The sub-picture unit is composed of a sub-picture unit header (SPUR), a pixel data formed of run-length data (PXD) and display control sequence table (DCSQT).
As shown in FIG. 68, size of sub-picture unit s~.
~ 19077 (SPDSZ) and start address of display control sequence table (SPDCSQTA) are described in the sub-picture unit header (SPUH).
As shown in FIG. 69, display control sequence 5 (DCSQ) is described in a lapse time sequence in the display control sequence table (DCSQT).
As shown in FIG. 70, start address of following display control sequence (SPNDCSQA) and at least one of display control command (SPDCCMD) are described in each 10 display control sequence (DCSQ).
The display control command (SPDCCMD) is composed of set command of forcedly display start timing of pixel data (FSTA DSP), set command of display start timing of pixel data (STA DSP), set command of display 15 end timing of pixel data (STP DSP), set command of color code of pixel data (SET COLOR),-set command of contrast ratio of pixel-data and video (SET CONTR), set command of display area of pixel data (SET DAREA), set command of display start address of pixel data 20 (SET DSPXA), set command of color change and contrast change of pixel data (CHG COLCON), and end command of display control command (CMD END).
The command (STA DSP) is a command for designating the display start of the sub-picture data, and ~25 described by offset PTM from PTM described in the sub-picture packet including the sub-picture unit header {start PTM). The command (STP DSP) is a command for ,_.-,:..
~1~~07~
designating thedisplay stop of the sub-picture data, and described in the offset PTM from the PTM described in the sub-picture packet including the sub-picture unit header (stop PTM).
This start PTM and stop PTM are delayed by arbitrary predetermined time from the PTM of the video data and the audio data regenerated in the same time zone and set.
The system processor section 54 shown in FIG. 1 has a packet transmit dispose section 200 for determin-ing the type of the packet and transmitting the data in the packet to each decoder. This packet transmit dispose section 200 is composed, as shown in FIG. 71, a memory interface section (memory I/F section) 191, a stuffing length detect section 192, a pack header end address calculation section 193, a pack classification judgement,section 194, a packet data transmit control section 195, and decoder interface section (decoder I/F
section) 196.
The memory I/F section 191 outputs pack data from the data RAM section 56 to the stuffing length detect section 192, the pack classification judgement section 194, the packet data transmit control section 195 and the decoder I/F section 196 via a data bus.
The stuffing length detect section 192 detects how many byte the stuffing length in the pack header 120 in the pack data supplied from the memory I/F section 191 ~~~~07~
contains, and outputs the detected result to the pack header end address calculation section 193.
The pack header end address calculation section 193 calculates the pack header end address according to the stuffing length supplied from the stuffing length detect section 192, and outputs the calculated result to the pack classification judgement section 194 and the packet data transmit control section 195.
The pack classification judgement section 194 judges any of the video pack 88, the audio pack 91, the sub-picture pack 90 and the NV pack 86 according to the content of the 4-byte data supplied next to the address of the pack data supplied from the memory I/F section 191 in accordance with the pack header end address supplied from the pack header end address calculation section 193, and outputs the judged result to the packet data transmit control section 195.
The packet data transmit control section 195 judges the destination and the packet start address in 2D response to the pack header end address supplied from the pack header end address calculation section 193 and the judged result of the pack classification supplied from the pack classification judgement section 194, and further judges the packet length in the packet header 121 of the pack data supplied.- Further, the packet data transmit control section 195 supplies a signal indicating the destination as a transmit control signal ~~'>,: ~- _. _. .. _:_~ ., :. .,.~.._". :..
~1~~071 ~8 to the decoder I/F section 196, and supplies the packet end address from the packet start address to the memory I/F section 191.
The decoder I/F section 196 outputs the video data, the audio data, the sub-picture data as packet data including the packet header 121 supplied under the control of the packet data transmit control section 195 from the memory IJF section 191 to corresponding decoder sections 58, 60, 62, or outputs navigation data and computer data as packet data to the data RAM
section 56.
The packet transmit dispose section 200 will be explained.
The pack data read from the data RAM section 56 is supplied to the stuffing length detect section 192, the pack classification judgement section 194, the packet data transmit control section 195 and the decoder I/F
section 196 via the memory I/F section 191.
Thus, the stuffing length is detected by the stuffing length detect section 192, and the data indi-eating the stuffing length is output to the pack header end address calculation section 193.
The pack header end address calculation section 193 calculates the pack header end address according to the stuffing length supplied, and supplies the pack header end address to the pack classification judgement section 194 and the packet data transmit control . __ ,...: ;. e':'~ - i~ ' =,t,~. ._ ~;- ~ - .. _ u;: ~..~ . . , .._,.
section 195.
The pack classification judgement section 194 judgesany of the NV pack 86, the video pack 88, the auto pack 91 of-Dolby AC3, the audio pack 91 of linear PCM and thesub-picture pack 90 according to the con-tent of the data of 4 to 6 byte supplied next to the address in accordance with the supplied pack header end address, and supplies the judged result to the packet data transmit control section 195.
Specifically, when the stream ID of 1 byte indicating the private stream 2 is supplied, it is judged as the NV pack 86. The video pack 88 is judged according to the stream ID of 1 byte indicating the video stream. Any of the audio pack 91 of the Dolby AC3, the audio pack 91 and the sub-picture pack 90 is judged according to the stream ID of one byte indicating the private stream 1.
When the stream ID is the private stream 1, the audio pack of the linear PCM, the audio pack of the Dolby AC3 or the sub-picture stream is judged according to the substream ID continued to the packet header 121, and its stream number is judged.
The packet data transmit control section 195 judges the destination and the packet start address in response to the judged result of the supplied pack classification and the pack header end address, and further judges the packet length in the packet header ___. _._.~ ~_-,.v:u _ .. : .~... . : .;:~ .. ;., .s~._:-« :.."
ao 121 of the supplied pack data. Thus, the packet data transmit control section 195 supplies the signal indi-Gating the destination as the transmit control signal to the decoder I/F section 196, and supplies the packet end address-from the packet start address to the memory I/F section 191.
Therefore, the substantially valid packet data is supplied-from the memory I/F section 191 to the decoder I/F section 196 via the data bus, and then transferred to the decoders 58, 60, 62 or the data RAM section 56 as the destination.
Specifically, the packet data of the video data is transferred to the video decoder section 58, the packet data of the audio data is transferred to the audio decoder section 60, and the packet data of the sub-picture data is transferred-to the sub-picture decoder section 62.
In this case, since the pack data has a constant length, the storage state of the data RAM section 56 and hence the start address has a constant interval.
Accordingly, the head of the pack data in the data RAM
section 56 is always stored by the address of the same interval, and the pack data is not address managed, but only the pack number may be managed.
in the step of judging the classification of the data, in the case of the PCI data and the DSI data as the NV data indicating the reproduced position of the :: a , o-... . . , ;;;"
~i9~~77 video data, the NV data is not transferred to the decoder, but stored in the data RAM section 56. The NV
data is referred according to the system CPU section 50, if necessary, and utilized when the specific repro-duction of the video data is executed. In this case, the PCI data and the DSI data are identified according to the substream ID imparted to the PCI data and the DSI data.
When the reproduction of one cell is finished, cell information to be reproduced next is obtained from the reproducing sequence information in the program chain data, and similarly continuously reproduced.
The above-described sub-picture decoder section 62 shown in FIG. 1 has a decoder 62B for decoding the sub-picture data supplied from the system processor section 54, and a highlight processor section 62C for highlighting the sub-picture data after decoding by the decoder 62B. The highlight processor section 62C
highlights in response to the X-, Y-coordinate values indicating the rectangular area for displaying the selection item as highlight information supplied from the system CPU section 50, color code, highlight color/contrast value.
The decoder 62B expands the pixel data compressed by the run-length compression as the sub-picture data in response to the highlight pixel, the pattern pixel, the background pixel, etc.
N ., ~..: ,. - :.:a. ., ..:: ... ~ ~ . . .. -~1 ~'Z077 The highlight processor section 62C is composed, as shown in FIG. 72, a highlight area setting/judgement section 180, a default color/contrast setter 818, a highlight color/contrast setter 182, a selector 183 and a color pallet register 184.
The highlight area setting/judgement section 180 judges the designated highlight area according to the X-, Y-coordinate values indicating the rectangular area (designated highlight area) representing an selection item by the system CPU section 50 and the X-, Y-coordinate values obtained by raster scanning, i.e., pixel data X-, Y-coordinate values, outputs a switching signal indicating a highlight zone, and supplies its output to the selector 183.
The default color/contrast setter 181 sets the display color and the contrast of the default of each pixel included in the sub-picture data.
The highlight color/contrast setter 182 sets the highlight color and contrast values by the system CPU 50.
The selector 183 selectively outputs the display color and contrast of the default from the default color/contrast setter 181 to the color pallet register 184, or outputs the color and the contrast at the time o~-the highlight from the highlight color/contrast setter 182 to the color pallet register 184.
The color pallet register 184 outputs the signal ..
~=3: .. ., x 2192~J77 responsive to the color and the contrast supplied from the selector 183.
Therefore, when out of the highlight area is judged by the highlight area setting/judgement section 180, the selector 183 receives the display color and the contrast of the default of -each pixel data from the default color/contrast setter 181, outputs them to the color-pallet register 184, and outputs the color signal from the color pallet register 184 to a D/A and data reproducing section 64.
When the highlight area is judged by the high-light area setting/judgement section 180, the selector 183 receives the display color and the contrast at the time of the highlight of each pixel data from the highlight color/contrast setter 182, outputs it the the color-pallet register 184, and outputs the color signal from the color pallet register 184 to the D/A and data reproducing section 64.
The reproducing process of the menu will be explained by using an optical disk 10 having a logic format shown in FIGS. 6 to 66 by referring to FIG. 1.
In FIG. 1, arrows with solid lines between the blocks indicate data buses, and arrows with broken lines indicate a control bus.
In the optical disk apparatus shown in FIG. l, when a power source is turned on and the optical disk 10 is inserted, the system CPU 50 reads the initial _ ..~:.t~S' . .. ~. , _ program from the system ROM and RAM section 52, and operates the disk drive section 30. Accordingly, the disk drive section 30 starts reading from a lead-in area 27, and reads volume and file structure area for specifying the volume and the file structure according to ISO-9660 subsequently to the lead-in area 27.
Specifically, the system CPU 50 applies a read command to the disk drive section 30 to read the volume and the file structure area 70 recorded--at a predetermined position of the optical disk l0 set to the disk drive section 30, reads the contents of the volume and file structure area 70, and temporarily stores the contents in the data RAM section 56 via the system processor section 56. The system CPU 50 extracts information such as recording position, recording capacity, size, etc., and management information as necessary informa-tion for the other management via a pass table and directory record stored in the data RAM section 56, transfers them and stores them at a predetermined position the system ROM and RAM section 52.
Then, the system CPU section 50 acquires a video manager 71 composed of a plurality of files starting from "0" of the file number by referring to the information of the recording position and the recording capacity of each file from the,system ROM and RAM
section 52. Specifically, the system CPU section 50 applies the read command to the disk drive section 30 ;0. _ . ~ . ~wL a _, , .,~. , . ~ ~. _.» ..,~:..:
X1'82077 by referring to the information of the recording position and the recording capacity of each file obtained from the system ROM and RAM section 52, obtains the position and the size of the plurality 5 files-for composing the video manager 71 present on a route directory, reads the video manager 71, and stores them-inthe data RAM section 56 via the system processor section 54.
Thereafter, the system CPU section 50, as shown in 10 FIGS. 73 and 74, the number of titles in the optical disk 10, the number of chapters of each title (number of programs), the number of audio streams of each title, the language of the audio stream, the number of sub-picture streams of each title and the language of 15 the sub-picture stream.
Specifically, the system CPU section 50 searches the title search pointer table (TT SRPT) 79 of the second table of the video manager 71 (Step S51). The system CPU 50 acquires the total number of the titles 20 in the optical disk 10 according to the number of the title-search pointers described in the information of the title search pointer table (TT SRPTI) 92 in the title search pointer table (TT SRPT) 79 (Step S52).
The system CPU acquires the number of chapters 25 (number of programs) of each title according to the number of part-of-titles (PTT Ns) as the number of chapters (number of programs) described in each title ::,._ . ..'am .. - o,.: -..":,...d. .. ;..-.~":. _._.~. . _x s_y:::,_ ...
_..'...
search pointer (TT SRP) 93-in the title search pointer table (TT SRPT) 79 (Step S53). -.
The system CPU 50 searches the video title set part-of-title search pointer table (VTS PTT SRPT) 99 in the video title set information (VTSI) 94 of the first table of the video title set 72 described in each title search pointer (TT $RP) 93 (Step S54). The system CPU
50 acquires the number of audio streams of each title according to the number of the -audio streams described in the table (VTS PTT $RPT) 99 of each video title-set -72, and acquires the number of-the sub-picture streams of each title according to the,number of the sub-picture streams (VTS SPST Ns)-(Step S55).
The system CPU 50 acquires the language of the audio streams of each title according to the language code of the auto of each audio stream described in the audio stream attribute (VTS AST ATR) of the table (VTS PTT SRPT) 99 of each video--title set 72, and acquires the language of the audio streams of each title (Step S56).
The system CPU section 50 acquires the sub-picture streams of each title according to the language code of the sub-picture of the sub-picture streams described in the sub-picture stream attribute (VTS SPST ATR) of the table (VTS PTT SRPT) 99 of each video title set 72 (Step S57).
The system CPU section 50 also searches the video _ .~.__ __~._ -n, r.~~~;.J, _~. .i~~. ,_. .-~ .,~....Y. .u-«.:-, . ..:
manager menu PGCI unit table (VMGM PGCI UT) 81 of the fourth table in the video manager information (VMGM) 75 of the video manager 71 (Step S58). By this search, the video manager menu PGCI unit search pointer (VMGM) LU SRP) $1B describing the same language code as the language set to the reproducing apparatus (Step S59).
When the video manager menu PGCI unit search pointer (VMGM LU SRP) S1Bdescribingthe same language code is searched, the system CPU section 50 searches the menu ID described together with the category (VMGM PGC CAT) of the program chain of each video manager menu of the video manager menu PGC information search pointer (VMGM) PGCI SRP)81E inthe video manager menu language unit (VMGM) LU) 81C corresponding to the pointer (VMGM LU SRP) 81B (Step S60), judges whether or not the main menu as the route menu by the search exists, and judges whether or not the title menu (video title set menu) exists (Step S61).
When the main menu exists, the system CPU section 50 reads the contents of the corresponding VMGM program chain information (VMGM PGCI SA) by the start address of the VMGM program chain information (VMGM PGCI) 81F
described in one of the video manager menu PGC informa-tion search pointer (VMGM PGCI SRP) 81E describing the menu ID of the route menu, and stores the start address (C FVOBU SA) of the head video object unit (VOBU) 85 ~_y ~...~:.~.~ _ ,. ,.:-:~ ~ ... ... .._.'f-=,.~~,_ ;-~19~077 described in the VMGM program chain information (VMGM PGCI) 81F in the memory table 56A as the start address of the main menu (Step S62).
When the title menu exists, the system CPU section 50 reads the contents of thecorresponding VMGM program chain information (VMGM PGCI) 81F according to the parameter (VMGM PGCI SA) by the-start address of the VMGM program chain information (VMGM PGCI) 81F described in one of the video manager menu PGC information search pointer (VMGM PGCI SRP) 81E describing, the menu ID of the title menu, and stores the start address (C FVOBU SA) of the head video object chain information (VOBU) 85 described in the corresponding VMGM program chain information (VMGM PGCI) 81F in the--memory table 56A as the start address of the title menu (Step S63).
The system CPU section SO searches the video title set menu PGCI unit table (VTSM PGCI UT) 111_ in the video title set information (VTSI) 94 of the first table of each video title set 72 (Step S64). By this search the video title set menu PGCI unit search pointer (VTSM LVJ SRP) 111B describing the same language code as the language set to the. reproducing apparatus (Step S65).
When the video title set menu PGCI unit search pointer (VTSM LU SRP) 111B describing the same language code is searched, the system CPU section 50 searches the menu ID descried together with the category ... .~» .. .. ,..~.".,.. d:L. .."_.. .. . , . r, ~ . . ..: ~ .a..: ~s. . . ,.
{VTSM PGC CAT) of the program chain of each video title set menu of the video title set menu PGC information search pointer (VTSM PGCI $RP) 111E-in the video title set menu language unit (VTSM LU) 111C corresponding to the pointer (VTSM LU SRP),-111B-Step S66), judges whether or not the sub-picture menu, the audio menu, the angle menu, the chapter (program) menu exist by this search, and judges whether or not the title menu exists (Step S67).
When these menus exist, the system CPU section 50 reads the contents of the corresponding VTSM program chain information (VTSM PGCI) 111F by the parameter (VTSM PGCI SA) by the start-address of the VTSM program chain information (VTSM PGCI-) 111F described in one of the video title set menu PGC information search pointer {VTSM PGCI SRP) 111E describing-=the menu ID, and stores the start address (C FVOBU SA)of the head-video object unit (VOBU) 85 described in the VTSM program chain information (VTSM PGCI) 111F in the memory table 56A as the start address of the corresponding menu (Step S68).
As described above, the start addresses of the sub-picture menu, the audio menu, the angle menu, the chapter (program) menu of each video title set 72 are stored in the memory table 56A.
As a result, as shown in FIG. 75, the start address corresponding to each menu corresponding to the language set to the reproducing apparatus is stored in _>. _ . . ..-:~~..~.= -.,-~. a ::v~ :.."~ . '-_. . _.:~._,. ..
~i92077 the memory table 56A.
Therefore, when the menu key 5k of the remote controller 5 is closed, the system CPU section 50 judges the_-reproduction of the main menu, and judges 5 whether or..not the main menu exists. "As the result of the judgement, if the presence of the main menu is judged, the system CPU section 50 reads the start address (C FVOBU-SA) of the head video object unit (VOBU) 85 stored corresponding to the main menu of the 10 memory table 56A, reads the data of the main menu corresponding to the address from the area correspond-ing to the,video object set (VMGM VOB$) 76 for the video-manager menu (VMGM) 75 of the optical disk 10, and reproduces it. The reproduced data is input to the 15 data RAM section 56 via the system processor section 54. The data cell 84 is applied to the video decoder section 58, the audio decoder-section 60 and the sub-picture decoder section 62 based on the reproducing time information, decoded, signal-converted by the D/A
20 and data-reproducing section 64, and the image of the main menu as shown in FIG. 76 on the monitor 6, and the voice is reproduced from the speaker 8.
When the title key 51 of the remote controller 5 is closed, or the "1" key corresponding to the title is 25 closed in the state that the main menu is reproduced, or at the time of normal reproducing, the system CPU
section 50 judges the reproduction of the tile menu, :.. ~z. ~.~~ ~:..~...... ,....,..n.,:~.
~19~~~7 and judges whether or not the title menu exists. As a result of the judgement, if the presence of the title is judged, the system CPU section 50 reads the start address (C FVOBU SA) of the head video object unit (VOBU) 85 stored corresponding to the title menu of the memory table 56A, reads the data of the title menu corresponding to the address from the area correspond-ing to the video object set (VMGM VOBS) 76 for the video manager menu (VMGM) 75 of the optical disk 10, and reproduces it. The reproduced data is input to the data RAM section 56 via the system processor section 54. The data cell 84 is applied to the video decoder section 58, the audio decoder section 60 and the sub-picture decoder section 62 based on the reproducing time information, decoded, signal-converted by the D/A
and data reproducing section 64, and the image of the title-menu as shown in FIG. 77A on the monitor 6 is reproduced and the voice is reproduced from the speaker 8.
When the "2" key corresponding to the chapter is closed in the state that the main menu is reproduced, or the title is selected by the normal reproduction, and then the system CPU section 50 judges the reproduc-tion of the chapter menu corresponding to the title selected at present, and judges whether or not the chapter menu exists. As the result of the judgement, if the presence of the chapter menu is judged, the :T -~-.'. ....."~: - ._ . _ .-.:. .. ~ .~~-,a. z .::,.-_..~.,..
~19~Q77 system CPU section 50 reads. the start address (C FVOBU SA) of the head video object unit (VOBU) 84 stored corresponding to the chapter menu of the memory table 56A, reads the data of the chapter menu corre-sponding to the address from the areacorresponding to the video object set (VTSM VOBS) 96 for the video title set menu (VTSM) of the optical disk 10, and reproduces it. The reproduced data is input to the data RAM
section 56 via the system processor section 54. The data cell 84 is applied to the video decoder section 58, the audio decoder section 60 and the sub-picture decoder section 62 based on the reproducing time information, decoded, and signal-converted by the D/A
and data reproducing section 64, and the image of the chapter menu as shown in FIG. 77B on the monitor 6 is reproduced, and the voice is reproduced from the speaker 8.
When the "3" key corresponding to the audio is closed in the state that the main menu is reproduced, 2Q or the title is selected by the normal reproduction, and then the system CPU section 50 judges the reproduc-tion of the audio menu corresponding to the title selected at present, and judges whether or not the audio menu exists. As the result of the judgement, if the presence of the audio menu is judged, the system CPU section 50 reads the start address (C FVOBU SA) of the head video object unit (VOBU) 84 stored corresponding ii ~, _ .~ .' 4~ 7 .. _bas. ,..';kie~-' ryx.-?,..,. . . e...
to the audio menu of the memory,table 56A, reads the data of the audio menu corresponding to the address from the area corresponding to the video object set (VTSM VOBS)96 for the video-title set menu (VTSM) of the optical disk 10, and reproduces it. The reproduced data is input to the data RAM section 56 via the system processor section 54. The data cell 84 is applied to the video decoder section 58, the audio decoder section 60 and thesub-picture decoder section 62 based on the reproducing time information, decoded, and signal-converted by the D/A and data reproducing section 64, and the image of the chapter menu as shown in FIG. 77C
on the monitor 6 is reproduced, and the voice is reproduced from the speaker 8.
When the "4" key corresponding to the sub-picture is closed in the state that the main menu is reproduced, or the title is selected by the normal reproduction, and then the system CPU section 50 judges the reproduction of the sub-picture menu corresponding to the title selected at present, and judges whether or not the sub-picture menu exists. As the result of the judgement, if the presence of the sub-picture menu is judged, the system CPU section 50 reads the start address (C FVOBU SA) of the head video object unit (VOBU) 84 stored corresponding to the sub-picture menu of the memory table 56A, reads the data of the sub-picture menu corresponding to the address from the area .~.~ = n:,. .,.: ;,.-z-x. .., .:_ .,.-,.:.
corresponding to the video object set (VTSM VOBS) 96 for the video title set menu (VTSM) of the optical disk 10, and reproduces it. The reproduced data is input to the data RAM section 56 via the system processor section 54. The data cell 84 isapplied to the video decoder section 58, the audio decoder section 60 and the sub-picture decoder section 62 based on the reproducing time information, decoded, and signal-converted by the D/A and data reproducing section 64, and the image of the chapter menu as shown in FIG. 77D
on the monitor 6 is reproduced, and the voice is reproduced-from the speaker 8.
When the "5" key corresponding to the angle is closed in the state that the main menu is reproduced, or the title is selected by the normal reproduction, and then the system CPU section 50 judges the reproduc-tion of the angle menu corresponding to the title selected at present, and judges whether or not the angle menu exists. As the result of the judgement, if the presence of the angle menu is judged, the system CPU section 50 reads the start address (C FVOBUfSA)-of the head video object unit (VOBU) 84 stored corresponding to the angle menu of the memory table 56A, reads the data of the angle menu corresponding to the address from the area corresponding to the video object set (VTSM YOBS) 96 for the video title set menu (VTSM) of the optical disk 10, and reproduces it. The ~ P ~~ ~":~ Y e.... a . ... ::. [ ~' n' ,.
reproduced data is input to the data RAM section 56 via the system processor section 54. The data cell 84 is applied to-the video decoder section 58, the audio decoder section 60 and the sub-picture decoder section 62 based on. the reproducing time information, decoded, and signal-converted by the D/A and data reproducing section 64, and the image of the chapter menu as shown in FIG. 77E on the monitor 6 is reproduced, and the voice is reproduced-from the speaker 8.
Therefore, since the system CPU section 50 can stores the position data of the acquired each menu in the menu table 56A in the data RAM 56, necessary menu can be easily reproduced by using the same.
The system CPU 50 sets the parameters for repro-during thevidao manager menu to each video decoder section 58, each audio decoder section 60 and each sub-picture decoder section 62 based on the attribute information acquired for the number of-streams of the video, the audio and the sub-picture and the attribute information for the video manager menu described in the information management table (VMGI MAT) 78 of the video manger (VMGI) 75.
The process of the case ofreproducing the above-described menu will be described in detail by referring to the flowchart shown in FIG. 78.
The start address of the initial VOBU in the cell as the start address corresponding to the menu to be ;~, ~,_..
2~ ~z~~~
reproduced and the PGC number, i.e., the cell number are stored in the system ROM and RAM section 52 (Step S1).
When the preparation for reading the video title set is arranged, a read command is applied from the system CPU section 50 to the disk drive section 30, and the optical disk 10 is sought by the disk drive section 30 based on the above-described start address (Step S2). The cell regarding the designated program chain (PGC) are sequentially read from the optical disk 10 according to the read command, and sent to the data RAM
section 56 via the system CPU section 50 and the system processor section 54 (Step S3). The sent data is stored as the pack from the navigation pack 85 of the heat pack of the video object unit (VOBU) 85 as shown in FIG. 8 in the data RAM section 56. Thereafter, the packet data of the video--pack 8$, the audio pack 91 and the sub-picture pack 90 of the video object unit (VOBU) are transferred by the packet transmit dispose section 200 to the video- decoder section 58, the audio decoder section 60 and the sub-picture decoder section 62, and the PCI data and the DSI data as the packet data of the navigation pack 86 are transmitted to the data RAM
section 56 (Step S4).
In this case, the system CPU section 50 judges the highlight information (the contents of FIGS. 49 to 58 described above) corresponding -to the display button according to the PCI data stored-in the data RAM
section 56 (Step S5).
Specifically, the system CPU section 50 judges the rectangular area of the button at each button, the display color and the contrast value of the pixel data before selecting in the case that the button is the selection button, the display color and the contrast value of the pixel data after selecting, the display color and the contrast value ofthe pixel data before activation in the case that the button is the action button, and the display color and the contrast value of-the pixel data after the activation, and stores them in the data RAM section 56. As the pixel data, highlight pixels l, 2 pattern pixel, background pixel are pre-pared, and the corresponding display colors and the contrast values are prepared.
As described above, the system CPU section 50 outputs X- and Y-coordinate values indicating the rectangular area corresponding to each button stored in the data RAM section 56 to the highlight area setting/
judgement section 180 of the highlight processor section 62C, and outputs the highlight color and the contrast value responsive to the highlight information corresponding to the scanning position to the highlight color/contrast setter 182 of the highlight processor section 62C (Step 56).
Thus, the highlight area setting/judgement section .. v .. . m,af . L3 . ,. ~ a: -... ,~' ~ .~,. ~ ,.: ~.- ~: a'1,.1 " . .
180 judges the designated highlight area according to the X-, Y-coordinate values indicating the rectangular area (designated highlight area) displayed by the selection item by the system CPU section 50 and the X-and Y-coordinate values obtained,the,raster scanning, i.e., pixel data B-, Y-coordinate values, and supplies the switching signal indicating-the highlight section to the selector 183 (Step S7) The highlight color/contrast setter 182 sets the highlight color and contrast value by the system CPU
section 50, in response to the X- and Y-coordinate values obtained by raster scanning (Step S8).
As described above, the selector 183 selectively outputs the display color and contrast of the default from the default color/contrast setter 181 to the color pallet register 181 in response to the switching signal from the highlight area setting/judgement section 180 or outputs the color and the contrast at the time of the highlight from the highlight colorlcontrast setter 182 to the color pallet register 184 (Step S9).
The color pallet register 184 outputs the signal responsive to-the color and the contrast supplied from the selector 183 (Step S10).
As a result, when out of the highlight area is judged by the highlight area setting/judgement section 180, the selector 183 receives the display color and the contrast of the default of each pixel from the .::~F:., _~-. :... ... ... . ....._.. ,.~, ._ _:._ default color/contrast setter 181, outputs them to the color pallet register 184 and outputs the color signal from the color pallet register 184 to the D/A and data reproducing section 64.
When the highlight are is judged by the highlight area setting/judgement section 180, the selector 183 receives the display color and the contract at the time of the highlight of each pixel data from the highlight color/contrast setter 182, outputs them to the color pallet register 184, and outputs the color signal from the color pallet register 184 to the D/A and data reproducing section 64.
As a result, the sub-picture data of the pixel data after decoding is altered at the color and the contrast in response to the highlight information, and supplied to the image mixing section 64A (refer to FIG. 1) in the D/A and data reproducing section 64 shown in FIG. 1.
Therefore, the video data decoded by the video decoder section 58 is supplied to the image mixing section 64A in the D/A and data reproducing section 64, decoded by the decoder 62B in the sub-picture decoder section 62, and supplied to the image mixing section 64A in the D/A and data reproducing section 64 via the highlight processor section 62C. Thus, the video data and the sub-picture data are mixed by the image mixing section 64A, and the mixing picture is displayed on the loo monitor section 6.
For instance, the sub-picture image formed of the button as the selection item shown in FIG. 79B is combined with the video as the background image shown g in FIG. 79A to the image highlightedaccording to the highlight information indicated by FIG. 79C, thereby acquiring the mixing picture indicated in FIG. 79D. In this case, the background of the selection item is displayed by blue, and the character of the selection item- isdis~layedby black.- -_-The audio data decoded by the audio decoder section 60 is supplied to the D/A and data reproducing section 64, and the menu or the voice corresponding to the video is reproduced from the speaker 8.
When.the user selects the selection item highlight displayed by the keyldisplay section 4 of the remote controller 5 is selected in the menu display state, the system CPU section 50 outputs the highlight color and contrast value corresponding after selecting to the highlight color/contrast setter 182 of-the highlight processor section 62C. As a result, the highlight color and contrast of the seledtion item are altered.
In this case, the background of the selection item is displayed by read, and the character of the selection item is displayed by white.
The other example of the menu image will be explained by referring to FIGS. 80A to 80E.
Specifically, when the video data shown by in FIG. 80A and the sub-picture data shown by in FIG. 80B
are supplied, the menu image before selecting is displayed as shown in FIG. 80G so that the characters g of the selection item for "1" and "2" are display with black and the background is displayed gray.
Thereafter, when the selection item of "1" is selected by the key/display section 4 or the remote controller ~, the system CPU 50 sets the X-, Y-coordinatesindicating the rectangular area for the selection item of "1" read from the PCI data and the altered content (highlight information) of the color or contrast of the pixel to the highlight processor section 62C.
As descrikredabove, the sub-picturedata decoded by the decoder 62B of the sub-picture decoder section 62 is altered at the highlight color and contrast value corresponding to the selection item of "1" by the high-light processor 62C, and supplied to the image mixing section 64A in the D/A and data reproducing section 64.
As a result, the video data and the sub-picture data are mixed by the image mixing section 64A, and the mixed image, i.e., the display content of the selection item of "1" of the selection item is altered as shown in FIG. 80D to the menu image, which is displayed on the monitor section 6. For instance, the part of the character of the selection item of "1" is displayed _ ~.~ w.:, ~.~. . .:=.u:. '-'. . ~z:.. __.
~1920~7 with white and the background is displayed with red.
Thereafter, when the selection item of "2" is selected by the key/display section 4 or the remote controller 5, the system CPU 50 sets the X-, Y-coordinates indicating the rectangular area for the selection item of "1" read from the PCI data and the altered content (highlight information) of the color or contrast of the pixel to the highlight processor section 62C.
As described above, the sub-picture data decoded by the decoder 62B of the sub-picture decoder section 62 is altered at the highlight color and contrast value corresponding to the selection item of "1" by the high-light processor 62C, and supplied to the image mixing section-64A in the D/A and data reproducing section 64.
As a result, the video data and the sub-picture data are mixed by the image mixing section 64A, and the mixed image, i.e., the display content of the selection item of "2" of the selection item is altered as shown in FIG. 80E to the menu image, which is displayed on the monitor section 6. For instance, the part of the character of the selection item of "2" is displayed with white and the background is displayed with red.
As described above, various menu screens can be simply altered without reading new video image.
The selection item position information is simply determined at the positional relationship between ........... ,.»an..W..,faw~ -jH'4'-~.... ~ ~ l..r.u.a.3e.w..~,...E~' -'.;
the video and the sub-picture by designating it corresponding to the display coordinate system of the video. ._ .... . .._..__.. _. .._.. ... . _ An embodiment of the relation of the highlight information. as the sub-picture data of the selection item and the control data in FIGS. 81A and 81B.
In the drawings, the pixel surrounded by "O" is formed by using pattern pixel and using the pixel represented by "D" by using the highlight pixel 1.
FIG. 81A shows the case that the pattern pixel of the sub-picture data and highlight pixel used as the shade of the pattern pixel are employed. In this case, after the control data is selected, the display color information is altered real time by setting the color of the highlight pixel 1-to new color and setting the pixel color-and the contrast except it with the present color remained as it is. Thus, the selected selection item is altered to the shade of different color from the other selection item real time.
FIG. 81B shows the case that the sub-picture data is formed only of pattern pixel. In this case, after the highlight information is selected, the display colorinformation is set at the color of the pattern pixel to new color, and setting the pixel and the contrast except the information to the present color as it is. Thus, the selected selection item itself is altered to the color different from the other selection ~e.~... . ta.~
~e'.a °.~.f~:_~ __1''~:.. . .. .d, ..ire. , :,..'ezf .'tr- -%,~-"v.'~ .
_._...., . . .
item.
In addition, the contrast of the background pixel in the selection item area is set-to 100 of the sub-picture data at the time of selecting, and to 0~
at the time of inhibiting to select. Thus, at the time of selecting, the control for varying the entire color of the selection area, and hence various format can be employed real time by using the structure of the sub-picture data and the content of the highlight information.
Eor example, when the above-descried identified cell--classification is a menu, it is not automatically transferred to next cell reproduction, but in the final frame display state at the time of finishing the cell reproduction, it becomes the standby state.
Therefore, when the cell for the menu is reproduced, still picture state is obtained in the cell final display state. Since the HV pack 88 is always inserted at a constant unit of-the video data in the cell, the highlight information of the above-mentioned menu is stored in the data RAM section 56.
The system CPU section 50 becomes a standby state of user vent (key input, etc.,) when the cell repro-duction is finished, the process of the selection item for-the user selection of the menu is executed by referring to the information regarding the menu (highlight information from the PCI data stored in the ,.,-~Ym'.u, . :..ig~,~ iy~,y ~ ~_~.ue yra 2a~~~'.. _::rai:W~.. ..~.... ., - ' 3,.
2~~2~77 r data RAM section 56.
With reference to FIG. 1, a description will now be given of the operation for reproducing movie data from the optical disk 10 which has the logic format illustrated in FIGS. 6 through 66 under the condition that the title, etc. are selected through the above-described menus.
When the playback key 4c on the key/display section 4 or-the playback key 5d on the remote controller 5 is manipulated while the desired title is selected, the system CPU section 50 acquires the last address of the title search pointer table (TT SRPT) 79 from the title search pointer table information (TT SRPTI) 92 and acquires the video title set number (VTSN), program chain cumber (PGCN) and the start address (VTS SA) of the video title set, which correspond to the input number, from the title search pointers (TT SRP) 93 corresponding to the input number from the key/display section 4 or the title number selected by the remote controller-5. When there is only one title set, a single title search pointer (TT SRP) 93 is searched, regardless of the presence of the input number from the key/display section 4 or the selection of the title number by the remote controllex5, to acquire the start address (VTS SA) of that title set. The system CPU
section 50 acquires the target title set from the start address (VTS SA) of the title set.
~, ,~~:_ ,: . ,~ , .r_~ : ... ....:
Next, from the start address (VTS SA) of the video title set 72 of FIG. 13, the video title set information (VTSI) 94 about the title set is obtained as shown in FIG. 20. The end address (VTI MAT EA) of the video title set information management table (VTSI MAT) 98 0~ FIG.21 is acquired from the management table (VTSI MAT) 98 of the video title set information (VTSI) 94. At the same time, each section of the reproducing unit shown in FIG. 1 is set on the basis of the number of audio streams and the number of sub-picture data streams (VTS AST Ns, VTS SPST Ns) and the attribute information on the video, audio, and sub-picture data (VTS, V ATR, VTS A ATR, VTS SPST ATR).
When a menu (VTSM) for a video title set (VTS) has a simple structure, the start address (VTSM VOB SA) of a video object set (VTSM VOB) for menus for a video title set is acquired from the video title set informa-tion management table (VTSI MATS 98 of FIG. 21. On the basis of the video object set (VTSM VOB) 95, a menu for the video title set fs displayed. When an video object set (VTT VOBS) 96 fortitles (VTST) in the title set (VTS) is simply reproduced without selecting a program chain (PGC) with reference to the menu, the video object set 96 is reproduced on the basis of the start address (VTSTT VOB SA) shown in_FIG. 21.
When a program chain is specified from the key/display section 4 or the remote controller 5, the ..y.s .~>=~~~ _ . ,." . ~~.-f. ,....
l07 desired program chain 87 is retrieved in the following procedure. The retrieval of a program chain 87 is not limited to a program chain 87 for titles in the video-title set. The same procedure applies to the retrieval of a program chain 87 for a relatively complex menu made up of program chains 87. The start address of the program chain information table (VTS PGCIT) 100 in the video title set (VTS) of FIG. 21 written in the management table (VTSI MAT) 98 of the video title set information (VTSI) 94 is acquired, and the information (VTS PGCIT I) 102 in the VTS program chain information table 100 of FIG. 24 is read. From the information (VTS PGCIT I)104, the number of program chains (VTS PGC Ns) and-the end-address (VTS PGCIT EA) of the table 100 shown in FIG. 25 are obtained.
When the number of a program chain 87 is specified from the key/display section 4 or the remote controller 5 the category of the program chain 87 and the start address of the VTS PGC information-104 corresponding to the search pointer (UTS PGCIT SRP) 103 shown in FIG. 26 are acquired from the VTS PGCIT search pointer (VTS PGCIT SRP) 103 corresponding tothe- number shown in FIG. 24. On the basis of the start address (VTS PGCI $A), the program chain general information (PGC GI) of-FIG. 27- isread out.- According to the general information (PGC GI) 105, the category and playback time of the program chain (PGC) (PGC CAT, w~ >,,~..- e' _ :,:.rte ~,.....: , . _=
'~2~ 92077 PGC PB TIME)are obtained-and further the start addresses (C PBIT SA, C POSIT SA) of the cell playback information table (C-PBIT) and cell position information table (C POSIT) 108, contained in the general information (PGC GI)-are acquired. From the start address (C PBIT SA), the video object identifier (C VOB IDN) and cell identifier=(C IDN) of FIG. 36 are acquired as the cell position information (C POSI) of FIG. 35 Furthermore, from the start address (C POSIT SA), the cell playback information (C PBI) of FIG. 33 is obtained. The start address (C FVOBU SA) of the first VOBU 85 and the start address (C IVOBU SA) of the last VOBU in the cell of FIG. 34 contained in the playback information (C PBI)-are acquired.- Then, the target cell is retrieved. In the playback of cells, referring to the program map of FIG. 31-in the PGC program map (PGC PGMAP)--106 of-FIG.27,-playback cells 84 are determined one after another. The data cells of program chains thus determined are read one after another from the video object 144 and inputted to the data RAM section 56 via the system processor section 54.
The data cells 84, on the basis of the playback time information, are supplied to the video decoder section 58, audio decoder section 60, and sub-picture decoder section 62, which decode them. The decoded signals are subjected to signal conversion at the D/A and _. .~
.v.. u. . ::-'.'-5. f...~""tk ?.~dt a .'F. .,.N1=~s a*Nrt .. 3., 5'kf:iif. , ::<6i: :: .
data-reproducing section 64 and an image is reproduced at the monitor.section 6 and at the same time, sound is reproduced at the speaker sections 8.
Furthermore, a normal playback and high-speed search of the video data using a navigation pack 86 will be described in detail with reference to a flowchart.
In a normal playback of video data, when a normal playback is started as shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, after the start-up at step 511, the video manager information (VMGI) 75, as eacplained earlier is retrieved by the system CPU section 50 and stored in-the system ROM/RAM
section 52. On the basis of the video manger information (VMGI) 75, the video title set information (VTSI) 94 on the video title set (VTS) 72 is read and simultaneously the video title set menu is displayed on the monitor section 6, as mentioned above, using the video object set (VYTSM VOBS)95. On-the basis of the display, as shown in step 513, the user selects a title set 72 to be reproduced and playback conditions. When the decided title 72 is selected using the key/display section 4 or the remote controller 5, as shown in step S14, the data in the cell playback information table (C PBIT) 107 of FIGS. 17, 21, and 22 is read by the system CPU section 50 from the program chain information table (VTS PGCIT) 100 of FIG. 12 in the selected title set 72. The read-out data is stored . :: _..:.... ~._. s._~~~~ .~ : ~ . :~ . . : .x ...... ., alo ~in the system ROM/RAM section 52. According to the playback conditions, the system CPU section 50 determines,a program chain number (VTS PGC Ns), angle number (ANGNs), audio stream number, and sub-picture stream number using the aforementioned menus.
For example, the eleventh boxing match for a world championship is selected as a title for a program chain and it is determined that Japanese subtitles are displayed as sub-pictures with English narration.
The user selects an angle so that a match between the champion and the opponent may be viewed impressively.
The determined sub-picture number and audio stream number are set in the register of the system processor section 54 as shown in step 516. Similarly, the playback start time is set in the system time clock in each of the system processor section 54, video decoder 58, audio decoder 60, and sup-picture decoder 62.
The start address of the first VOBU in a cell and PGC
number, or cell number, are stored in the system ROM/RAM section 52.
As shown in step 517, at the time when a preparation to read a video title set has been made, the system CPU section 50 gives,a read command to the disk drive section 30, which searches the optical disk 10 on the basis of the above start address and PGC
number. By the read command, the cells 84 related to the specified program chain (PGC) are read one after .,_~. .._.~:,. :. . __.~,.: ~ :. a~; . . >.;,~_,. , , ... .
another from the optical disk 10, and are transferred to the data RAM section 56 via the system CPU section 50 and system processing section 54. The transferred cell data includes a navigation pack 86 which is, as shown in FIG. 8, the head pack of the video object unit (VOBU) 85. The navigation pack 86 is stored into the data RAM 56. Thereafter, the video pack 88, audio pack 91, and sub-picture pack 90 in the video object unit (VOBU) are distributed to the video decoder section 58, audio decoder section 60, and sub-picture decoder section 62, respectively. The individual decoders decode the packs and supply the resulting signals to the D/A and data-reproducing section 64. As a result, a video signal is sent to the monitor 6 and an audio I5 signal is transmitted to the speaker 8, thereby starting the display of images with sub-pictures.
At the same time, the reproduction of sound is started.
If a key input is supplied from the key/display section 4 or the remote controller 5 during the video and audio reproduction, the key data acquired is stored into the system RAM/ROM section 52. If there is no key input from the section 4, it is determined in step S19 whether or not a play-back end message has been supplied from the drive section 30. If the message has been supplied, it is determined whether or not a navigation pack 86 has been transferred to the system ROM/RAM section 52. If the navigation pack 86 has been .~ ~.,.~.._..
transferred to the section 52, the logical sector number (NV PCK LSN) in the navigation pack 86 is stored as current logical block number (NOWLBN) into the system RAM/ROM-section 52 in steg 20.
After--the NV pack has been transferred, it is determined whether the NV pack is the last one in the cell 84. More precisely, in step S22 it is determined whether or not the NV pack is the last navigation pack 86 in the cell 84. This is effected by comparing the start address (C LVOBU SA) of the cell playback table (C PBI) 107 with the address (V_PCK LBN) of the navigation.pack 86. If the NV 86 is not the last one in the cell 84, control will return to step 518.
If the NV pack 86 is the last one in the cell-84, control goes to step 523. In step 523 it is verified whether there is an angle change. An angle change is judged on-the basis of whetheran angle change is inputted from the key/display section 4 or the remote controller 5 to the system CPU section 50. If there is no angle change, as shown in step 524, it will be verified whether it is the end cell of the program chain (PGC) to which the cell 84 belongs. The verification is effected on the basis of whether the cell 84 shown in FIGS. 27 and 33 is the end cell in the cell playback information table (C PBIT) 107. Namely, the verification is achieved on the basis of the number of cells 84 constituting the program chain and the :. :. ,",..:_.~. ~-= "_.~:.~.:..~ ~_ .._~-.: .,: .,~.: .n- , i ,:
~~9~~77 identification number of the reproduced cell. If the cell does not correspond to the end cell-of the program chain (PGC), control will be returned to step 519.
If the cell 84 is the end cell of the program chain-(PGC), it will be determined that the program chain has finished and the next, program chain (PGC) will be specified. Except for special cases, the program chains are reproduced in the sequence of their numbers, so that adding 1 to the number of the program chain that has been reproduced enables the number of a program chain to be reproduced next to be set.
Whether there is a program chain whose program number is the set program chain number is verified at step 526. If there is no program chain to be reproduced next, control will be passed to-the flow for the playback end procedure shown in FIG. 84 explained later. If the set program chain is present, as shown in step 527, the address of the cell in the program chain that has been set again, that is, the start address (C FVOBU SA) of C FVOBU.in-the cell playback information (C PBI) 107 of FIG.- 34 is obtained as the present logical block number. As shown in step 528, it is verified whether the start address (C FVOBU SA) is equal to the address obtained by adding 1 to the end address (ENDLBN) of the cell 84 in the preceding program chain already reproduced. If they are equal to each other, this means the playback of cells having consecutive--addresses and control will return to step 519. If those addresses are not equal, this means that addresses of the cells are-not consecutive. In this case in step 529, the system CPU section 50 issues a,read end address command and temporarily stops the reading operation of the disk drive section 30. The read end address command designates the end address of the current video object unit. Thereafter, in step 530, the system CPU section 50 gives a consecutive read command again to the disk drive section 30. Then, control return to step 518, thereby starting the retrieval of a navigation pack 86.
if a key input is supplied from the key/display section 4 or the remote controller 5 at step 519, it will be confirmed in step S31 whether the key input is for fast-forward (FF), for--example. If it is for fast-forward (FF), a high-speed searching process will be executed in step 532. If it is not for fast-forward, another process, or a process related to a series of video playback, such as a pause in playback or the change of audio streams, will be carried out at step S9. Then, control returns to step 519.
If the end of playback has, been specified in step 519, or if there is no program chain to be reproduced next in step 526, the end PTS (VOBU EPTS) contained in the PCI general information (PCI GI)-is referred to in step S31 (FIG. 64). When the end PTS (VOBU EPTS) ,' ~s,.
.~.~~'~.a...~K z:..n .4a ~ .a. ~,1 ,..,..
coincides with the system time clock (STC), the monitor 6 will stop-displaying on the screen as shown in step 532, then the system CPU will supply a data transfer stop command to the disk drive section 30, which thereby stops the data transfer-as shown in step 533, terminating the playback operation.
zf an angle change input is supplied from the key/display section 4 or the remote controller 5 in step 523, it will be checked whether there is angle data as shown in step S40 of FIG. 65. The presence/
absence of angle has been gives as angle information (NSML AGLI,,SML AGLI). to both of, the-.PCIdata 113 and DSI data 115 in the navigation pack 86. If there is no angle to be, changed in step 540, the message that there is no angle data will be displayed on the key/display section 4 or the remote controller 5 or the monitor 6 as shown in step 541. After the message for no angle data is displayed, control goes to step 524. If there is angle data, as shown in step 542, an angle number to be changed-will be specified.from the key/display section 4 or the remote controller 5. In this case, as explained earlier, it will be specified which of the angle information in the PCI data and the DSI data (NSML AGLI,.SMh AGLI) is used to change the angle.
When only one type of angle information is available, the selection is limited to the one type. If an angle-number is specified, the target addresses ~ .~ ,y r a . ~ x 1.. .. _ ~,~=~ r _ _~. x =;~~, ~ =- ~ .~" ~-c- ...H.s~~..
. 2192077 (NSML AGL C DSTA, SML AGL DSTA)- of-the angle cell corresponding to the specified angle number as shown in FIGS. 47 and 48 will be acquired at step 543. By this address, a cell is searched for. The address is set for the logical block number (NOWLBN) to be searched for. With the angle change operation using the PCI
data, the system CPU section 50 performs a muting process on the playback of video and audio data and also effects a pause process on the playback of sub-pictures. -These processes stop the system time clock (STC) in each section of the reproducing system and make it possible to take in the angle data already changed by clearing the buffers in the video, audio, and sub-picture decoders 58, 60, and 62. At the same time, at shown in step 545, the system CPU section 50 issues a read end address command and temporarily prevents the disk drive section 30 from reading the data. Thereafter, as shown in step 546, the CPU
section 50 supplies a read command to the disk drive section 30. Then, the selected cell is searched for by the set retrieval logical block number, or by the start address of the cell, the cell data is retrieved consecutively. The transfer of the data in the selected angle cell is ten started.
After..the transfer has been started, it is checked again, in step S47 whether a playback end has been specified and control waits for-the transfer of the ~i92G77 navigation pack of the first cell associated with the changed angle. As shown in step S4B, it is checked whether a navigation pack has been transferred as a result of the data transfer. ,If no navigation pack has been transferred, control will be returned to step 547. If a navigation pack has been transferred, each system time clock (STC) will be set with reference to the SCR in the NV pack (NV PCK SCR) contained in the DSI general information (DSIG) in the navigation pack 86. Thereafter, the video and audio muting state and the pause state of sub-pictures are canceled at step S44 and then the system time clock (STC) starts.
Then, step S21 of FIG. 82 is executed as in a normal playback.
Next, the video data in the logic formats shown in FIGS. 6 to 66, a method of recording data on the optical disk 10 to reproduce the video data, and a recording system to which the.recording method is applied will be explained with reference to FIGS. 86 to 91.
FIG. 86 shows an encoder system that creates a video file of a title set 84 in which the video data including menu data is encoded. In the system of FIG. 86, for example, a videotape recorder (VTR) 201, an audiotape recorder (ATR) 202, and a sub-picture source 203 are used as sources of the video data, the audio data, and the sup-picture data. Under the -.uu,.f .x.-,a _ ~ .,.~...N~ .~~,-a.-~~ : , .. , ...
ii8 control of a system controller (Sys con) 205, they create the. video data, audio data, and sup-picture data, which are supplied to a video encoder (VENC) 206, an audio encoder (AENC) 207, and a sub-picture encoder (SPENC) 208_, respectively. Under the control of the system controller (Sys con) 205, these encoders 206, 207, and 208 perform A/D conversion of the video data, audio data, and sup-picture data and encode them by the respective compression schemes. The encoded video data, audio data, and sub-picture data (Comp Video, Comp Audio, Comp Sub-pict) are stored in memories 210, 211, and 212. The video data, audio data, and sub-picture data (Comp Video, Comp Audio, Comp Sub-pict) are outputted to a file formatter (FFMT) 214 under the control of. the system controller (Sys con) 205, which converts them so that they may have a file structure of video data for the system as explained earlier. Then, under the control of the system controller (Sys con) 205, management information, such as the setting conditions for each data item, the athributes, the highlight information and data for preparing menu data are stored-in a memory 216 in the form of files.
Explained next will be a standard flow of an encoding process in the system controller (Sys con) 205 that creates a file from video data.
According to the flow of FIG. 87, the video data and the audio data are encoded and the encoded .. . -~,x..~!~u. .~r~.~;.,M-,, ~.-.A,.....~..~:_s~.,aa:~~~..:
aow:......_~,._w. ..
~i92077 video data and audio data (Comp Video, Comp Audio) are supplied. Specifically, when the encoding process is started, as shown in step S70 of FIG. 87, the parameters necessary for encoding the video data and audio data are set. Part of the set parameters are stored.in the system controller (Sys con) 205 and at the same time, are used at the file formatter (FFMT) 214. As shown in step 5271, the video data is pre-encoded using the parameters and the optimum distribution of the amount of codes is calculated.
Then, on the basis of the code amount distribution obtained in the pre-encoding, the video data is encoded as shown in step 5272. At the same time, the audio data is also encoded at step 5272. As shown in step in 5273, if necessary, the video data is partially encoded again and the reencoded portion of the video data is replaced with the old one.
Through the series of steps, the video data and audio data are encoded. Furthermore, as shown in steps 5274 and 5275, the sub-picture data is encoded and the encoded sub-picture data (Comp Sub-pict) is supplied.
Namely, the parameters necessary for encoding the sub-picture data is set. As shown in step 5274, part of the parameters are stored in the system controller (Sys con) 205 and used in the file formatter (FFMT) 214.
On the basis of the parameters, the sub-picture data is encoded. By the process, the sup-picture data is ~a .. ,.. .. A -'ai _f~d~9. .'_ ~. i. _,."m ~ k :.fP-'. w. .. ,.
12~
encoded. -According to the flow of FIG. 88, the encoded video data, audio data, and sup-picture data (Com Video, Com.Audio, Comp Sub-pict) are combined and converted so as to form a video data title set structure as explained in FIG. 6. Specifically, as shown in step 5276, a cell is set as the smallest unit of the video data and cell playback information on a cell (C PBI) is created. Then, as shown in step 5277, the structure of the cells constituting a program chain and the video, sub-picture, and audio attributes (the information obtained in encoding the respective data items are used part of these attributes) are set and the video title set information management table -- information (VTSI MAT) 98 containing information on n program chain and a video title set time search map table (VTS TMAPT) 101 are created in FIG. 12. At this time, as the need arises, a video title set part of title search pointer table (VTS PTT SRPT) is also created. The encoded video data, audio data, and sup-picture data (Com Video, Comp Audio, Comp Sup-pict) are subdivided intospecific packs. An NV pack is placed at the head of each VOBU unit so that playback can be effected in the order of time code of each data item.
With the NV packs arranged this way, each data cell is positioned so that a video object (VOB) may be composed of a plurality of cells as shown in FIG. 6. A set of _. .... ..:~.~ _. ,.
~~~~077 such video-objects is formatted into the title set structure.
In the flow of FIG. 88, the program chain information (PGI) is obtained in the process of step 5277 by using the database in the system controller (Sys con) 205 or entering data again as the need arises.
FIG. 89 shows a disk formatter system that records on an optical disk the title set formatted as described above.In-the disk formatter system of FIG. 89, the memories 220, 222 in which the created title set is stored supply these file data items to a volume formatter (VFMT) 226. In the volume formatter (VFMT) 226 extracts the management information from the title sets 84, 86, produces a video manager 71, and create the logic data to be recorded on the disk 10 in the arrangement of FIG. 6. A disk formatter (DFMT) 228 adds error correction data to the logic data created at the volume formatter (VFMT) 226, thereby reconverting the logic data into physical data to be recorded on the disk. A modulator 230 converts the physical data created at the disk formatter (DFMT) 228 into the recording data to be recorded actually on the disk.
Then, a recorder 232 records the modulated recording data on the disk 10.
A standard flow for creating the aforementioned disk will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 _ s.
.. - a ~ :~,~.-.~:~... _~ _ ~' _ n~::r ~_w.,., ~ ,..t~..~.,- f " :.,......
and 91. FIG. 90 shows the flow for creating the logic data to be recorded on the disk 10. Specifically, as shown in step 5280, parameter data items, including the number of video data files, their arrangement, and the size of each video data file, are set first. Next, in step 5281 video manger 71 is generated from the parameters set and the video title set information 281 of each video title set 72. In step 5282, the video manager 71 and the video tile set 71 are arranged in the order mentioned, according to their logic block numbers, thereby generating logic data which is to be recorded on the disk 10.
Thereafter, the flow for creating the physical data to be recorded on the disk as shown in FIG. 91 is exacuted. Specifically, as shown in step 5283, the logic data is divided into units of a specific number of bytes, thereby forming error correction data. Next, as shown in step 5284, the logic data divided into units of a specific number of bytes are combined with the created error correction data to form physical sectors. Thereafter, as shown in step 5285, physical data is created by combining physical sectors.
In this way, the modulating process based on certain rules is performed on the physical data created in the flow of FIG. 91, thereby forming the recording data. Thereafter, the recording data is recorded on the disk 10.
.. - :,-:--.s. .'.;t,~~_. t_x.xl:.ia_.~.. "F~'-..~::~~', ».-~:=.'. .., , :~.6ue<s.~sz:<~...:, .u;.s.~- ~...-. '.
~~~2G77 The above-described data structure can be applied not only to a case where the data is recorded on recording mediums, such as optical disks, and then the disks are distributed to the users, but also to a communication system as shown inFIG. 92.
Specifically, according to the procedure shown in FIGS. 86 to 89, an optical disk 10 in which a video manager 71 and video title.set 72 as shown in FIG. 6 may be loaded unto a reproducing unit 300, from whose system CPUsection 50 the encoded data istaken out digitally and transmitted by a modulator/transmitter 310 to the users or the cable subscribers by radio or via a cable. Furthermore, the encoding system 320 shown in FIGS. 86 and 89 may create the data encoded on the provider side, such as a broadcasting station and the encoded data may be transmitted by the modulator/transmitter 310 to the users or the cable subscribers by radio or via a cable. In such a communication system, the information in the video manager 71 is modulated at the modulator/transmitter 310 and then supplied to or is directly supplied to the users free of charge. When a user is interested in the title, the modulator/transmitter 310 transmits the title set 72 at the user's or subscriber's request by radio or via a cable. Under the control of the video manager 71, the video title set information 94 is first transferred and then the title video object 95 in the ~s F
....". ..o- -ae..~ "'~ '~'::.e~:c,3v~W. '_ :.~uas.oLa.WSit7:Xt~'!~~~ ._..v .... . r , ..". ..
video title set reproduced according to the title set information 94 is transferred. .At this time, if necessary, the video title set menu video object 95 is also transmitted. The transferred data is received by a receiver/demodulator 400 on-the user side and is processed as encoded data at the system CPU section 50 of the reproducing unit on the user or subscriber side of FIG. 1 in the same manner as in the above-described reproducing process, whereby the video data is reproduced.-Industrial Applicability In transferring the video .title set 72, the video object sets 95, 96 are transferred using the video object unit 85 of FIG. 6 as a unit. At the head of the video object unit 85, an NV pack 86 containing video playback and search information is arranged.
Furthermore, because the NV pack contains the addresses of the video object units to be reproduced immediately before and after the video object unit 85 to which the NV pack 86 belongs, even if the video object unit 85 is lost during transfer for some reason, the video object can be reproduced reliably on the user side by requesting the lost video object unit 85 to be transmitted again. Furthermore, even if transfer is not carried out in the order of-playback of video object units, because the system ROM/RAM section 52 on the user side holds the accurate playback information on program chains, the system CPU section 50 can specify the order of playback referring to the address data in its NV pack.
Additional advantages and modifications will readily occur to those skilled in the art. Therefore, the invention in its broader aspects is not limited to the specific details, representative devices, and illustrated examples shown and described herein.
Accordingly, various modifications may be made without departing from the spirit or scope of the general inventive concept as defined by the appended claims and their equivalents.
.. _.. ,.: ~ ~:.-._.~ .::..taaa ,r,;::- ~..... v.... ...~-,;.= , .
.,~...~.,.., ...:.
Claims (9)
PROPERTY OR PRIVILEGE IS CLAIMED ARE DEFINED AS FOLLOWS:
1. An encoding method for encoding data to be recorded in an information recording medium, said recording medium having a data recording area for recording a video manager and at least one video title set, said video manager having data for controlling said video title set and said video title set containing video data, audio data, and sub-picture data, said encoding method comprising:
receiving said video data, said audio data, and said sub-picture data;
encoding said video data, said audio data, and said sub-picture data;
dividing contents of said encoded video, audio, and sub-picture data into corresponding one or more video packs, one or more audio packs, and one or more sub-picture packs;
arranging said video packs, audio packs, and sub-picture packs and appending a navigation pack to define a video object unit, wherein said navigation pack includes playback control data and is disposed at a beginning position within said video object unit;
arranging a plurality of said video object units to define each of a plurality of video object sets;
arranging a plurality of said video object sets to define said video title set;
wherein at least one of said video manager and said video title set contains menu information, said menu information including a menu background image, at least one menu selection item image for indicating a selection of a menu item, and at least one menu status button for indicating a status of a selection;
wherein said playback control data includes highlight information for highlighting said menu status button;
wherein said highlight information contains highlight general information describing attributes of said highlight information including a highlight start time during a presentation period of said video object unit, number of numerical selection button information, forcedly selected button number information at said highlight start time, and forcedly activated button number information at an end time of a button selection, said highlight information also containing a menu status button color information table describing color attributes of said menu status button and a menu status button information table having menu status button information; and wherein said menu status button information includes, status button position information for indicating a position corresponding to said menu status button adjacent status button information for describing a direction of a next selection for said menu status button, and status button command for describing a status command to be executed when said menu status button is activated to reproduce a title which is designated according to said status button command.
receiving said video data, said audio data, and said sub-picture data;
encoding said video data, said audio data, and said sub-picture data;
dividing contents of said encoded video, audio, and sub-picture data into corresponding one or more video packs, one or more audio packs, and one or more sub-picture packs;
arranging said video packs, audio packs, and sub-picture packs and appending a navigation pack to define a video object unit, wherein said navigation pack includes playback control data and is disposed at a beginning position within said video object unit;
arranging a plurality of said video object units to define each of a plurality of video object sets;
arranging a plurality of said video object sets to define said video title set;
wherein at least one of said video manager and said video title set contains menu information, said menu information including a menu background image, at least one menu selection item image for indicating a selection of a menu item, and at least one menu status button for indicating a status of a selection;
wherein said playback control data includes highlight information for highlighting said menu status button;
wherein said highlight information contains highlight general information describing attributes of said highlight information including a highlight start time during a presentation period of said video object unit, number of numerical selection button information, forcedly selected button number information at said highlight start time, and forcedly activated button number information at an end time of a button selection, said highlight information also containing a menu status button color information table describing color attributes of said menu status button and a menu status button information table having menu status button information; and wherein said menu status button information includes, status button position information for indicating a position corresponding to said menu status button adjacent status button information for describing a direction of a next selection for said menu status button, and status button command for describing a status command to be executed when said menu status button is activated to reproduce a title which is designated according to said status button command.
2. A reproducing apparatus for reproducing menu information from a recording medium, where the recording medium includes plural data units which are reproduced in sequence, the data units each being reproduced within a predetermined period of time, each data unit including a data pack array and a control pack, each of the data pack arrays including multiple data packs, the data packs comprising reproduction data including at least one of video data and sub-picture data, at least one menu information formed from the reproduction data being used for confirming contents of the video data and for selecting from among the video data, the menu information including a background image recorded as the video data and either a selection item or an action item represented by the sub-picture data, the control pack being positioned before the data pack array within each data unit so as to control reproduction of the reproduction data, the control pack recording control data for controlling the selection item or the action item, the reproducing apparatus comprising:
a reader for reading reproduction data from a data pack array and control data from a control pack;
a first extractor for extracting video data from the reproduction data read by the reader;
a second extractor for extracting sub-picture data from the reproduction data read by the reader;
a third extractor for extracting a status button color information table from the control data, said status button color information table having entries corresponding to one or more status buttons in said sub-picture;
a fourth extractor for extracting a status button information table from the control data, said status button information table having entries corresponding to said status button in said sub-picture, wherein said status button information table includes status button information, and said status button information includes (a) status button position information for indicating a position of the corresponding status button in a menu, (b) adjacent status button information for describing a direction of a next selection for a status button which is in the user selection status, and (c) a status button command for describing a status command to be executed when the status button in the user selection is activated;
a fifth extractor for extracting from the control data the status button position information;
a sixth extractor for extracting from the control data the adjacent status button information;
a seventh extractor for extracting from the control data a status button command;
a decoding circuit for decoding the sub-picture data extracted by the second extractor based on the control data read by the reader from the control pack; and a synthesizing device for generating reproduced menu information by synthesizing the sub-picture data decoded by the decoding circuit with the video data extracted by the first extractor.
a reader for reading reproduction data from a data pack array and control data from a control pack;
a first extractor for extracting video data from the reproduction data read by the reader;
a second extractor for extracting sub-picture data from the reproduction data read by the reader;
a third extractor for extracting a status button color information table from the control data, said status button color information table having entries corresponding to one or more status buttons in said sub-picture;
a fourth extractor for extracting a status button information table from the control data, said status button information table having entries corresponding to said status button in said sub-picture, wherein said status button information table includes status button information, and said status button information includes (a) status button position information for indicating a position of the corresponding status button in a menu, (b) adjacent status button information for describing a direction of a next selection for a status button which is in the user selection status, and (c) a status button command for describing a status command to be executed when the status button in the user selection is activated;
a fifth extractor for extracting from the control data the status button position information;
a sixth extractor for extracting from the control data the adjacent status button information;
a seventh extractor for extracting from the control data a status button command;
a decoding circuit for decoding the sub-picture data extracted by the second extractor based on the control data read by the reader from the control pack; and a synthesizing device for generating reproduced menu information by synthesizing the sub-picture data decoded by the decoding circuit with the video data extracted by the first extractor.
3. A reproducing apparatus for use with a recording medium including plural data units which are reproduced in sequence, the data units each being reproduced within a predetermined period of time, each data unit including a data pack array and a control pack, each of the data pack arrays including multiple data packs, the data packs comprising reproduction data including at least one of compressed video data and sub-picture data, at least one menu information formed from the video data and the sub-picture data being used for confirming contents of the video data and for selecting from among the video data, the menu information including a background image recorded as the video data and either a selection item or an action item represented by the sub-picture data, the control pack being positioned before the data pack array within each data unit so as to control reproduction of the reproduction data, the control pack recording control data for controlling the selection item or the action item, the reproducing apparatus comprising:
a reader for reading reproduction data from a data pack array and control data from a control pack;
a first extractor for extracting video data from the reproduction data read by the reader;
a second extractor for extracting sub-picture data from the reproduction data read by the reader;
a third extractor for extracting a status button color information table from the control data, said status button color information table having entries corresponding to one or more status buttons in said sub-picture;
a fourth extractor for extracting a status button information table from the control data, said status button information table having entries corresponding to said status button in said sub-picture, wherein said status button information table includes status button information, and said status button information includes (a) status button position information for indicating a position of the corresponding status button in a menu, (b) adjacent status button information for describing a direction of a next selection for a status button which is in the user selection status, and (c) a status button command for describing a status command to be executed when the status button in the user selection is activated;
a fifth extractor for extracting from the control data the status button position information;
a sixth extractor for extracting from the control data the adjacent status button information;
a seventh extractor for extracting from the control data a status button command;
a decoding circuit for decoding the sub-picture data extracted by the second extractor based on the control data read by the reader from the control pack; and a synthesizing device for generating reproduced menu information by synthesizing the sub-picture data decoded by the decoding circuit with the video data extracted by the first extractor.
a reader for reading reproduction data from a data pack array and control data from a control pack;
a first extractor for extracting video data from the reproduction data read by the reader;
a second extractor for extracting sub-picture data from the reproduction data read by the reader;
a third extractor for extracting a status button color information table from the control data, said status button color information table having entries corresponding to one or more status buttons in said sub-picture;
a fourth extractor for extracting a status button information table from the control data, said status button information table having entries corresponding to said status button in said sub-picture, wherein said status button information table includes status button information, and said status button information includes (a) status button position information for indicating a position of the corresponding status button in a menu, (b) adjacent status button information for describing a direction of a next selection for a status button which is in the user selection status, and (c) a status button command for describing a status command to be executed when the status button in the user selection is activated;
a fifth extractor for extracting from the control data the status button position information;
a sixth extractor for extracting from the control data the adjacent status button information;
a seventh extractor for extracting from the control data a status button command;
a decoding circuit for decoding the sub-picture data extracted by the second extractor based on the control data read by the reader from the control pack; and a synthesizing device for generating reproduced menu information by synthesizing the sub-picture data decoded by the decoding circuit with the video data extracted by the first extractor.
4. A reproducing apparatus for use with a recording medium including plural data units which are reproduced in sequence, the data units each being reproduced within a predetermined period of time, each data unit including a data pack array and a control pack, each of the data pack arrays including multiple data packs, the data packs comprising reproduction data including at least one of compressed video data and sub-picture data, at least one menu information formed from the video data and the sub-picture data being used for confirming contents of the video data and for selecting from among the video data, the menu information including a background image recorded as the video data and either a selection item or an action item represented by the sub-picture data, the control pack being positioned before the data pack array within each data unit so as to control reproduction of the reproduction data, the control pack recording control data for controlling the selection item or the action item, the reproducing apparatus comprising:
a reader for reading reproduction data from a data pack array and control data from a control pack;
a first extractor for extracting video data from the reproduction data read by the reader;
a second extractor for extracting sub-picture data from the reproduction data read by the reader;
a third extractor for extracting a status button color information table from the control data, said status button color information table having entries corresponding to one or more status buttons in said sub-picture;
a fourth extractor for extracting a status button information table from the control data, said status button information table having entries corresponding to said status button in said sub-picture, wherein said status button information table includes status button information, and said status button information includes (a) status button position information for indicating a position of the corresponding status button in a menu, (b) adjacent status button information for describing a direction of a next selection for a status button which is in the user selection status, and (c) a status button command for describing a status command to be executed when the status button in the user selection is activated;
a fifth extractor for extracting from the control data the status button position information;
a sixth extractor for extracting from the control data the adjacent status button information;
a seventh extractor for extracting from the control data a status button command;
a decoding circuit for decoding the sub-picture data extracted by the second extractor based on the control data read by the reader from the control pack; and a synthesizing device for generating reproduced menu information by synthesizing the sub-picture data decoded by the decoding circuit with the video data extracted by the first extractor.
a reader for reading reproduction data from a data pack array and control data from a control pack;
a first extractor for extracting video data from the reproduction data read by the reader;
a second extractor for extracting sub-picture data from the reproduction data read by the reader;
a third extractor for extracting a status button color information table from the control data, said status button color information table having entries corresponding to one or more status buttons in said sub-picture;
a fourth extractor for extracting a status button information table from the control data, said status button information table having entries corresponding to said status button in said sub-picture, wherein said status button information table includes status button information, and said status button information includes (a) status button position information for indicating a position of the corresponding status button in a menu, (b) adjacent status button information for describing a direction of a next selection for a status button which is in the user selection status, and (c) a status button command for describing a status command to be executed when the status button in the user selection is activated;
a fifth extractor for extracting from the control data the status button position information;
a sixth extractor for extracting from the control data the adjacent status button information;
a seventh extractor for extracting from the control data a status button command;
a decoding circuit for decoding the sub-picture data extracted by the second extractor based on the control data read by the reader from the control pack; and a synthesizing device for generating reproduced menu information by synthesizing the sub-picture data decoded by the decoding circuit with the video data extracted by the first extractor.
5. A reproducing method for reproducing menu information from a recording medium, where the recording medium includes plural data units which are reproduced in sequence, the data units each being reproduced within a predetermined period of time, each data unit including a data pack array and a control pack, each of the data pack arrays including multiple data packs, the data packs comprising reproduction data including at least one of video data and sub-picture data, at least one menu information formed from the video data and the sub-picture data being used for confirming contents of the video data and for selecting from among the video data, the menu information including a background image recorded as the video data and either a selection item or an action item represented by the sub-picture data, the control pack being positioned before the data pack array within each data unit so as to control data for controlling the selection item or the action item, the reproducing method comprising:
reading reproduction data from a data pack array and control data from a control pack;
extracting video data from the reproduction data read from the data pack array;
extracting sub-picture data from the reproduction data read from the data pack array;
extracting a status button color information table from the control data, said status button color information table having entries corresponding to one or more status buttons in said sub-picture;
extracting a status button information table from the control data, said status button information table having entries corresponding to said status buttons in said sub-picture, wherein said status button information table includes status button information, and said status button information includes (a) status button position information for indicating a position of the corresponding status button in a menu, (b) adjacent status button information for describing a direction of a next selection for a status button which is in the user selection status, and (c) a status button command for describing a status command to be executed when the status button in the user selection status is activated;
extracting from the control data the status button position information;
extracting from the control data the adjacent status button information;
extracting from the control data a status button command;
updating the sub-picture data extracted based on the control data read from the control pack; and generating reproduced menu information by synthesizing the sub-picture data updated with the video data extracted.
reading reproduction data from a data pack array and control data from a control pack;
extracting video data from the reproduction data read from the data pack array;
extracting sub-picture data from the reproduction data read from the data pack array;
extracting a status button color information table from the control data, said status button color information table having entries corresponding to one or more status buttons in said sub-picture;
extracting a status button information table from the control data, said status button information table having entries corresponding to said status buttons in said sub-picture, wherein said status button information table includes status button information, and said status button information includes (a) status button position information for indicating a position of the corresponding status button in a menu, (b) adjacent status button information for describing a direction of a next selection for a status button which is in the user selection status, and (c) a status button command for describing a status command to be executed when the status button in the user selection status is activated;
extracting from the control data the status button position information;
extracting from the control data the adjacent status button information;
extracting from the control data a status button command;
updating the sub-picture data extracted based on the control data read from the control pack; and generating reproduced menu information by synthesizing the sub-picture data updated with the video data extracted.
6. A reproducing method for reproducing menu information from a recording medium, where the recording medium includes plural data units which are reproduced in sequence, the data units each being reproduced within a predetermined period of time, each data unit including a data pack array and a control pack, each of the data pack arrays including multiple data packs, the data packs comprising reproduction data including at least one of compressed video data and sub-picture data, at least one menu information formed from the video data and the sub-picture data being used for confirming contents of the video data and for selecting from among the video data, the menu information including a background image recorded as the video data and either a selection item or an action item represented by the sub-picture data, the control pack being positioned before the data pack array within each data unit so as to control data for controlling the selection item or the action item, the reproducing method comprising:
reading reproduction data from a data pack array and control data from a control pack;
extracting video data from the reproduction data read from the data pack array;
extracting sub-picture data from the reproduction data read from the data pack array;
extracting a status button color information table from the control data, said status button color information table having entries corresponding to one or more status buttons in said sub-picture;
extracting a status button information table from the control data, said status button information table having entries corresponding to said status buttons in said sub-picture, wherein said status button information table includes status button information, and said status button information includes (a) status button position information for indicating a position of the corresponding status button in a menu, (b) adjacent status button information for describing a direction of a next selection for a status button which is in the user selection status, and (c) a status button command for describing a status command to be executed when the status button in the user selection status is activated;
extracting from the control data the status button position information;
extracting from the control data the adjacent status button information;
extracting from the control data a status button command;
updating the sub-picture data extracted based on the control data read from the control pack; and generating reproduced menu information by synthesizing the sub-picture data updated with the video data extracted.
reading reproduction data from a data pack array and control data from a control pack;
extracting video data from the reproduction data read from the data pack array;
extracting sub-picture data from the reproduction data read from the data pack array;
extracting a status button color information table from the control data, said status button color information table having entries corresponding to one or more status buttons in said sub-picture;
extracting a status button information table from the control data, said status button information table having entries corresponding to said status buttons in said sub-picture, wherein said status button information table includes status button information, and said status button information includes (a) status button position information for indicating a position of the corresponding status button in a menu, (b) adjacent status button information for describing a direction of a next selection for a status button which is in the user selection status, and (c) a status button command for describing a status command to be executed when the status button in the user selection status is activated;
extracting from the control data the status button position information;
extracting from the control data the adjacent status button information;
extracting from the control data a status button command;
updating the sub-picture data extracted based on the control data read from the control pack; and generating reproduced menu information by synthesizing the sub-picture data updated with the video data extracted.
7. A reproducing method for reproducing menu information from a recording medium, where the recording medium includes plural data units which are reproduced in sequence, the data units each being reproduced within a predetermined period of time, each data unit including a data pack array and a control pack, each of the data pack arrays including multiple data packs, the data packs comprising reproduction data including at least one of compressed video data and sub-picture data, at least one menu information formed from the video data and the sub-picture data being used for confirming contents of the video data and for selecting from among the video data, the menu information including a background image recorded as the video data and either a selection item or an action item represented by the sub-picture data, the control pack being positioned before the data pack array within each data unit so as to control data for controlling the selection item or the action item, the reproducing method comprising:
reading reproduction data from a data pack array and control data from a control pack;
extracting video data from the reproduction data read from the data pack array;
extracting sub-picture data from the reproduction data read from the data pack array;
extracting a status button color information table from the control data, said status button color information table having entries corresponding to one or more status buttons in said sub-picture;
extracting a status button information table from the control data, said status button information table having entries corresponding to said status buttons in said sub-picture, wherein said status button information table includes status button information, and said status button information includes (a) status button position information for indicating a position of the corresponding status button in a menu, (b) adjacent status button information for describing a direction of a next selection for a status button which is in the user selection status, and (c) a status button command for describing a status command to be executed when the status button in the user selection status is activated;
extracting from the control data the status button position information;
extracting from the control data the adjacent status button information;
extracting from the control data a status button command;
updating the sub-picture data extracted based on the control data read from the control pack; and generating reproduced menu information by synthesizing the sub-picture data updated with the video data extracted.
reading reproduction data from a data pack array and control data from a control pack;
extracting video data from the reproduction data read from the data pack array;
extracting sub-picture data from the reproduction data read from the data pack array;
extracting a status button color information table from the control data, said status button color information table having entries corresponding to one or more status buttons in said sub-picture;
extracting a status button information table from the control data, said status button information table having entries corresponding to said status buttons in said sub-picture, wherein said status button information table includes status button information, and said status button information includes (a) status button position information for indicating a position of the corresponding status button in a menu, (b) adjacent status button information for describing a direction of a next selection for a status button which is in the user selection status, and (c) a status button command for describing a status command to be executed when the status button in the user selection status is activated;
extracting from the control data the status button position information;
extracting from the control data the adjacent status button information;
extracting from the control data a status button command;
updating the sub-picture data extracted based on the control data read from the control pack; and generating reproduced menu information by synthesizing the sub-picture data updated with the video data extracted.
8. An information medium for recording data units each of which has to be played back within a given period of time, said data unit including a navigation data pack at a leading position of the data unit, and a video data pack as well as sub-picture pack arranged after said navigation data pack;
wherein each of said video data pack and sub-picture data pack includes a pack header and data packet, said video data packet includes data of a video stream according to MPEG specification, and said sub-picture data pack includes pixel data being subjected to a run-length compression;
wherein said navigation data pack includes a pack header, a first data packet, and a second data packet, said first data packet includes highlight information for highlighting a rectangular area within a sub-picture display area, and said second data packet includes data search information for searching data of said data unit;
wherein said data unit includes menu information including a background image and selection item, said background image being contained in video data of the video data packets, and said selection item being contained in sub-picture data of the sub-picture packets, and wherein said highlight information int he navigation data pack comprises:
a number of button groups each said button group representing a particular rectangular area in which a user selection item is displayed by the sub-picture data of said menu information;
a display type of the sub-picture data of each said button group;
button color information including a mixing rate of the video data with respect to the sub-picture data when the button of each said button group is selected, and including another mixing rate of the video data with respect to the sub-picture data within the button when the button is selected; and button position information representing a position of each button of said button groups.
wherein each of said video data pack and sub-picture data pack includes a pack header and data packet, said video data packet includes data of a video stream according to MPEG specification, and said sub-picture data pack includes pixel data being subjected to a run-length compression;
wherein said navigation data pack includes a pack header, a first data packet, and a second data packet, said first data packet includes highlight information for highlighting a rectangular area within a sub-picture display area, and said second data packet includes data search information for searching data of said data unit;
wherein said data unit includes menu information including a background image and selection item, said background image being contained in video data of the video data packets, and said selection item being contained in sub-picture data of the sub-picture packets, and wherein said highlight information int he navigation data pack comprises:
a number of button groups each said button group representing a particular rectangular area in which a user selection item is displayed by the sub-picture data of said menu information;
a display type of the sub-picture data of each said button group;
button color information including a mixing rate of the video data with respect to the sub-picture data when the button of each said button group is selected, and including another mixing rate of the video data with respect to the sub-picture data within the button when the button is selected; and button position information representing a position of each button of said button groups.
9. An apparatus for reproducing recorded contents of an information medium for recording data units each of which has to be played back within a given period of time, said data unit including a navigation data pack at a leading position of the data unit, and a video data pack as well as sub-picture pack arranged after said navigation data pack;
wherein each of said video data pack and sub-picture data pack includes a pack header and data packet, said video data packet includes data of a video stream according to MPEG specification, and said sub-picture data pack includes pixel data being subjected to a run-length compression;
wherein said navigation data pack includes a pack header, a first data packet, and a second data packet, said first data packet includes highlight information for highlighting a rectangular area within a sub-picture display area, and said second data packet includes data search information for searching data of said data unit;
wherein said data unit includes menu information including a background image and selection item, said background image being contained in video data of the video data packets, and said selection item being contained in sub-picture data of the sub-picture packets, and wherein said highlight information in the navigation data pack comprises:
a number of button groups, each said button group representing a particular rectangular area in which a user selection item is displayed by the sub-picture data of said menu information;
a display type of the sub-picture data of each said button group;
button color information including a mixing rate of the video data with respect to the sub-picture data when the button of each said button group is selected, and including another mixing rate of the video data with respect to the sub-picture data within the button when the button is selected; and button position information representing a position of each button of said button groups;
said reproducing apparatus comprising:
means for reading packs from the information medium in unit of a series of the data packs;
discriminating means, which receives the pack read by said reading means, for discriminating data next to the pack header contained in the received pack to determine whether the received pack includes the navigation data pack, video data pack, or sub-picture data pack;
detecting means, when said discriminating means determines that the received pack includes the navigation data pack, for detecting highlight information of playback control information contained in the data packet of the navigation pack;
means for decoding data of the video data pack and sub-picture data pack respectively determined by said discriminating means; and means, responsive to the button position information and button color information of the highlight information detected by said detecting means, for changing a color or contrast of the button in the rectangular display area of pixel data contained in the data packet of the sub-picture data pack determined by said discriminating means.
wherein each of said video data pack and sub-picture data pack includes a pack header and data packet, said video data packet includes data of a video stream according to MPEG specification, and said sub-picture data pack includes pixel data being subjected to a run-length compression;
wherein said navigation data pack includes a pack header, a first data packet, and a second data packet, said first data packet includes highlight information for highlighting a rectangular area within a sub-picture display area, and said second data packet includes data search information for searching data of said data unit;
wherein said data unit includes menu information including a background image and selection item, said background image being contained in video data of the video data packets, and said selection item being contained in sub-picture data of the sub-picture packets, and wherein said highlight information in the navigation data pack comprises:
a number of button groups, each said button group representing a particular rectangular area in which a user selection item is displayed by the sub-picture data of said menu information;
a display type of the sub-picture data of each said button group;
button color information including a mixing rate of the video data with respect to the sub-picture data when the button of each said button group is selected, and including another mixing rate of the video data with respect to the sub-picture data within the button when the button is selected; and button position information representing a position of each button of said button groups;
said reproducing apparatus comprising:
means for reading packs from the information medium in unit of a series of the data packs;
discriminating means, which receives the pack read by said reading means, for discriminating data next to the pack header contained in the received pack to determine whether the received pack includes the navigation data pack, video data pack, or sub-picture data pack;
detecting means, when said discriminating means determines that the received pack includes the navigation data pack, for detecting highlight information of playback control information contained in the data packet of the navigation pack;
means for decoding data of the video data pack and sub-picture data pack respectively determined by said discriminating means; and means, responsive to the button position information and button color information of the highlight information detected by said detecting means, for changing a color or contrast of the button in the rectangular display area of pixel data contained in the data packet of the sub-picture data pack determined by said discriminating means.
Applications Claiming Priority (3)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| JP7-114018 | 1995-04-14 | ||
| JP11401895 | 1995-04-14 | ||
| PCT/JP1996/000982 WO1996032720A1 (en) | 1995-04-14 | 1996-04-10 | Recording medium, device and method for recording data on the medium, and device and method for reproducing data from the medium |
Publications (2)
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| CA2192077A1 CA2192077A1 (en) | 1996-10-17 |
| CA2192077C true CA2192077C (en) | 2001-02-27 |
Family
ID=14626994
Family Applications (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| CA002192077A Expired - Lifetime CA2192077C (en) | 1995-04-14 | 1996-04-10 | Recording medium, apparatus and method for recording data on the recording medium, apparatus and method for reproducing data from the recording medium |
Country Status (14)
| Country | Link |
|---|---|
| US (2) | US5963704A (en) |
| EP (1) | EP0738078B1 (en) |
| KR (1) | KR100265316B1 (en) |
| CN (1) | CN1114212C (en) |
| AT (1) | ATE183609T1 (en) |
| AU (1) | AU698969B2 (en) |
| BR (1) | BR9606320B1 (en) |
| CA (1) | CA2192077C (en) |
| DE (1) | DE69603769T2 (en) |
| HK (1) | HK1014417A1 (en) |
| MY (1) | MY125669A (en) |
| NO (1) | NO324333B1 (en) |
| TW (1) | TW412726B (en) |
| WO (1) | WO1996032720A1 (en) |
Families Citing this family (108)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| JP2677775B2 (en) * | 1994-04-14 | 1997-11-17 | 株式会社東芝 | Playback device |
| CA2192077C (en) * | 1995-04-14 | 2001-02-27 | Hideki Mimura | Recording medium, apparatus and method for recording data on the recording medium, apparatus and method for reproducing data from the recording medium |
| CN1118049C (en) * | 1995-08-21 | 2003-08-13 | 松下电器产业株式会社 | Multimedia optical disk capable of developing scenes with full unexpectedness on basis of interactive control, its reproduction apparatus and its reproduction method |
| DE69601571T2 (en) | 1995-08-21 | 1999-07-01 | Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd | MULTIMEDIA OPTICAL PLATE THAT IS ABLE TO KEEP THE IMAGE CONTENT FRESH FOR LONGER TIME AND PLAYBACK DEVICE AND PROCEDURE THEREFOR |
| TW436777B (en) | 1995-09-29 | 2001-05-28 | Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd | A method and an apparatus for reproducing bitstream having non-sequential system clock data seamlessly therebetween |
| JP3748287B2 (en) | 1996-02-28 | 2006-02-22 | パイオニア株式会社 | Information reproducing apparatus and method |
| EP1134987A1 (en) * | 1996-03-29 | 2001-09-19 | Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. | Multimedia optical disc having improved interactive reproduction procedure, a reproduction apparatus and a method for such a disc |
| US6567612B2 (en) | 1996-04-05 | 2003-05-20 | Pioneer Electronic Corporation | Information record medium, apparatus for recording the same and apparatus for reproducing the same |
| JPH09282848A (en) * | 1996-04-05 | 1997-10-31 | Pioneer Electron Corp | Information recording medium, and recording apparatus and reproducing apparatus therefor |
| WO1997038527A1 (en) * | 1996-04-05 | 1997-10-16 | Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. | Multimedia optical disk on which audio data of a plurality of channels and sub-video data together with time-varying image data, and device and method of reproducing the data |
| US6798981B1 (en) | 1996-04-05 | 2004-09-28 | Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. | Multimedia optical disc for storing audio data and sub-picture data in a plurality of channels as well as moving picture data and apparatus and method for reproducing the multimedia optical disc |
| DE69701436T2 (en) | 1996-05-09 | 2000-07-06 | Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd | OPTICAL MULTIMEDIA DISC, PLAYING DEVICE AND METHOD FOR OVERLAYING A SUBordinate IMAGE ON A MAIN IMAGE IN A BALANCED WAY, INDEPENDENT FROM THE SCREEN POSITION OF THE MAIN IMAGE |
| JPH1084528A (en) * | 1996-09-10 | 1998-03-31 | Sony Corp | Recording medium reproducing device and its method |
| JP3861362B2 (en) * | 1997-03-19 | 2006-12-20 | ソニー株式会社 | Digital signal reproduction method and apparatus |
| US6741796B1 (en) * | 1997-03-25 | 2004-05-25 | Samsung Electronics, Co., Ltd. | DVD-Audio disk, and apparatus and method for playing the same |
| JP3966571B2 (en) * | 1997-04-02 | 2007-08-29 | エルエスアイ ロジック コーポレーション | High speed reproduction system and method for sub-picture unit in digital video disc |
| JP3791114B2 (en) * | 1997-04-30 | 2006-06-28 | ソニー株式会社 | Signal reproducing apparatus and method |
| US6243086B1 (en) * | 1997-05-29 | 2001-06-05 | Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. | Reproduction apparatus |
| JP3655433B2 (en) * | 1997-06-20 | 2005-06-02 | パイオニア株式会社 | Computer-readable recording medium and information reproducing apparatus |
| KR100242448B1 (en) * | 1997-06-28 | 2000-02-01 | 윤종용 | Apparatus and method for controlling high speed reproducing for digital video disk |
| KR100246762B1 (en) * | 1997-07-19 | 2000-03-15 | 윤종용 | Decoding method for video data |
| JP4416846B2 (en) * | 1997-08-22 | 2010-02-17 | ソニー株式会社 | Computer-readable recording medium recording menu control data, and menu control method and apparatus |
| USRE39745E1 (en) * | 1997-08-22 | 2007-07-24 | Sony Corporation | Recording medium retaining data for menu control, menu control method and apparatus |
| US6507696B1 (en) * | 1997-09-23 | 2003-01-14 | Ati Technologies, Inc. | Method and apparatus for providing additional DVD data |
| KR100264798B1 (en) * | 1997-12-31 | 2000-09-01 | 윤종용 | Optical disc recording apparatus and method for direct access reproducing from the disc |
| CA2231207A1 (en) * | 1998-02-11 | 1999-09-03 | Golden Card Multimedia Technology Co., Ltd. | Book-type controller for interactive multimedia system |
| US6810201B1 (en) * | 1998-03-06 | 2004-10-26 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Storage medium storing catalog information and apparatus and method for recording and/or playing back catalog information |
| US6907189B2 (en) * | 1998-03-06 | 2005-06-14 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Apparatus for recording and/or playing back catalog information |
| KR100389853B1 (en) * | 1998-03-06 | 2003-08-19 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Method for recording and reproducing catalog information |
| US7068918B1 (en) | 1998-05-01 | 2006-06-27 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Recording medium for storing real time recording/reproduction information, method and apparatus for recording and reproducing in real time, and file operating method using the same |
| JP3383580B2 (en) * | 1998-05-15 | 2003-03-04 | 株式会社東芝 | Information storage medium, information recording / reproducing apparatus and method |
| US8028318B2 (en) * | 1999-07-21 | 2011-09-27 | Touchtunes Music Corporation | Remote control unit for activating and deactivating means for payment and for displaying payment status |
| US8098140B1 (en) | 2000-07-13 | 2012-01-17 | Universal Electronics Inc. | Customizable and upgradable devices and methods related thereto |
| US7113694B2 (en) * | 1998-08-18 | 2006-09-26 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Apparatus for creating and managing navigation information in rewritable recording medium and method therefor |
| KR100306195B1 (en) * | 1998-08-18 | 2001-11-30 | 구자홍 | How to manage navigation data on rewritable recording media |
| JP3359581B2 (en) | 1998-11-25 | 2002-12-24 | パイオニア株式会社 | Information playback device |
| US7844167B1 (en) * | 1998-12-08 | 2010-11-30 | Stmicroelectronics, Inc. | System and apparatus for digital audio/video decoder splitting signal into component data streams for rendering at least two video signals |
| JP3376303B2 (en) | 1998-12-16 | 2003-02-10 | 株式会社東芝 | Optical disk, optical disk recording device, and optical disk reproducing device |
| US6542694B2 (en) * | 1998-12-16 | 2003-04-01 | Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba | Optical disc for storing moving pictures with text information and apparatus using the disc |
| DE19859923A1 (en) * | 1998-12-23 | 2000-06-29 | Thomson Brandt Gmbh | Playback device for record carriers containing information blocks |
| JP2001006330A (en) * | 1999-06-22 | 2001-01-12 | Funai Electric Co Ltd | Recording medium reproducing device |
| CN100579193C (en) * | 1999-07-09 | 2010-01-06 | 松下电器产业株式会社 | Recorder, replayer, recording method and reproducing method |
| US7133598B1 (en) * | 1999-08-20 | 2006-11-07 | Thomson Licensing | Method for converting packetized video data and corresponding navigation data into a second data format |
| US6574417B1 (en) | 1999-08-20 | 2003-06-03 | Thomson Licensing S.A. | Digital video processing and interface system for video, audio and ancillary data |
| US7099561B1 (en) | 1999-08-20 | 2006-08-29 | Thomson Licensing | User interface and processing system for digital video, audio and ancillary data |
| DE19943580C1 (en) * | 1999-09-13 | 2000-12-14 | Bayerische Motoren Werke Ag | Control device for image screen display in automobile has position of multi-function operating element for menu and/or function selection indicated by optical marking on image display screen |
| AU7606500A (en) * | 1999-09-24 | 2001-04-24 | United Video Properties, Inc. | Interactive television program guide with enhanced user interface |
| KR100407494B1 (en) | 1999-10-29 | 2003-12-01 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Method for recording stream specific information in a disc and providing the recorded information |
| KR100669896B1 (en) * | 1999-11-10 | 2007-01-18 | 톰슨 라이센싱 | Fading feature for a dvd recorder |
| US7127149B1 (en) | 1999-11-10 | 2006-10-24 | Thomson Licensing | Three-stage menu processing for digital disc recorder |
| KR100656334B1 (en) * | 1999-11-10 | 2006-12-12 | 톰슨 라이센싱 | Three-stage menu processing for digital disc recorder |
| US6871008B1 (en) * | 2000-01-03 | 2005-03-22 | Genesis Microchip Inc. | Subpicture decoding architecture and method |
| US7286745B1 (en) * | 2000-05-03 | 2007-10-23 | Sony Corporation | Providing a capability to sort contents data and to maintain a current sorting mode |
| KR100448452B1 (en) * | 2000-06-09 | 2004-09-13 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Method for supporting menu of a high-density recording medium |
| US7079113B1 (en) | 2000-07-06 | 2006-07-18 | Universal Electronics Inc. | Consumer electronic navigation system and methods related thereto |
| US6278839B1 (en) * | 2000-07-07 | 2001-08-21 | Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. | Optical disc, a recorder, a player, a recording method, and a reproducing method that are all used for the optical disc |
| JP2004516733A (en) * | 2000-12-20 | 2004-06-03 | コーニンクレッカ フィリップス エレクトロニクス エヌ ヴィ | Menu generation method and recording device for record carrier |
| WO2002078344A1 (en) * | 2001-03-26 | 2002-10-03 | Hyun-Gi An | Method for processing moving pictures responding to user's action |
| JP4509436B2 (en) * | 2001-07-30 | 2010-07-21 | 船井電機株式会社 | Optical disc additional information recording method and optical disc recording apparatus |
| KR100457512B1 (en) * | 2001-11-29 | 2004-11-17 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Optical recording medium, apparatus and method for playing the optical recoding medium |
| JP2004030799A (en) * | 2002-06-26 | 2004-01-29 | Victor Co Of Japan Ltd | Method and equipment for recording text data and audio disk, computer program and playback equipment of audio disk |
| KR100866790B1 (en) * | 2002-06-29 | 2008-11-04 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Method and apparatus for moving focus for navigation in interactive mode |
| WO2004006252A1 (en) * | 2002-07-04 | 2004-01-15 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Read-only recording medium containing menu data and menu displaying method therefor |
| RU2290705C2 (en) * | 2002-08-03 | 2006-12-27 | Самсунг Электроникс Ко., Лтд. | Information-carrying medium, recording and playback method |
| JP4133121B2 (en) * | 2002-08-27 | 2008-08-13 | 富士フイルム株式会社 | Image selection method, apparatus and program |
| JP4588968B2 (en) | 2002-10-01 | 2010-12-01 | パイオニア株式会社 | Information recording medium, information recording apparatus and method, information reproducing apparatus and method, information recording / reproducing apparatus and method, computer program for recording or reproduction control, and data structure including control signal |
| CN100342432C (en) * | 2002-10-02 | 2007-10-10 | Lg电子有限公司 | Recording medium having a data structure for managing reproduction of graphic data and recording and reproducing methods and apparatuses |
| EP1547080B1 (en) * | 2002-10-04 | 2012-01-25 | LG Electronics, Inc. | Recording medium having a data structure for managing reproduction of graphic data and recording and reproducing methods and apparatuses |
| CN100414989C (en) * | 2002-11-11 | 2008-08-27 | 索尼株式会社 | Information processing device and method, program storage medium, recording medium, and program |
| US7852411B2 (en) | 2002-11-15 | 2010-12-14 | Thomson Licensing | Method and apparatus for composition of subtitles |
| US8737810B2 (en) * | 2002-11-15 | 2014-05-27 | Thomson Licensing | Method and apparatus for cropping of subtitle elements |
| JP3702275B2 (en) * | 2003-01-06 | 2005-10-05 | 株式会社東芝 | Information reproducing apparatus, information reproducing method, and information recording medium |
| EP1608165B1 (en) | 2003-01-31 | 2010-03-17 | Panasonic Corporation | RECORDING MEDIUM, REPRODUCTION DEVICE, RECORDING METHOD, PROGRAM, AND REPRODUCTION METHOD for a graphics stream specifying interactive buttons |
| KR101027200B1 (en) * | 2003-02-21 | 2011-04-06 | 파나소닉 주식회사 | Recording medium, playback device, recording method, and playback method |
| KR100886527B1 (en) | 2003-02-28 | 2009-03-02 | 파나소닉 주식회사 | Recording medium that realizes interactive display with animation, reproduction device, recording method, computer readable recording medium, and reproduction method |
| JP4228767B2 (en) * | 2003-04-25 | 2009-02-25 | ソニー株式会社 | REPRODUCTION DEVICE, REPRODUCTION METHOD, REPRODUCTION PROGRAM, AND RECORDING MEDIUM |
| WO2004097824A1 (en) * | 2003-04-29 | 2004-11-11 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Recording medium having a data structure for managing reproduction of graphic data and methods and apparatuses of recording and reproducing |
| US7616865B2 (en) * | 2003-04-30 | 2009-11-10 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Recording medium having a data structure for managing reproduction of subtitle data and methods and apparatuses of recording and reproducing |
| JP2004343254A (en) * | 2003-05-13 | 2004-12-02 | Toshiba Corp | Information storage medium, information reproducing apparatus, and information reproducing method |
| JP4163551B2 (en) * | 2003-05-13 | 2008-10-08 | 株式会社東芝 | Information reproducing apparatus and information reproducing method |
| JP4177705B2 (en) * | 2003-05-13 | 2008-11-05 | 株式会社東芝 | Information storage medium, information reproducing apparatus, and information reproducing method |
| KR20060017821A (en) * | 2003-05-28 | 2006-02-27 | 코닌클리케 필립스 일렉트로닉스 엔.브이. | Device and method for recording information |
| KR20050005074A (en) * | 2003-07-01 | 2005-01-13 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Method for managing grahics data of high density optical disc, and high density optical disc therof |
| US20060239643A1 (en) * | 2003-07-01 | 2006-10-26 | Nobuyuki Takakuwa | Information recording medium, information recording device and method information reproduction device and method, information recording/reproduction device and method, computer program for recording or reproduction control, and data structure containing control signal |
| EP1648168A4 (en) | 2003-07-01 | 2006-08-09 | Pioneer Corp | Information recording medium, information recording device and method, information reproduction device and method, information recording/reproduction device and method, computer program for controlling recording or reproduction, and data structure containing control signal |
| KR20050004339A (en) * | 2003-07-02 | 2005-01-12 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Method for managing grahics data of high density optical disc, and high density optical disc therof |
| JP4138614B2 (en) * | 2003-09-05 | 2008-08-27 | 株式会社東芝 | Information storage medium, information reproducing apparatus, and information reproducing method |
| KR101129121B1 (en) | 2003-11-12 | 2012-03-27 | 파나소닉 주식회사 | Recording medium, playback apparatus and method, and recording method |
| KR20050064150A (en) * | 2003-12-23 | 2005-06-29 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Method for managing and reproducing a menu information of high density optical disc |
| EP1555598A1 (en) | 2004-01-14 | 2005-07-20 | Deutsche Thomson-Brandt Gmbh | Method for generating an on-screen menu |
| US8745530B2 (en) | 2004-01-14 | 2014-06-03 | Thomson Licensing | Method for generating an on-screen menu |
| US7916582B2 (en) * | 2004-05-11 | 2011-03-29 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Optical recording medium, recording/reproducing apparatus and method, initialization method, and reinitialization method |
| US7663990B2 (en) * | 2004-05-21 | 2010-02-16 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Optical recording medium having access control area and method for recording or reproducing thereof |
| KR100570781B1 (en) | 2004-08-26 | 2006-04-12 | 삼성에스디아이 주식회사 | Organic electroluminescent display and display panel and driving method thereof |
| US8117282B2 (en) | 2004-10-20 | 2012-02-14 | Clearplay, Inc. | Media player configured to receive playback filters from alternative storage mediums |
| JP4007362B2 (en) * | 2004-10-26 | 2007-11-14 | 船井電機株式会社 | Information recording / reproducing device |
| EP1819165A4 (en) * | 2004-12-02 | 2011-01-19 | Sony Corp | Encoding device and method, decoding device and method, program, recording medium, and data structure |
| US8887093B1 (en) | 2004-12-13 | 2014-11-11 | Thomson Licensing | Method for generating an on-screen menu |
| US20060143566A1 (en) * | 2004-12-28 | 2006-06-29 | Meng-Han Tsai | Recording medium, method for previewing on-demand digital multimedia data on the recording medium |
| BRPI0612974A2 (en) * | 2005-04-18 | 2010-12-14 | Clearplay Inc | computer program product, computer data signal embedded in a streaming media, method for associating a multimedia presentation with content filter information and multimedia player |
| WO2007119765A1 (en) * | 2006-04-13 | 2007-10-25 | Panasonic Corporation | Recording medium, reproducing device, recording device, system lsi, method, and program |
| JP2007298779A (en) * | 2006-04-28 | 2007-11-15 | Sony Corp | Character emphasis controller, display device, emphasis display control method, and computer program |
| JP4858059B2 (en) * | 2006-10-02 | 2012-01-18 | ソニー株式会社 | Playback device, display control method, and display control program |
| US8381132B2 (en) | 2008-04-10 | 2013-02-19 | Philips & Lite-On Digital Solutions Corporation | DVD menu navigation with reduced input button count |
| KR101735610B1 (en) * | 2010-05-06 | 2017-05-15 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Method for operating an apparatus for displaying image |
| US9792957B2 (en) | 2014-10-08 | 2017-10-17 | JBF Interlude 2009 LTD | Systems and methods for dynamic video bookmarking |
| US11882337B2 (en) | 2021-05-28 | 2024-01-23 | JBF Interlude 2009 LTD | Automated platform for generating interactive videos |
| US20230076702A1 (en) * | 2021-08-31 | 2023-03-09 | JBF Interlude 2009 LTD | Shader-based dynamic video manipulation |
Family Cites Families (68)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| US4569026A (en) * | 1979-02-05 | 1986-02-04 | Best Robert M | TV Movies that talk back |
| US4333152A (en) * | 1979-02-05 | 1982-06-01 | Best Robert M | TV Movies that talk back |
| US4305131A (en) * | 1979-02-05 | 1981-12-08 | Best Robert M | Dialog between TV movies and human viewers |
| AU4678085A (en) * | 1984-08-01 | 1986-02-25 | Intraview Systems Corp. | Interactive video and audio controller |
| JPH0750925B2 (en) * | 1986-08-11 | 1995-05-31 | 株式会社日立製作所 | Information playback device |
| EP0302119B1 (en) * | 1987-02-12 | 1996-10-30 | Dai Nippon Insatsu Kabushiki Kaisha | Method for recording and reproducing data for an optical card |
| US5065252A (en) * | 1988-02-29 | 1991-11-12 | Pioneer Electronic Corporation | Method and apparatus for recording and reproducing picture information enabling the mixing of images of a video format signal and graphic codes recorded on a single recording medium |
| JPH07118798B2 (en) * | 1988-02-29 | 1995-12-18 | パイオニア株式会社 | Image information recording and reproducing method |
| JP2938077B2 (en) * | 1988-03-11 | 1999-08-23 | パイオニア株式会社 | Image signal recording method and image reproduction method |
| JP2811445B2 (en) * | 1988-03-22 | 1998-10-15 | パイオニア株式会社 | Recording method and reproduction method of image information |
| JP2683021B2 (en) * | 1988-04-04 | 1997-11-26 | パイオニア株式会社 | Image information reproduction processing device |
| US5016113A (en) * | 1988-04-04 | 1991-05-14 | Pioneer Electronic Corporation | Apparatus for reproducing and processing picture information including graphic codes from a recording medium |
| JPH01273275A (en) * | 1988-04-25 | 1989-11-01 | Pioneer Electron Corp | Picture information recording and reproducing system |
| US5282186A (en) * | 1988-04-25 | 1994-01-25 | Pioneer Electronic Corporation | Method and apparatus for recording and reproducing picture information and recording medium |
| JPH01273268A (en) * | 1988-04-25 | 1989-11-01 | Pioneer Electron Corp | Information recording and reproducing method |
| JPH01273270A (en) * | 1988-04-25 | 1989-11-01 | Pioneer Electron Corp | Performance system and information recording and reproducing system in recording medium performance instruments |
| US5280572A (en) * | 1988-06-24 | 1994-01-18 | Time Warner Interactive Group Inc. | Method and apparatus for storing text data in subcode packs |
| US4992886A (en) * | 1988-12-20 | 1991-02-12 | Wnm Ventures, Inc. | Method and apparatus for encoding data within the subcode channel of a compact disc or laser disc |
| JP2916162B2 (en) * | 1989-03-31 | 1999-07-05 | 株式会社東芝 | Recording and playback device |
| JPH02287990A (en) * | 1989-04-27 | 1990-11-28 | Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd | Program selecting device |
| JP2531795B2 (en) * | 1989-06-29 | 1996-09-04 | パイオニア株式会社 | Image information playback device |
| DE69027643T2 (en) * | 1989-10-04 | 1996-12-19 | Mitsubishi Electric Corp | Magnetic recording and playback device |
| JP2789723B2 (en) * | 1989-10-20 | 1998-08-20 | ソニー株式会社 | Image retrieval device |
| JP3029436B2 (en) * | 1990-01-26 | 2000-04-04 | 富士写真フイルム株式会社 | Image editing and playback device |
| JPH03224379A (en) * | 1990-01-29 | 1991-10-03 | Pioneer Electron Corp | Recording and reproducing method and reproducing device |
| US5233438A (en) * | 1990-03-02 | 1993-08-03 | Brother Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha | Entertainment apparatus for producing orchestral music accompaniment and a selected background video |
| US5237648A (en) * | 1990-06-08 | 1993-08-17 | Apple Computer, Inc. | Apparatus and method for editing a video recording by selecting and displaying video clips |
| JPH0447876A (en) * | 1990-06-15 | 1992-02-18 | Aiwa Co Ltd | Digital signal recording and reproducing system |
| JPH0467490A (en) * | 1990-07-06 | 1992-03-03 | Pioneer Electron Corp | Information storing device and information reproducing device |
| JP2965330B2 (en) * | 1990-07-06 | 1999-10-18 | パイオニア株式会社 | Information playback device |
| ES2234978T3 (en) * | 1990-09-10 | 2005-07-01 | Starsight Telecast, Inc. | USER INTERFACE FOR A TELEVISION PROGRAMMING SYSTEM. |
| US5633726A (en) * | 1990-09-19 | 1997-05-27 | U.S. Philips Corporation | Digitized picture display system with added control files |
| JPH04245091A (en) * | 1991-01-30 | 1992-09-01 | Sony Corp | Disk reproducer |
| JP2793047B2 (en) * | 1991-02-08 | 1998-09-03 | シャープ株式会社 | Still image recording and playback device |
| JPH04324165A (en) * | 1991-04-23 | 1992-11-13 | Sanyo Electric Co Ltd | Disk reproducing device |
| JPH04328375A (en) * | 1991-04-30 | 1992-11-17 | Canon Inc | Magnetic tape recording and reproducing device |
| US5355353A (en) * | 1991-06-27 | 1994-10-11 | Binet Co., Ltd. | Data recording system of magneto-optic type |
| US5715224A (en) * | 1991-07-05 | 1998-02-03 | Sony Corporation | Recording medium with synthesis method default value and reproducing device |
| GB9124337D0 (en) * | 1991-11-15 | 1992-01-08 | Philips Electronic Associated | Method of storing user information items and apparatus for reproducing stored items |
| US5434678A (en) * | 1993-01-11 | 1995-07-18 | Abecassis; Max | Seamless transmission of non-sequential video segments |
| US5546191A (en) * | 1992-02-25 | 1996-08-13 | Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha | Recording and reproducing apparatus |
| JPH05250418A (en) * | 1992-03-04 | 1993-09-28 | Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd | Disk reproducing device |
| JPH0628780A (en) * | 1992-07-09 | 1994-02-04 | Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd | Disk and device for reproducing disk |
| JPH0689555A (en) * | 1992-09-08 | 1994-03-29 | Sony Corp | Video tape recorder |
| EP0622002B1 (en) * | 1992-09-22 | 1998-08-26 | Sony Corporation | Digital video signal processing apparatus and method |
| JP3282260B2 (en) * | 1993-01-18 | 2002-05-13 | ソニー株式会社 | Image reproducing apparatus and method |
| JP3102203B2 (en) * | 1993-04-15 | 2000-10-23 | 日本ビクター株式会社 | Information arrangement method for digital signal recording medium and reproducing apparatus therefor |
| US5646796A (en) * | 1993-05-10 | 1997-07-08 | Sony Corporation | Apparatus and method for recording and reproducing topic data with digital video and audio data |
| CN1110893A (en) * | 1993-06-10 | 1995-10-25 | 索尼公司 | Rational input buffer arrangements for auxiliary information in video and audio signal procesing systems |
| JPH07130102A (en) * | 1993-10-29 | 1995-05-19 | Toshiba Corp | Disk structure |
| EP0790743B1 (en) * | 1993-09-16 | 1998-10-28 | Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba | Apparatus for synchronizing compressed video and audio signals |
| US5596564A (en) * | 1993-10-08 | 1997-01-21 | Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. | Information recording medium and apparatus and method for recording and reproducing information |
| US5463565A (en) * | 1993-10-29 | 1995-10-31 | Time Warner Entertainment Co., L.P. | Data block format for software carrier and player therefor |
| US5400077A (en) * | 1993-10-29 | 1995-03-21 | Time Warner Entertainment Co., L.P. | System for generating multiple aspect ratio video signals from motion picture disk recorded in a single aspect ratio |
| EP0836192A1 (en) * | 1993-10-29 | 1998-04-15 | Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba | Multi-scene recording medium and method and apparatus for reproducing data therefrom |
| EP0677843B1 (en) * | 1993-10-29 | 1998-04-15 | Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba | Recording medium which can cope with various languages and reproduction apparatus |
| EP0651391A3 (en) * | 1993-10-29 | 1997-02-05 | Tokyo Shibaura Electric Co | Screw-threaded fastening device. |
| US5469370A (en) * | 1993-10-29 | 1995-11-21 | Time Warner Entertainment Co., L.P. | System and method for controlling play of multiple audio tracks of a software carrier |
| US5422674A (en) * | 1993-12-22 | 1995-06-06 | Digital Equipment Corporation | Remote display of an image by transmitting compressed video frames representing background and overlay portions thereof |
| JP3149303B2 (en) * | 1993-12-29 | 2001-03-26 | 松下電器産業株式会社 | Digital image encoding method and digital image decoding method |
| US5602596A (en) * | 1994-04-08 | 1997-02-11 | U S West Technologies, Inc. | Method for navigating a complex multimedia structure at an interactive user station |
| JP2677775B2 (en) * | 1994-04-14 | 1997-11-17 | 株式会社東芝 | Playback device |
| US5778142A (en) * | 1994-11-24 | 1998-07-07 | Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba | Large capacity recording medium, method and apparatus for reproducing data from a large-capacity recording medium, and method and apparatus for recording data on a large-capacity recording medium |
| US5721720A (en) * | 1994-12-28 | 1998-02-24 | Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba | Optical recording medium recording pixel data as a compressed unit data block |
| CA2168641C (en) * | 1995-02-03 | 2000-03-28 | Tetsuya Kitamura | Image information encoding/decoding system |
| US5703997A (en) * | 1995-04-14 | 1997-12-30 | Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba | Data recording medium having reproduction timing information, and system for reproducing record data by using the reproduction timing information |
| CA2192077C (en) * | 1995-04-14 | 2001-02-27 | Hideki Mimura | Recording medium, apparatus and method for recording data on the recording medium, apparatus and method for reproducing data from the recording medium |
| US5751892A (en) * | 1995-06-15 | 1998-05-12 | Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba | Multi-scene recording medium and apparatus for reproducing data therefrom |
-
1996
- 1996-04-10 CA CA002192077A patent/CA2192077C/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 1996-04-10 BR BRPI9606320-3A patent/BR9606320B1/en not_active IP Right Cessation
- 1996-04-10 KR KR1019960707083A patent/KR100265316B1/en not_active IP Right Cessation
- 1996-04-10 WO PCT/JP1996/000982 patent/WO1996032720A1/en active Application Filing
- 1996-04-10 AU AU52876/96A patent/AU698969B2/en not_active Expired
- 1996-04-10 CN CN96190516A patent/CN1114212C/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 1996-04-12 MY MYPI96001399A patent/MY125669A/en unknown
- 1996-04-12 DE DE69603769T patent/DE69603769T2/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 1996-04-12 AT AT96105820T patent/ATE183609T1/en not_active IP Right Cessation
- 1996-04-12 EP EP96105820A patent/EP0738078B1/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 1996-04-13 TW TW085104413A patent/TW412726B/en not_active IP Right Cessation
- 1996-12-13 NO NO19965356A patent/NO324333B1/en not_active IP Right Cessation
-
1998
- 1998-07-17 US US09/116,831 patent/US5963704A/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 1998-11-18 US US09/193,684 patent/US6160952A/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 1998-12-24 HK HK98115690A patent/HK1014417A1/en not_active IP Right Cessation
Also Published As
| Publication number | Publication date |
|---|---|
| NO965356D0 (en) | 1996-12-13 |
| US6160952A (en) | 2000-12-12 |
| EP0738078B1 (en) | 1999-08-18 |
| KR100265316B1 (en) | 2000-09-15 |
| BR9606320B1 (en) | 2010-11-16 |
| AU5287696A (en) | 1996-10-30 |
| MY125669A (en) | 2006-08-30 |
| NO965356L (en) | 1997-02-10 |
| ATE183609T1 (en) | 1999-09-15 |
| TW412726B (en) | 2000-11-21 |
| KR970704213A (en) | 1997-08-09 |
| BR9606320A (en) | 1997-09-16 |
| AU698969B2 (en) | 1998-11-12 |
| EP0738078A3 (en) | 1996-12-11 |
| NO324333B1 (en) | 2007-09-24 |
| WO1996032720A1 (en) | 1996-10-17 |
| CN1114212C (en) | 2003-07-09 |
| EP0738078A2 (en) | 1996-10-16 |
| CA2192077A1 (en) | 1996-10-17 |
| US5963704A (en) | 1999-10-05 |
| CN1154176A (en) | 1997-07-09 |
| DE69603769D1 (en) | 1999-09-23 |
| DE69603769T2 (en) | 2000-03-02 |
| HK1014417A1 (en) | 1999-09-24 |
Similar Documents
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| CA2192077C (en) | Recording medium, apparatus and method for recording data on the recording medium, apparatus and method for reproducing data from the recording medium | |
| US8254751B2 (en) | Recording medium capable of interactive reproducing and reproduction system for the same | |
| US5949955A (en) | Recording medium apparatus and method of recording and reproducing data with management information |
Legal Events
| Date | Code | Title | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| EEER | Examination request | ||
| MKEX | Expiry |
Effective date: 20160411 |
|
| MKEX | Expiry |
Effective date: 20160411 |